Random access procedures using multiple active bandwidth parts

ABSTRACT

Wireless communications using multiple active resources (e.g., bandwidth parts (BWP)) are described. A predetermined rule may be used to determine on which downlink (DL) BWP of multiple active DL BWPs, and/or on which uplink (UL) BWP of multiple active UL BWPs, a message is to be sent. A wireless device and/or a base station may reduce the quantity of active DL BWPs and/or active UL BWPs to monitor for a response.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No.16/418,078, filed on May 21, 2019, which claims the benefit of U.S.Provisional Application No. 62/674,550, titled “Random Access Procedurein Multiple Active Bandwidth Parts” and filed on May 21, 2018; U.S.Provisional Application No. 62/674,904, titled “Linkage in MultipleActive Bandwidth Parts” and filed on May 22, 2018; and U.S. ProvisionalApplication No. 62/688,421, titled “Random Access Procedure in MultipleActive Bandwidth Parts” and filed on Jun. 22, 2018. Each of theabove-referenced applications is hereby incorporated by reference in itsentirety.

BACKGROUND

Wireless communications may use bandwidth parts (BWPs) and/or otherwireless resources. Wireless communications may include random accessprocedures, for example, between a base station and a wireless device. Abase station may send downlink control information (DCI) for schedulingBWPs and/or random access responses (RARs) for a random accessprocedure. A wireless device may monitor DCI for various BWP operationsand/or a wireless device may monitor a BWP for RARs, which may lead toincreased power consumption and/or reduced spectral efficiency.

SUMMARY

The following summary presents a simplified summary of certain features.The summary is not an extensive overview and is not intended to identifykey or critical elements.

Wireless communications using multiple active resources (e.g., bandwidthparts) are described. A wireless device may support multiple activeresources (e.g., BWPs) in a cell, for example, to improve uplink and/ordownlink radio efficiency and/or reduce uplink signaling overhead.Sending messages (e.g., random access preambles) on more than one activeuplink (UL) resource (e.g., UL BWP), monitoring for messages (e.g.,random access responses) on more than one active downlink (DL) resource(e.g., DL BWP), and/or switching and/or activating/deactivating (e.g.,activating or deactivating) more than one active resource (e.g., UL BWP,DL BWP, BWP, etc.), may cause, for example, excessive battery powerconsumption, increased interference, and/or misalignment between devices(e.g., between a base station and a wireless device). A base station anda wireless device may use a predetermined rule to determine whichresource or resources (e.g., BWPs, UL BWPs, DL BWPs, etc.) to use forvarious messages. By using the predetermined rule, a wireless deviceand/or a base station may avoid or reduce the above issues and/or mayfacilitate reduced hardware complexity, reduced operational overhead,and greater efficiency for wireless communications using multiple activeresources (e.g., BWPs).

These and other features and advantages are described in greater detailbelow.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

Some features are shown by way of example, and not by limitation, in theaccompanying drawings. In the drawings, like numerals reference similarelements.

FIG. 1 shows an example radio access network (RAN) architecture.

FIG. 2A shows an example user plane protocol stack.

FIG. 2B shows an example control plane protocol stack.

FIG. 3 shows an example wireless device and two base stations.

FIG. 4A, FIG. 4B, FIG. 4C, and FIG. 4D show examples of uplink anddownlink signal transmission.

FIG. 5A shows an example uplink channel mapping and example uplinkphysical signals.

FIG. 5B shows an example downlink channel mapping and example downlinkphysical signals.

FIG. 6 shows an example transmission time and/or reception time for acarrier.

FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B show example sets of orthogonal frequency divisionmultiplexing (OFDM) subcarriers.

FIG. 8 shows example OFDM radio resources.

FIG. 9A shows an example channel state information reference signal(CSI-RS) and/or synchronization signal (SS) block transmission in amulti-beam system.

FIG. 9B shows an example downlink beam management procedure.

FIG. 10 shows an example of configured bandwidth parts (BWPs).

FIG. 11A and FIG. 11B show examples of multi connectivity.

FIG. 12 shows an example of a random access procedure.

FIG. 13 shows example medium access control (MAC) entities.

FIG. 14 shows an example RAN architecture.

FIG. 15 shows example radio resource control (RRC) states.

FIG. 16 shows an example of BWP operation.

FIG. 17 shows an example of BWP operation in an SCell.

FIG. 18A, FIG. 18B, and FIG. 18C show examples of multiple active BWPsoperation.

FIG. 19A and FIG. 19B show examples of BWP scheduling.

FIG. 20A, FIG. 20B, FIG. 20C, and FIG. 20D show examples of multipleactive BWPs operation.

FIG. 21A, FIG. 21B, and FIG. 21C show examples of multiple active BWPsoperation.

FIG. 22A and FIG. 22B show examples of BWP operations for random accessfor a secondary cell.

FIG. 23A and FIG. 23B show examples of multiple active BWP operations.

FIG. 24A and FIG. 24B show examples of multiple active BWP operations.

FIG. 25A and FIG. 25B show examples of multiple active BWP operations.

FIG. 26 shows an example of multiple active BWP operations.

FIG. 27 shows an example of multiple active BWP operations.

FIG. 28 shows an example method of multiple active BWP operations.

FIG. 29 shows an example method of multiple active BWP operations.

FIG. 30A and FIG. 30B show an example of a system for a random accessprocedure using BWP switching.

FIG. 31 shows an example method for BWP switching for a random accessprocedure.

FIG. 32 shows an example of a system for a random access procedure withBWP switching using multiple active BWPs.

FIG. 33 shows an example method for BWP switching for a random accessprocedure using multiple active BWPs.

FIG. 34 shows an example method for BWP activation for a random accessprocedure using multiple active BWPs.

FIG. 35 shows an example of BWP operations.

FIG. 36A and FIG. 36B show an example of BWP operations.

FIG. 37 shows an example of multiple active BWP operations.

FIG. 38 shows an example of multiple active BWP operations.

FIG. 39 shows an example method for multiple active BWP operations.

FIG. 40 shows an example method for multiple active BWP operations.

FIG. 41 shows example elements of a computing device that may be used toimplement any of the various devices described herein.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

The accompanying drawings and descriptions provide examples. It is to beunderstood that the examples shown in the drawings and/or described arenon-exclusive and that there are other examples of how features shownand described may be practiced.

Examples are provided for operation of wireless communication systemswhich may be used in the technical field of multicarrier communicationsystems. More particularly, the technology described herein may relateto multiple active bandwidth parts in multicarrier communicationsystems.

The following acronyms are used throughout the drawings and/ordescriptions, and are provided below for convenience although otheracronyms may be introduced in the detailed description:

3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project

5GC 5G Core Network

ACK Acknowledgement

AMF Access and Mobility Management Function

ARQ Automatic Repeat Request

AS Access Stratum

ASIC Application-Specific Integrated Circuit

BA Bandwidth Adaptation

BCCH Broadcast Control Channel

BCH Broadcast Channel

BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying

BWP Bandwidth Part

CA Carrier Aggregation

CC Component Carrier

CCCH Common Control CHannel

CDMA Code Division Multiple Access

CN Core Network

CP Cyclic Prefix

CP-OFDM Cyclic Prefix-Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex

C-RNTI Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier

CS Configured Scheduling

CSI Channel State Information

CSI-RS Channel State Information-Reference Signal

CQI Channel Quality Indicator

CSS Common Search Space

CU Central Unit

DC Dual Connectivity

DCCH Dedicated Control Channel

DCI Downlink Control Information

DL Downlink

DL-SCH Downlink Shared CHannel

DM-RS DeModulation Reference Signal

DRB Data Radio Bearer

DRX Discontinuous Reception

DTCH Dedicated Traffic Channel

DU Distributed Unit

EPC Evolved Packet Core

E-UTRA Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access

E-UTRAN Evolved-Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network

FDD Frequency Division Duplex

FPGA Field Programmable Gate Arrays

F1-C F1-Control plane

F1-U F1-User plane

gNB next generation Node B

HARQ Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest

HDL Hardware Description Languages

IE Information Element

IP Internet Protocol

LCID Logical Channel Identifier

LTE Long Term Evolution

MAC Media Access Control

MCG Master Cell Group

MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme

MeNB Master evolved Node B

MIB Master Information Block

MME Mobility Management Entity

MN Master Node

NACK Negative Acknowledgement

NAS Non-Access Stratum

NG CP Next Generation Control Plane

NGC Next Generation Core

NG-C NG-Control plane

ng-eNB next generation evolved Node B

NG-U NG-User plane

NR New Radio

NR MAC New Radio MAC

NR PDCP New Radio PDCP

NR PHY New Radio PHYsical

NR RLC New Radio RLC

NR RRC New Radio RRC

NSSAI Network Slice Selection Assistance Information

O&M Operation and Maintenance

OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

PBCH Physical Broadcast CHannel

PCC Primary Component Carrier

PCCH Paging Control CHannel

PCell Primary Cell

PCH Paging CHannel

PDCCH Physical Downlink Control CHannel

PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol

PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared CHannel

PDU Protocol Data Unit

PHICH Physical HARQ Indicator CHannel

PHY PHYsical

PLMN Public Land Mobile Network

PMI Precoding Matrix Indicator

PRACH Physical Random Access CHannel

PRB Physical Resource Block

PSCell Primary Secondary Cell

PSS Primary Synchronization Signal

pTAG primary Timing Advance Group

PT-RS Phase Tracking Reference Signal

PUCCH Physical Uplink Control CHannel

PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared CHannel

QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

QFI Quality of Service Indicator

QoS Quality of Service

QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

RA Random Access

RACH Random Access CHannel

RAN Radio Access Network

RAT Radio Access Technology

RA-RNTI Random Access-Radio Network Temporary Identifier

RB Resource Blocks

RBG Resource Block Groups

RI Rank indicator

RLC Radio Link Control

RRC Radio Resource Control

RS Reference Signal

RSRP Reference Signal Received Power

SCC Secondary Component Carrier

SCell Secondary Cell

SCG Secondary Cell Group

SC-FDMA Single Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access

SDAP Service Data Adaptation Protocol

SDU Service Data Unit

SeNB Secondary evolved Node B

SFN System Frame Number

S-GW Serving GateWay

SI System Information

SIB System Information Block

SMF Session Management Function

SN Secondary Node

SpCell Special Cell

SRB Signaling Radio Bearer

SRS Sounding Reference Signal

SS Synchronization Signal

SSS Secondary Synchronization Signal

sTAG secondary Timing Advance Group

TA Timing Advance

TAG Timing Advance Group

TAI Tracking Area Identifier

TAT Time Alignment Timer

TB Transport Block

TC-RNTI Temporary Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier

TDD Time Division Duplex

TDMA Time Division Multiple Access

TTI Transmission Time Interval

UCI Uplink Control Information

UE User Equipment

UL Uplink

UL-SCH Uplink Shared CHannel

UPF User Plane Function

UPGW User Plane Gateway

VHDL VHSIC Hardware Description Language

Xn-C Xn-Control plane

Xn-U Xn-User plane

Examples described herein may be implemented using various physicallayer modulation and transmission mechanisms. Example transmissionmechanisms may include, but are not limited to: Code Division MultipleAccess (CDMA), Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA),Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), Wavelet technologies, and/or thelike. Hybrid transmission mechanisms such as TDMA/CDMA, and/or OFDM/CDMAmay be used. Various modulation schemes may be used for signaltransmission in the physical layer. Examples of modulation schemesinclude, but are not limited to: phase, amplitude, code, a combinationof these, and/or the like. An example radio transmission method mayimplement Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) using Binary Phase ShiftKeying (BPSK), Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK), 16-QAM, 64-QAM,256-QAM, 1024-QAM and/or the like. Physical radio transmission may beenhanced by dynamically or semi-dynamically changing the modulation andcoding scheme, for example, depending on transmission requirementsand/or radio conditions.

FIG. 1 shows an example Radio Access Network (RAN) architecture. A RANnode may comprise a next generation Node B (gNB) (e.g., 120A, 120B)providing New Radio (NR) user plane and control plane protocolterminations towards a first wireless device (e.g., 110A). A RAN nodemay comprise a base station such as a next generation evolved Node B(ng-eNB) (e.g., 120C, 120D), providing Evolved UMTS Terrestrial RadioAccess (E-UTRA) user plane and control plane protocol terminationstowards a second wireless device (e.g., 110B). A first wireless device110A may communicate with a base station, such as a gNB 120A, over a Uuinterface. A second wireless device 110B may communicate with a basestation, such as an ng-eNB 120D, over a Uu interface. The wirelessdevices 110A and/or 110B may be structurally similar to wireless devicesshown in and/or described in connection with other drawing figures. TheNode B 120A, the Node B 120B, the Node B 120C, and/or the Node B 120Dmay be structurally similar to Nodes B and/or base stations shown inand/or described in connection with other drawing figures.

A base station, such as a gNB (e.g., 120A, 120B, etc.) and/or an ng-eNB(e.g., 120C, 120D, etc.) may host functions such as radio resourcemanagement and scheduling, IP header compression, encryption andintegrity protection of data, selection of Access and MobilityManagement Function (AMF) at wireless device (e.g., User Equipment (UE))attachment, routing of user plane and control plane data, connectionsetup and release, scheduling and transmission of paging messages (e.g.,originated from the AMF), scheduling and transmission of systembroadcast information (e.g., originated from the AMF or Operation andMaintenance (O&M)), measurement and measurement reporting configuration,transport level packet marking in the uplink, session management,support of network slicing, Quality of Service (QoS) flow management andmapping to data radio bearers, support of wireless devices in aninactive state (e.g., RRC_INACTIVE state), distribution function forNon-Access Stratum (NAS) messages, RAN sharing, dual connectivity,and/or tight interworking between NR and E-UTRA.

One or more first base stations (e.g., gNBs 120A and 120B) and/or one ormore second base stations (e.g., ng-eNBs 120C and 120D) may beinterconnected with each other via Xn interface. A first base station(e.g., gNB 120A, 120B, etc.) or a second base station (e.g., ng-eNB120C, 120D, etc.) may be connected via NG interfaces to a network, suchas a 5G Core Network (5GC). A 5GC may comprise one or more AMF/User PlanFunction (UPF) functions (e.g., 130A and/or 130B). A base station (e.g.,a gNB and/or an ng-eNB) may be connected to a UPF via an NG-User plane(NG-U) interface. The NG-U interface may provide delivery (e.g.,non-guaranteed delivery) of user plane Protocol Data Units (PDUs)between a RAN node and the UPF. A base station (e.g., a gNB and/or anng-eNB) may be connected to an AMF via an NG-Control plane (NG-C)interface. The NG-C interface may provide functions such as NG interfacemanagement, wireless device (e.g., UE) context management, wirelessdevice (e.g., UE) mobility management, transport of NAS messages,paging, PDU session management, configuration transfer, and/or warningmessage transmission.

A UPF may host functions such as anchor point for intra-/inter-RadioAccess Technology (RAT) mobility (e.g., if applicable), external PDUsession point of interconnect to data network, packet routing andforwarding, packet inspection and user plane part of policy ruleenforcement, traffic usage reporting, uplink classifier to supportrouting traffic flows to a data network, branching point to supportmulti-homed PDU session, quality of service (QoS) handling for userplane, packet filtering, gating, Uplink (UL)/Downlink (DL) rateenforcement, uplink traffic verification (e.g., Service Data Flow (SDF)to QoS flow mapping), downlink packet buffering, and/or downlink datanotification triggering.

An AMF may host functions such as NAS signaling termination, NASsignaling security, Access Stratum (AS) security control, inter CoreNetwork (CN) node signaling (e.g., for mobility between 3rd GenerationPartnership Project (3GPP) access networks), idle mode wireless devicereachability (e.g., control and execution of paging retransmission),registration area management, support of intra-system and inter-systemmobility, access authentication, access authorization including check ofroaming rights, mobility management control (e.g., subscription and/orpolicies), support of network slicing, and/or Session ManagementFunction (SMF) selection.

FIG. 2A shows an example user plane protocol stack. A Service DataAdaptation Protocol (SDAP) (e.g., 211 and 221), Packet Data ConvergenceProtocol (PDCP) (e.g., 212 and 222), Radio Link Control (RLC) (e.g., 213and 223), and Media Access Control (MAC) (e.g., 214 and 224) sublayers,and a Physical (PHY) (e.g., 215 and 225) layer, may be terminated in awireless device (e.g., 110) and in a base station (e.g., 120) on anetwork side. A PHY layer may provide transport services to higherlayers (e.g., MAC, RRC, etc.). Services and/or functions of a MACsublayer may comprise mapping between logical channels and transportchannels, multiplexing and/or demultiplexing of MAC Service Data Units(SDUs) belonging to the same or different logical channels into and/orfrom Transport Blocks (TBs) delivered to and/or from the PHY layer,scheduling information reporting, error correction through HybridAutomatic Repeat request (HARQ) (e.g., one HARQ entity per carrier forCarrier Aggregation (CA)), priority handling between wireless devicessuch as by using dynamic scheduling, priority handling between logicalchannels of a wireless device such as by using logical channelprioritization, and/or padding. A MAC entity may support one or multiplenumerologies and/or transmission timings. Mapping restrictions in alogical channel prioritization may control which numerology and/ortransmission timing a logical channel may use. An RLC sublayer maysupport transparent mode (TM), unacknowledged mode (UM), and/oracknowledged mode (AM) transmission modes. The RLC configuration may beper logical channel with no dependency on numerologies and/orTransmission Time Interval (TTI) durations. Automatic Repeat Request(ARQ) may operate on any of the numerologies and/or TTI durations withwhich the logical channel is configured. Services and functions of thePDCP layer for the user plane may comprise, for example, sequencenumbering, header compression and decompression, transfer of user data,reordering and duplicate detection, PDCP PDU routing (e.g., such as forsplit bearers), retransmission of PDCP SDUs, ciphering, deciphering andintegrity protection, PDCP SDU discard, PDCP re-establishment and datarecovery for RLC AM, and/or duplication of PDCP PDUs. Services and/orfunctions of SDAP may comprise, for example, mapping between a QoS flowand a data radio bearer. Services and/or functions of SDAP may comprisemapping a Quality of Service Indicator (QFI) in DL and UL packets. Aprotocol entity of SDAP may be configured for an individual PDU session.

FIG. 2B shows an example control plane protocol stack. A PDCP (e.g., 233and 242), RLC (e.g., 234 and 243), and MAC (e.g., 235 and 244)sublayers, and a PHY (e.g., 236 and 245) layer, may be terminated in awireless device (e.g., 110), and in a base station (e.g., 120) on anetwork side, and perform service and/or functions described above. RRC(e.g., 232 and 241) may be terminated in a wireless device and a basestation on a network side. Services and/or functions of RRC may comprisebroadcast of system information related to AS and/or NAS; paging (e.g.,initiated by a 5GC or a RAN); establishment, maintenance, and/or releaseof an RRC connection between the wireless device and RAN; securityfunctions such as key management, establishment, configuration,maintenance, and/or release of Signaling Radio Bearers (SRBs) and DataRadio Bearers (DRBs); mobility functions; QoS management functions;wireless device measurement reporting and control of the reporting;detection of and recovery from radio link failure; and/or NAS messagetransfer to/from NAS from/to a wireless device. NAS control protocol(e.g., 231 and 251) may be terminated in the wireless device and AMF(e.g., 130) on a network side. NAS control protocol may performfunctions such as authentication, mobility management between a wirelessdevice and an AMF (e.g., for 3GPP access and non-3GPP access), and/orsession management between a wireless device and an SMF (e.g., for 3GPPaccess and non-3GPP access).

A base station may configure a plurality of logical channels for awireless device. A logical channel of the plurality of logical channelsmay correspond to a radio bearer. The radio bearer may be associatedwith a QoS requirement. A base station may configure a logical channelto be mapped to one or more TTIs and/or numerologies in a plurality ofTTIs and/or numerologies. The wireless device may receive DownlinkControl Information (DCI) via a Physical Downlink Control CHannel(PDCCH) indicating an uplink grant. The uplink grant may be for a firstTTI and/or a first numerology and may indicate uplink resources fortransmission of a transport block. The base station may configure eachlogical channel in the plurality of logical channels with one or moreparameters to be used by a logical channel prioritization procedure atthe MAC layer of the wireless device. The one or more parameters maycomprise, for example, priority, prioritized bit rate, etc. A logicalchannel in the plurality of logical channels may correspond to one ormore buffers comprising data associated with the logical channel. Thelogical channel prioritization procedure may allocate the uplinkresources to one or more first logical channels in the plurality oflogical channels and/or to one or more MAC Control Elements (CEs). Theone or more first logical channels may be mapped to the first TTI and/orthe first numerology. The MAC layer at the wireless device may multiplexone or more MAC CEs and/or one or more MAC SDUs (e.g., logical channel)in a MAC PDU (e.g., transport block). The MAC PDU may comprise a MACheader comprising a plurality of MAC sub-headers. A MAC sub-header inthe plurality of MAC sub-headers may correspond to a MAC CE or a MAC SUD(e.g., logical channel) in the one or more MAC CEs and/or in the one ormore MAC SDUs. A MAC CE and/or a logical channel may be configured witha Logical Channel IDentifier (LCID). An LCID for a logical channeland/or a MAC CE may be fixed and/or pre-configured. An LCID for alogical channel and/or MAC CE may be configured for the wireless deviceby the base station. The MAC sub-header corresponding to a MAC CE and/ora MAC SDU may comprise an LCID associated with the MAC CE and/or the MACSDU.

A base station may activate, deactivate, and/or impact one or moreprocesses (e.g., set values of one or more parameters of the one or moreprocesses or start and/or stop one or more timers of the one or moreprocesses) at the wireless device, for example, by using one or more MACcommands. The one or more MAC commands may comprise one or more MACcontrol elements. The one or more processes may comprise activationand/or deactivation of PDCP packet duplication for one or more radiobearers. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) a MAC CE comprisingone or more fields. The values of the fields may indicate activationand/or deactivation of PDCP duplication for the one or more radiobearers. The one or more processes may comprise Channel StateInformation (CSI) transmission of on one or more cells. The base stationmay send (e.g., transmit) one or more MAC CEs indicating activationand/or deactivation of the CSI transmission on the one or more cells.The one or more processes may comprise activation and/or deactivation ofone or more secondary cells. The base station may send (e.g., transmit)a MAC CE indicating activation and/or deactivation of one or moresecondary cells. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or moreMAC CEs indicating starting and/or stopping of one or more DiscontinuousReception (DRX) timers at the wireless device. The base station may send(e.g., transmit) one or more MAC CEs indicating one or more timingadvance values for one or more Timing Advance Groups (TAGs).

FIG. 3 shows an example of base stations (base station 1, 120A, and basestation 2, 120B) and a wireless device 110. The wireless device 110 maycomprise a UE or any other wireless device. The base station (e.g.,120A, 120B) may comprise a Node B, eNB, gNB, ng-eNB, or any other basestation. A wireless device and/or a base station may perform one or morefunctions of a relay node. The base station 1, 120A, may comprise atleast one communication interface 320A (e.g., a wireless modem, anantenna, a wired modem, and/or the like), at least one processor 321A,and at least one set of program code instructions 323A that may bestored in non-transitory memory 322A and executable by the at least oneprocessor 321A. The base station 2, 120B, may comprise at least onecommunication interface 320B, at least one processor 321B, and at leastone set of program code instructions 323B that may be stored innon-transitory memory 322B and executable by the at least one processor321B.

A base station may comprise any number of sectors, for example: 1, 2, 3,4, or 6 sectors. A base station may comprise any number of cells, forexample, ranging from 1 to 50 cells or more. A cell may be categorized,for example, as a primary cell or secondary cell. At Radio ResourceControl (RRC) connection establishment, re-establishment, handover,etc., a serving cell may provide NAS (non-access stratum) mobilityinformation (e.g., Tracking Area Identifier (TAI)). At RRC connectionre-establishment and/or handover, a serving cell may provide securityinput. This serving cell may be referred to as the Primary Cell (PCell).In the downlink, a carrier corresponding to the PCell may be a DLPrimary Component Carrier (PCC). In the uplink, a carrier may be an ULPCC. Secondary Cells (SCells) may be configured to form together with aPCell a set of serving cells, for example, depending on wireless devicecapabilities. In a downlink, a carrier corresponding to an SCell may bea downlink secondary component carrier (DL SCC). In an uplink, a carriermay be an uplink secondary component carrier (UL SCC). An SCell may ormay not have an uplink carrier.

A cell, comprising a downlink carrier and optionally an uplink carrier,may be assigned a physical cell ID and/or a cell index. A carrier(downlink and/or uplink) may belong to one cell. The cell ID and/or cellindex may identify the downlink carrier and/or uplink carrier of thecell (e.g., depending on the context it is used). A cell ID may beequally referred to as a carrier ID, and a cell index may be referred toas a carrier index. A physical cell ID and/or a cell index may beassigned to a cell. A cell ID may be determined using a synchronizationsignal transmitted via a downlink carrier. A cell index may bedetermined using RRC messages. A first physical cell ID for a firstdownlink carrier may indicate that the first physical cell ID is for acell comprising the first downlink carrier. The same concept may beused, for example, with carrier activation and/or deactivation (e.g.,secondary cell activation and/or deactivation). A first carrier that isactivated may indicate that a cell comprising the first carrier isactivated.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) to a wireless device one ormore messages (e.g., RRC messages) comprising a plurality ofconfiguration parameters for one or more cells. One or more cells maycomprise at least one primary cell and at least one secondary cell. AnRRC message may be broadcasted and/or unicasted to the wireless device.Configuration parameters may comprise common parameters and dedicatedparameters.

Services and/or functions of an RRC sublayer may comprise at least oneof: broadcast of system information related to AS and/or NAS; paginginitiated by a 5GC and/or an NG-RAN; establishment, maintenance, and/orrelease of an RRC connection between a wireless device and an NG-RAN,which may comprise at least one of addition, modification, and/orrelease of carrier aggregation; and/or addition, modification, and/orrelease of dual connectivity in NR or between E-UTRA and NR. Servicesand/or functions of an RRC sublayer may comprise at least one ofsecurity functions comprising key management; establishment,configuration, maintenance, and/or release of Signaling Radio Bearers(SRBs) and/or Data Radio Bearers (DRBs); mobility functions which maycomprise at least one of a handover (e.g., intra NR mobility orinter-RAT mobility) and/or a context transfer; and/or a wireless devicecell selection and/or reselection and/or control of cell selection andreselection. Services and/or functions of an RRC sublayer may compriseat least one of QoS management functions; a wireless device measurementconfiguration/reporting; detection of and/or recovery from radio linkfailure; and/or NAS message transfer to and/or from a core networkentity (e.g., AMF, Mobility Management Entity (MME)) from and/or to thewireless device.

An RRC sublayer may support an RRC_Idle state, an RRC_Inactive state,and/or an RRC_Connected state for a wireless device. In an RRC_Idlestate, a wireless device may perform at least one of: Public Land MobileNetwork (PLMN) selection; receiving broadcasted system information; cellselection and/or re-selection; monitoring and/or receiving a paging formobile terminated data initiated by 5GC; paging for mobile terminateddata area managed by 5GC; and/or DRX for CN paging configured via NAS.In an RRC_Inactive state, a wireless device may perform at least one of:receiving broadcasted system information; cell selection and/orre-selection; monitoring and/or receiving a RAN and/or CN paginginitiated by an NG-RAN and/or a 5GC; RAN-based notification area (RNA)managed by an NG-RAN; and/or DRX for a RAN and/or CN paging configuredby NG-RAN/NAS. In an RRC_Idle state of a wireless device, a base station(e.g., NG-RAN) may keep a 5GC-NG-RAN connection (e.g., both C/U-planes)for the wireless device; and/or store a wireless device AS context forthe wireless device. In an RRC_Connected state of a wireless device, abase station (e.g., NG-RAN) may perform at least one of: establishmentof 5GC-NG-RAN connection (both C/U-planes) for the wireless device;storing a UE AS context for the wireless device; send (e.g., transmit)and/or receive of unicast data to and/or from the wireless device;and/or network-controlled mobility based on measurement results receivedfrom the wireless device. In an RRC_Connected state of a wirelessdevice, an NG-RAN may know a cell to which the wireless device belongs.

System information (SI) may be divided into minimum SI and other SI. Theminimum SI may be periodically broadcast. The minimum SI may comprisebasic information required for initial access and/or information foracquiring any other SI broadcast periodically and/or provisionedon-demand (e.g., scheduling information). The other SI may either bebroadcast, and/or be provisioned in a dedicated manner, such as eithertriggered by a network and/or upon request from a wireless device. Aminimum SI may be transmitted via two different downlink channels usingdifferent messages (e.g., MasterInformationBlock andSystemInformationBlockType1). Another SI may be transmitted viaSystemInformationBlockType2. For a wireless device in an RRC_Connectedstate, dedicated RRC signalling may be used for the request and deliveryof the other SI. For the wireless device in the RRC_Idle state and/or inthe RRC_Inactive state, the request may trigger a random accessprocedure.

A wireless device may report its radio access capability information,which may be static. A base station may request one or more indicationsof capabilities for a wireless device to report based on bandinformation. A temporary capability restriction request may be sent bythe wireless device (e.g., if allowed by a network) to signal thelimited availability of some capabilities (e.g., due to hardwaresharing, interference, and/or overheating) to the base station. The basestation may confirm or reject the request. The temporary capabilityrestriction may be transparent to 5GC (e.g., static capabilities may bestored in 5GC).

A wireless device may have an RRC connection with a network, forexample, if CA is configured. At RRC connection establishment,re-establishment, and/or handover procedures, a serving cell may provideNAS mobility information. At RRC connection re-establishment and/orhandover, a serving cell may provide a security input. This serving cellmay be referred to as the PCell. SCells may be configured to formtogether with the PCell a set of serving cells, for example, dependingon the capabilities of the wireless device. The configured set ofserving cells for the wireless device may comprise a PCell and one ormore SCells.

The reconfiguration, addition, and/or removal of SCells may be performedby RRC messaging. At intra-NR handover, RRC may add, remove, and/orreconfigure SCells for usage with the target PCell. Dedicated RRCsignaling may be used (e.g., if adding a new SCell) to send all requiredsystem information of the SCell (e.g., if in connected mode, wirelessdevices may not acquire broadcasted system information directly from theSCells).

The purpose of an RRC connection reconfiguration procedure may be tomodify an RRC connection, (e.g., to establish, modify, and/or releaseRBs; to perform handover; to setup, modify, and/or release measurements,for example, to add, modify, and/or release SCells and cell groups). NASdedicated information may be transferred from the network to thewireless device, for example, as part of the RRC connectionreconfiguration procedure. The RRCConnectionReconfiguration message maybe a command to modify an RRC connection. One or more RRC messages mayconvey information for measurement configuration, mobility control,and/or radio resource configuration (e.g., RBs, MAC main configuration,and/or physical channel configuration), which may comprise anyassociated dedicated NAS information and/or security configuration. Thewireless device may perform an SCell release, for example, if thereceived RRC Connection Reconfiguration message includes thesCellToReleaseList. The wireless device may perform SCell additions ormodification, for example, if the received RRC ConnectionReconfiguration message includes the sCellToAddModList.

An RRC connection establishment, reestablishment, and/or resumeprocedure may be to establish, reestablish, and/or resume an RRCconnection, respectively. An RRC connection establishment procedure maycomprise SRB1 establishment. The RRC connection establishment proceduremay be used to transfer the initial NAS dedicated information and/ormessage from a wireless device to an E-UTRAN. TheRRCConnectionReestablishment message may be used to re-establish SRB1.

A measurement report procedure may be used to transfer measurementresults from a wireless device to an NG-RAN. The wireless device mayinitiate a measurement report procedure, for example, after successfulsecurity activation. A measurement report message may be used to send(e.g., transmit) measurement results.

The wireless device 110 may comprise at least one communicationinterface 310 (e.g., a wireless modem, an antenna, and/or the like), atleast one processor 314, and at least one set of program codeinstructions 316 that may be stored in non-transitory memory 315 andexecutable by the at least one processor 314. The wireless device 110may further comprise at least one of at least one speaker and/ormicrophone 311, at least one keypad 312, at least one display and/ortouchpad 313, at least one power source 317, at least one globalpositioning system (GPS) chipset 318, and/or other peripherals 319.

The processor 314 of the wireless device 110, the processor 321A of thebase station 1 120A, and/or the processor 321B of the base station 2120B may comprise at least one of a general-purpose processor, a digitalsignal processor (DSP), a controller, a microcontroller, an applicationspecific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array(FPGA) and/or other programmable logic device, discrete gate and/ortransistor logic, discrete hardware components, and/or the like. Theprocessor 314 of the wireless device 110, the processor 321A in basestation 1 120A, and/or the processor 321B in base station 2 120B mayperform at least one of signal coding and/or processing, dataprocessing, power control, input/output processing, and/or any otherfunctionality that may enable the wireless device 110, the base station1 120A and/or the base station 2 120B to operate in a wirelessenvironment.

The processor 314 of the wireless device 110 may be connected to and/orin communication with the speaker and/or microphone 311, the keypad 312,and/or the display and/or touchpad 313. The processor 314 may receiveuser input data from and/or provide user output data to the speakerand/or microphone 311, the keypad 312, and/or the display and/ortouchpad 313. The processor 314 in the wireless device 110 may receivepower from the power source 317 and/or may be configured to distributethe power to the other components in the wireless device 110. The powersource 317 may comprise at least one of one or more dry cell batteries,solar cells, fuel cells, and/or the like. The processor 314 may beconnected to the GPS chipset 318. The GPS chipset 318 may be configuredto provide geographic location information of the wireless device 110.

The processor 314 of the wireless device 110 may further be connected toand/or in communication with other peripherals 319, which may compriseone or more software and/or hardware modules that may provide additionalfeatures and/or functionalities. For example, the peripherals 319 maycomprise at least one of an accelerometer, a satellite transceiver, adigital camera, a universal serial bus (USB) port, a hands-free headset,a frequency modulated (FM) radio unit, a media player, an Internetbrowser, and/or the like.

The communication interface 320A of the base station 1, 120A, and/or thecommunication interface 320B of the base station 2, 120B, may beconfigured to communicate with the communication interface 310 of thewireless device 110, for example, via a wireless link 330A and/or via awireless link 330B, respectively. The communication interface 320A ofthe base station 1, 120A, may communicate with the communicationinterface 320B of the base station 2 and/or other RAN and/or corenetwork nodes.

The wireless link 330A and/or the wireless link 330B may comprise atleast one of a bi-directional link and/or a directional link. Thecommunication interface 310 of the wireless device 110 may be configuredto communicate with the communication interface 320A of the base station1 120A and/or with the communication interface 320B of the base station2 120B. The base station 1 120A and the wireless device 110, and/or thebase station 2 120B and the wireless device 110, may be configured tosend and receive transport blocks, for example, via the wireless link330A and/or via the wireless link 330B, respectively. The wireless link330A and/or the wireless link 330B may use at least one frequencycarrier. Transceiver(s) may be used. A transceiver may be a device thatcomprises both a transmitter and a receiver. Transceivers may be used indevices such as wireless devices, base stations, relay nodes, computingdevices, and/or the like. Radio technology may be implemented in thecommunication interface 310, 320A, and/or 320B, and the wireless link330A and/or 330B. The radio technology may comprise one or more elementsshown in FIG. 4A, FIG. 4B, FIG. 4C, FIG. 4D, FIG. 6, FIG. 7A, FIG. 7B,FIG. 8, and associated text, described below.

Other nodes in a wireless network (e.g. AMF, UPF, SMF, etc.) maycomprise one or more communication interfaces, one or more processors,and memory storing instructions. A node (e.g., wireless device, basestation, AMF, SMF, UPF, servers, switches, antennas, and/or the like)may comprise one or more processors, and memory storing instructionsthat when executed by the one or more processors causes the node toperform certain processes and/or functions. Single-carrier and/ormulti-carrier communication operation may be performed. A non-transitorytangible computer readable media may comprise instructions executable byone or more processors to cause operation of single-carrier and/ormulti-carrier communications. An article of manufacture may comprise anon-transitory tangible computer readable machine-accessible mediumhaving instructions encoded thereon for enabling programmable hardwareto cause a node to enable operation of single-carrier and/ormulti-carrier communications. The node may include processors, memory,interfaces, and/or the like.

An interface may comprise at least one of a hardware interface, afirmware interface, a software interface, and/or a combination thereof.The hardware interface may comprise connectors, wires, and/or electronicdevices such as drivers, amplifiers, and/or the like. The softwareinterface may comprise code stored in a memory device to implementprotocol(s), protocol layers, communication drivers, device drivers,combinations thereof, and/or the like. The firmware interface maycomprise a combination of embedded hardware and/or code stored in(and/or in communication with) a memory device to implement connections,electronic device operations, protocol(s), protocol layers,communication drivers, device drivers, hardware operations, combinationsthereof, and/or the like.

A communication network may comprise the wireless device 110, the basestation 1, 120A, the base station 2, 120B, and/or any other device. Thecommunication network may comprise any number and/or type of devices,such as, for example, computing devices, wireless devices, mobiledevices, handsets, tablets, laptops, internet of things (IoT) devices,hotspots, cellular repeaters, computing devices, and/or, more generally,user equipment (e.g., UE). Although one or more of the above types ofdevices may be referenced herein (e.g., UE, wireless device, computingdevice, etc.), it should be understood that any device herein maycomprise any one or more of the above types of devices or similardevices. The communication network, and any other network referencedherein, may comprise an LTE network, a 5G network, or any other networkfor wireless communications. Apparatuses, systems, and/or methodsdescribed herein may generally be described as implemented on one ormore devices (e.g., wireless device, base station, eNB, gNB, computingdevice, etc.), in one or more networks, but it will be understood thatone or more features and steps may be implemented on any device and/orin any network. As used throughout, the term “base station” may compriseone or more of: a base station, a node, a Node B, a gNB, an eNB, anng-eNB, a relay node (e.g., an integrated access and backhaul (IAB)node), a donor node (e.g., a donor eNB, a donor gNB, etc.), an accesspoint (e.g., a WiFi access point), a computing device, a device capableof wirelessly communicating, or any other device capable of sendingand/or receiving signals. As used throughout, the term “wireless device”may comprise one or more of: a UE, a handset, a mobile device, acomputing device, a node, a device capable of wirelessly communicating,or any other device capable of sending and/or receiving signals. Anyreference to one or more of these terms/devices also considers use ofany other term/device mentioned above.

FIG. 4A, FIG. 4B, FIG. 4C and FIG. 4D show examples of uplink anddownlink signal transmission. FIG. 4A shows an example uplinktransmitter for at least one physical channel A baseband signalrepresenting a physical uplink shared channel may perform one or morefunctions. The one or more functions may comprise at least one of:scrambling (e.g., by Scrambling); modulation of scrambled bits togenerate complex-valued symbols (e.g., by a Modulation mapper); mappingof the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or severaltransmission layers (e.g., by a Layer mapper); transform precoding togenerate complex-valued symbols (e.g., by a Transform precoder);precoding of the complex-valued symbols (e.g., by a Precoder); mappingof precoded complex-valued symbols to resource elements (e.g., by aResource element mapper); generation of complex-valued time-domainSingle Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) or CP-OFDMsignal for an antenna port (e.g., by a signal gen.); and/or the like. ASC-FDMA signal for uplink transmission may be generated, for example, iftransform precoding is enabled. A CP-OFDM signal for uplink transmissionmay be generated by FIG. 4A, for example, if transform precoding is notenabled. These functions are shown as examples and other mechanisms maybe implemented.

FIG. 4B shows an example of modulation and up-conversion to the carrierfrequency of a complex-valued SC-FDMA or CP-OFDM baseband signal for anantenna port and/or for the complex-valued Physical Random AccessCHannel (PRACH) baseband signal. Filtering may be performed prior totransmission.

FIG. 4C shows an example of downlink transmissions. The baseband signalrepresenting a downlink physical channel may perform one or morefunctions. The one or more functions may comprise: scrambling of codedbits in a codeword to be transmitted on a physical channel (e.g., byScrambling); modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valuedmodulation symbols (e.g., by a Modulation mapper); mapping of thecomplex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmissionlayers (e.g., by a Layer mapper); precoding of the complex-valuedmodulation symbols on a layer for transmission on the antenna ports(e.g., by Precoding); mapping of complex-valued modulation symbols foran antenna port to resource elements (e.g., by a Resource elementmapper); generation of complex-valued time-domain OFDM signal for anantenna port (e.g., by an OFDM signal gen.); and/or the like. Thesefunctions are shown as examples and other mechanisms may be implemented.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) a first symbol and a secondsymbol on an antenna port, to a wireless device. The wireless device mayinfer the channel (e.g., fading gain, multipath delay, etc.) forconveying the second symbol on the antenna port, from the channel forconveying the first symbol on the antenna port. A first antenna port anda second antenna port may be quasi co-located, for example, if one ormore large-scale properties of the channel over which a first symbol onthe first antenna port is conveyed may be inferred from the channel overwhich a second symbol on a second antenna port is conveyed. The one ormore large-scale properties may comprise at least one of: delay spread;Doppler spread; Doppler shift; average gain; average delay; and/orspatial receiving (Rx) parameters.

FIG. 4D shows an example modulation and up-conversion to the carrierfrequency of the complex-valued OFDM baseband signal for an antennaport. Filtering may be performed prior to transmission.

FIG. 5A shows example uplink channel mapping and example uplink physicalsignals. A physical layer may provide one or more information transferservices to a MAC and/or one or more higher layers. The physical layermay provide the one or more information transfer services to the MAC viaone or more transport channels. An information transfer service mayindicate how and/or with what characteristics data is transferred overthe radio interface.

Uplink transport channels may comprise an Uplink-Shared CHannel (UL-SCH)501 and/or a Random Access CHannel (RACH) 502. A wireless device maysend (e.g., transmit) one or more uplink DM-RSs 506 to a base stationfor channel estimation, for example, for coherent demodulation of one ormore uplink physical channels (e.g., PUSCH 503 and/or PUCCH 504). Thewireless device may send (e.g., transmit) to a base station at least oneuplink DM-RS 506 with PUSCH 503 and/or PUCCH 504, wherein the at leastone uplink DM-RS 506 may be spanning a same frequency range as acorresponding physical channel. The base station may configure thewireless device with one or more uplink DM-RS configurations. At leastone DM-RS configuration may support a front-loaded DM-RS pattern. Afront-loaded DM-RS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., 1or 2 adjacent OFDM symbols). One or more additional uplink DM-RS may beconfigured to send (e.g., transmit) at one or more symbols of a PUSCHand/or PUCCH. The base station may semi-statically configure thewireless device with a maximum number of front-loaded DM-RS symbols forPUSCH and/or PUCCH. The wireless device may schedule a single-symbolDM-RS and/or double symbol DM-RS based on a maximum number offront-loaded DM-RS symbols, wherein the base station may configure thewireless device with one or more additional uplink DM-RS for PUSCHand/or PUCCH. A new radio network may support, for example, at least forCP-OFDM, a common DM-RS structure for DL and UL, wherein a DM-RSlocation, DM-RS pattern, and/or scrambling sequence may be same ordifferent.

Whether or not an uplink PT-RS 507 is present may depend on an RRCconfiguration. A presence of the uplink PT-RS may be wirelessdevice-specifically configured. A presence and/or a pattern of theuplink PT-RS 507 in a scheduled resource may be wirelessdevice-specifically configured by a combination of RRC signaling and/orassociation with one or more parameters used for other purposes (e.g.,Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS)) which may be indicated by DCI. Ifconfigured, a dynamic presence of uplink PT-RS 507 may be associatedwith one or more DCI parameters comprising at least a MCS. A radionetwork may support a plurality of uplink PT-RS densities defined intime/frequency domain. If present, a frequency domain density may beassociated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth. Awireless device may assume a same precoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RSport. A number of PT-RS ports may be less than a number of DM-RS portsin a scheduled resource. The uplink PT-RS 507 may be confined in thescheduled time/frequency duration for a wireless device.

A wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) an SRS 508 to a base stationfor channel state estimation, for example, to support uplink channeldependent scheduling and/or link adaptation. The SRS 508 sent (e.g.,transmitted) by the wireless device may allow for the base station toestimate an uplink channel state at one or more different frequencies. Abase station scheduler may use an uplink channel state to assign one ormore resource blocks of a certain quality (e.g., above a qualitythreshold) for an uplink PUSCH transmission from the wireless device.The base station may semi-statically configure the wireless device withone or more SRS resource sets. For an SRS resource set, the base stationmay configure the wireless device with one or more SRS resources. An SRSresource set applicability may be configured by a higher layer (e.g.,RRC) parameter. An SRS resource in each of one or more SRS resource setsmay be sent (e.g., transmitted) at a time instant, for example, if ahigher layer parameter indicates beam management. The wireless devicemay send (e.g., transmit) one or more SRS resources in different SRSresource sets simultaneously. A new radio network may support aperiodic,periodic, and/or semi-persistent SRS transmissions. The wireless devicemay send (e.g., transmit) SRS resources, for example, based on one ormore trigger types. The one or more trigger types may comprise higherlayer signaling (e.g., RRC) and/or one or more DCI formats (e.g., atleast one DCI format may be used for a wireless device to select atleast one of one or more configured SRS resource sets). An SRS triggertype 0 may refer to an SRS triggered based on a higher layer signaling.An SRS trigger type 1 may refer to an SRS triggered based on one or moreDCI formats. The wireless device may be configured to send (e.g.,transmit) the SRS 508 after a transmission of PUSCH 503 andcorresponding uplink DM-RS 506, for example, if PUSCH 503 and the SRS508 are transmitted in a same slot.

A base station may semi-statically configure a wireless device with oneor more SRS configuration parameters indicating at least one offollowing: an SRS resource configuration identifier, a number of SRSports, time domain behavior of SRS resource configuration (e.g., anindication of periodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS), slot(mini-slot, and/or subframe) level periodicity and/or offset for aperiodic and/or aperiodic SRS resource, a number of OFDM symbols in aSRS resource, starting OFDM symbol of a SRS resource, an SRS bandwidth,a frequency hopping bandwidth, a cyclic shift, and/or an SRS sequenceID.

FIG. 5B shows an example downlink channel mapping and downlink physicalsignals. Downlink transport channels may comprise a Downlink-SharedCHannel (DL-SCH) 511, a Paging CHannel (PCH) 512, and/or a BroadcastCHannel (BCH) 513. A transport channel may be mapped to one or morecorresponding physical channels. An UL-SCH 501 may be mapped to aPhysical Uplink Shared CHannel (PUSCH) 503. A RACH 502 may be mapped toa PRACH 505. A DL-SCH 511 and a PCH 512 may be mapped to a PhysicalDownlink Shared CHannel (PDSCH) 514. A BCH 513 may be mapped to aPhysical Broadcast CHannel (PBCH) 516.

A radio network may comprise one or more downlink and/or uplinktransport channels. The radio network may comprise one or more physicalchannels without a corresponding transport channel. The one or morephysical channels may be used for an Uplink Control Information (UCI)509 and/or a Downlink Control Information (DCI) 517. A Physical UplinkControl CHannel (PUCCH) 504 may carry UCI 509 from a wireless device toa base station. A Physical Downlink Control CHannel (PDCCH) 515 maycarry the DCI 517 from a base station to a wireless device. The radionetwork (e.g., NR) may support the UCI 509 multiplexing in the PUSCH503, for example, if the UCI 509 and the PUSCH 503 transmissions maycoincide in a slot (e.g., at least in part). The UCI 509 may comprise atleast one of a CSI, an Acknowledgement (ACK)/Negative Acknowledgement(NACK), and/or a scheduling request. The DCI 517 via the PDCCH 515 mayindicate at least one of following: one or more downlink assignmentsand/or one or more uplink scheduling grants.

In uplink, a wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) one or moreReference Signals (RSs) to a base station. The one or more RSs maycomprise at least one of a Demodulation-RS (DM-RS) 506, a PhaseTracking-RS (PT-RS) 507, and/or a Sounding RS (SRS) 508. In downlink, abase station may send (e.g., transmit, unicast, multicast, and/orbroadcast) one or more RSs to a wireless device. The one or more RSs maycomprise at least one of a Primary Synchronization Signal(PSS)/Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS) 521, a CSI-RS 522, a DM-RS523, and/or a PT-RS 524.

In a time domain, an SS/PBCH block may comprise one or more OFDM symbols(e.g., 4 OFDM symbols numbered in increasing order from 0 to 3) withinthe SS/PBCH block. An SS/PBCH block may comprise the PSS/SSS 521 and/orthe PBCH 516. In the frequency domain, an SS/PBCH block may comprise oneor more contiguous subcarriers (e.g., 240 contiguous subcarriers withthe subcarriers numbered in increasing order from 0 to 239) within theSS/PBCH block. The PSS/SSS 521 may occupy, for example, 1 OFDM symboland 127 subcarriers. The PBCH 516 may span across, for example, 3 OFDMsymbols and 240 subcarriers. A wireless device may assume that one ormore SS/PBCH blocks transmitted with a same block index may be quasico-located, for example, with respect to Doppler spread, Doppler shift,average gain, average delay, and/or spatial Rx parameters. A wirelessdevice may not assume quasi co-location for other SS/PBCH blocktransmissions. A periodicity of an SS/PBCH block may be configured by aradio network (e.g., by an RRC signaling). One or more time locations inwhich the SS/PBCH block may be sent may be determined by sub-carrierspacing. A wireless device may assume a band-specific sub-carrierspacing for an SS/PBCH block, for example, unless a radio network hasconfigured the wireless device to assume a different sub-carrierspacing.

The downlink CSI-RS 522 may be used for a wireless device to acquirechannel state information. A radio network may support periodic,aperiodic, and/or semi-persistent transmission of the downlink CSI-RS522. A base station may semi-statically configure and/or reconfigure awireless device with periodic transmission of the downlink CSI-RS 522. Aconfigured CSI-RS resources may be activated and/or deactivated. Forsemi-persistent transmission, an activation and/or deactivation of aCSI-RS resource may be triggered dynamically. A CSI-RS configuration maycomprise one or more parameters indicating at least a number of antennaports. A base station may configure a wireless device with 32 ports, orany other number of ports. A base station may semi-statically configurea wireless device with one or more CSI-RS resource sets. One or moreCSI-RS resources may be allocated from one or more CSI-RS resource setsto one or more wireless devices. A base station may semi-staticallyconfigure one or more parameters indicating CSI RS resource mapping, forexample, time-domain location of one or more CSI-RS resources, abandwidth of a CSI-RS resource, and/or a periodicity. A wireless devicemay be configured to use the same OFDM symbols for the downlink CSI-RS522 and the Control Resource Set (CORESET), for example, if the downlinkCSI-RS 522 and the CORESET are spatially quasi co-located and resourceelements associated with the downlink CSI-RS 522 are the outside of PRBsconfigured for the CORESET. A wireless device may be configured to usethe same OFDM symbols for downlink CSI-RS 522 and SS/PBCH blocks, forexample, if the downlink CSI-RS 522 and SS/PBCH blocks are spatiallyquasi co-located and resource elements associated with the downlinkCSI-RS 522 are outside of the PRBs configured for the SS/PBCH blocks.

A wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) one or more downlink DM-RSs523 to a base station for channel estimation, for example, for coherentdemodulation of one or more downlink physical channels (e.g., PDSCH514). A radio network may support one or more variable and/orconfigurable DM-RS patterns for data demodulation. At least one downlinkDM-RS configuration may support a front-loaded DM-RS pattern. Afront-loaded DM-RS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., 1or 2 adjacent OFDM symbols). A base station may semi-staticallyconfigure a wireless device with a maximum number of front-loaded DM-RSsymbols for PDSCH 514. A DM-RS configuration may support one or moreDM-RS ports. A DM-RS configuration may support at least 8 orthogonaldownlink DM-RS ports, for example, for single user-MIMO. ADM-RSconfiguration may support 12 orthogonal downlink DM-RS ports, forexample, for multiuser-MIMO. A radio network may support, for example,at least for CP-OFDM, a common DM-RS structure for DL and UL, wherein aDM-RS location, DM-RS pattern, and/or scrambling sequence may be thesame or different.

Whether or not the downlink PT-RS 524 is present may depend on an RRCconfiguration. A presence of the downlink PT-RS 524 may be wirelessdevice-specifically configured. A presence and/or a pattern of thedownlink PT-RS 524 in a scheduled resource may be wirelessdevice-specifically configured, for example, by a combination of RRCsignaling and/or an association with one or more parameters used forother purposes (e.g., MCS) which may be indicated by the DCI. Ifconfigured, a dynamic presence of the downlink PT-RS 524 may beassociated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at least MCS. Aradio network may support a plurality of PT-RS densities in atime/frequency domain. If present, a frequency domain density may beassociated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth. Awireless device may assume the same precoding for a DMRS port and aPT-RS port. A number of PT-RS ports may be less than a number of DM-RSports in a scheduled resource. The downlink PT-RS 524 may be confined inthe scheduled time/frequency duration for a wireless device.

FIG. 6 shows an example transmission time and reception time for acarrier. A multicarrier OFDM communication system may include one ormore carriers, for example, ranging from 1 to 32 carriers (such as forcarrier aggregation) or ranging from 1 to 64 carriers (such as for dualconnectivity). Different radio frame structures may be supported (e.g.,for FDD and/or for TDD duplex mechanisms). FIG. 6 shows an example frametiming. Downlink and uplink transmissions may be organized into radioframes 601. Radio frame duration may be 10 milliseconds (ms). A 10 msradio frame 601 may be divided into ten equally sized subframes 602,each with a 1 ms duration. Subframe(s) may comprise one or more slots(e.g., slots 603 and 605) depending on subcarrier spacing and/or CPlength. For example, a subframe with 15 kHz, 30 kHz, 60 kHz, 120 kHz,240 kHz and 480 kHz subcarrier spacing may comprise one, two, four,eight, sixteen and thirty-two slots, respectively. In FIG. 6, a subframemay be divided into two equally sized slots 603 with 0.5 ms duration.For example, 10 subframes may be available for downlink transmission and10 subframes may be available for uplink transmissions in a 10 msinterval. Other subframe durations such as, for example, 0.5 ms, 1 ms, 2ms, and 5 ms may be supported. Uplink and downlink transmissions may beseparated in the frequency domain. Slot(s) may include a plurality ofOFDM symbols 604. The number of OFDM symbols 604 in a slot 605 maydepend on the cyclic prefix length. A slot may be 14 OFDM symbols forthe same subcarrier spacing of up to 480 kHz with normal CP. A slot maybe 12 OFDM symbols for the same subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz withextended CP. A slot may comprise downlink, uplink, and/or a downlinkpart and an uplink part, and/or alike.

FIG. 7A shows example sets of OFDM subcarriers. A base station maycommunicate with a wireless device using a carrier having an examplechannel bandwidth 700. Arrow(s) in the example may depict a subcarrierin a multicarrier OFDM system. The OFDM system may use technology suchas OFDM technology, SC-FDMA technology, and/or the like. An arrow 701shows a subcarrier transmitting information symbols. A subcarrierspacing 702, between two contiguous subcarriers in a carrier, may be anyone of 15 kHz, 30 kHz, 60 kHz, 120 kHz, 240 kHz, or any other frequency.Different subcarrier spacing may correspond to different transmissionnumerologies. A transmission numerology may comprise at least: anumerology index; a value of subcarrier spacing; and/or a type of cyclicprefix (CP). A base station may send (e.g., transmit) to and/or receivefrom a wireless device via a number of subcarriers 703 in a carrier. Abandwidth occupied by a number of subcarriers 703 (e.g., transmissionbandwidth) may be smaller than the channel bandwidth 700 of a carrier,for example, due to guard bands 704 and 705. Guard bands 704 and 705 maybe used to reduce interference to and from one or more neighborcarriers. A number of subcarriers (e.g., transmission bandwidth) in acarrier may depend on the channel bandwidth of the carrier and/or thesubcarrier spacing. A transmission bandwidth, for a carrier with a 20MHz channel bandwidth and a 15 kHz subcarrier spacing, may be in numberof 1024 subcarriers.

A base station and a wireless device may communicate with multiplecomponent carriers (CCs), for example, if configured with CA. Differentcomponent carriers may have different bandwidth and/or differentsubcarrier spacing, for example, if CA is supported. A base station maysend (e.g., transmit) a first type of service to a wireless device via afirst component carrier. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) asecond type of service to the wireless device via a second componentcarrier. Different types of services may have different servicerequirements (e.g., data rate, latency, reliability), which may besuitable for transmission via different component carriers havingdifferent subcarrier spacing and/or different bandwidth.

FIG. 7B shows examples of component carriers. A first component carriermay comprise a first number of subcarriers 706 having a first subcarrierspacing 709. A second component carrier may comprise a second number ofsubcarriers 707 having a second subcarrier spacing 710. A thirdcomponent carrier may comprise a third number of subcarriers 708 havinga third subcarrier spacing 711. Carriers in a multicarrier OFDMcommunication system may be contiguous carriers, non-contiguouscarriers, or a combination of both contiguous and non-contiguouscarriers.

FIG. 8 shows an example of OFDM radio resources. A carrier may have atransmission bandwidth 801. A resource grid may be in a structure offrequency domain 802 and time domain 803. A resource grid may comprise afirst number of OFDM symbols in a subframe and a second number ofresource blocks, starting from a common resource block indicated byhigher-layer signaling (e.g., RRC signaling), for a transmissionnumerology and a carrier. In a resource grid, a resource element 805 maycomprise a resource unit that may be identified by a subcarrier indexand a symbol index. A subframe may comprise a first number of OFDMsymbols 807 that may depend on a numerology associated with a carrier. Asubframe may have 14 OFDM symbols for a carrier, for example, if asubcarrier spacing of a numerology of a carrier is 15 kHz. A subframemay have 28 OFDM symbols, for example, if a subcarrier spacing of anumerology is 30 kHz. A subframe may have 56 OFDM symbols, for example,if a subcarrier spacing of a numerology is 60 kHz. A subcarrier spacingof a numerology may comprise any other frequency. A second number ofresource blocks comprised in a resource grid of a carrier may depend ona bandwidth and a numerology of the carrier.

A resource block 806 may comprise 12 subcarriers. Multiple resourceblocks may be grouped into a Resource Block Group (RBG) 804. A size of aRBG may depend on at least one of: a RRC message indicating a RBG sizeconfiguration; a size of a carrier bandwidth; and/or a size of abandwidth part of a carrier. A carrier may comprise multiple bandwidthparts. A first bandwidth part of a carrier may have a differentfrequency location and/or a different bandwidth from a second bandwidthpart of the carrier.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device, adownlink control information comprising a downlink or uplink resourceblock assignment. A base station may send (e.g., transmit) to and/orreceive from, a wireless device, data packets (e.g., transport blocks).The data packets may be scheduled on and transmitted via one or moreresource blocks and one or more slots indicated by parameters indownlink control information and/or RRC message(s). A starting symbolrelative to a first slot of the one or more slots may be indicated tothe wireless device. A base station may send (e.g., transmit) to and/orreceive from, a wireless device, data packets. The data packets may bescheduled for transmission on one or more RBGs and in one or more slots.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device, downlinkcontrol information comprising a downlink assignment. The base stationmay send (e.g., transmit) the DCI via one or more PDCCHs. The downlinkassignment may comprise parameters indicating at least one of amodulation and coding format; resource allocation; and/or HARQinformation related to the DL-SCH. The resource allocation may compriseparameters of resource block allocation; and/or slot allocation. A basestation may allocate (e.g., dynamically) resources to a wireless device,for example, via a Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier (C-RNTI) onone or more PDCCHs. The wireless device may monitor the one or morePDCCHs, for example, in order to find possible allocation if itsdownlink reception is enabled. The wireless device may receive one ormore downlink data packets on one or more PDSCH scheduled by the one ormore PDCCHs, for example, if the wireless device successfully detectsthe one or more PDCCHs.

A base station may allocate Configured Scheduling (CS) resources fordown link transmission to a wireless device. The base station may send(e.g., transmit) one or more RRC messages indicating a periodicity ofthe CS grant. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) DCI via a PDCCHaddressed to a Configured Scheduling-RNTI (CS-RNTI) activating the CSresources. The DCI may comprise parameters indicating that the downlinkgrant is a CS grant. The CS grant may be implicitly reused according tothe periodicity defined by the one or more RRC messages. The CS grantmay be implicitly reused, for example, until deactivated.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device via oneor more PDCCHs, downlink control information comprising an uplink grant.The uplink grant may comprise parameters indicating at least one of amodulation and coding format; a resource allocation; and/or HARQinformation related to the UL-SCH. The resource allocation may compriseparameters of resource block allocation; and/or slot allocation. Thebase station may dynamically allocate resources to the wireless devicevia a C-RNTI on one or more PDCCHs. The wireless device may monitor theone or more PDCCHs, for example, in order to find possible resourceallocation. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) one or moreuplink data packets via one or more PUSCH scheduled by the one or morePDCCHs, for example, if the wireless device successfully detects the oneor more PDCCHs.

The base station may allocate CS resources for uplink data transmissionto a wireless device. The base station may transmit one or more RRCmessages indicating a periodicity of the CS grant. The base station maysend (e.g., transmit) DCI via a PDCCH addressed to a CS-RNTI to activatethe CS resources. The DCI may comprise parameters indicating that theuplink grant is a CS grant. The CS grant may be implicitly reusedaccording to the periodicity defined by the one or more RRC message, TheCS grant may be implicitly reused, for example, until deactivated.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) DCI and/or control signalingvia a PDCCH. The DCI may comprise a format of a plurality of formats.The DCI may comprise downlink and/or uplink scheduling information(e.g., resource allocation information, HARQ related parameters, MCS),request(s) for CSI (e.g., aperiodic CQI reports), request(s) for an SRS,uplink power control commands for one or more cells, one or more timinginformation (e.g., TB transmission/reception timing, HARQ feedbacktiming, etc.), and/or the like. The DCI may indicate an uplink grantcomprising transmission parameters for one or more transport blocks. TheDCI may indicate a downlink assignment indicating parameters forreceiving one or more transport blocks. The DCI may be used by the basestation to initiate a contention-free random access at the wirelessdevice. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) DCI comprising a slotformat indicator (SFI) indicating a slot format. The base station maysend (e.g., transmit) DCI comprising a preemption indication indicatingthe PRB(s) and/or OFDM symbol(s) in which a wireless device may assumeno transmission is intended for the wireless device. The base stationmay send (e.g., transmit) DCI for group power control of the PUCCH, thePUSCH, and/or an SRS. DCI may correspond to an RNTI. The wireless devicemay obtain an RNTI after or in response to completing the initial access(e.g., C-RNTI). The base station may configure an RNTI for the wireless(e.g., CS-RNTI, TPC-CS-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, TPC-PUSCH-RNTI,TPC-SRS-RNTI, etc.). The wireless device may determine (e.g., compute)an RNTI (e.g., the wireless device may determine the RA-RNTI based onresources used for transmission of a preamble). An RNTI may have apre-configured value (e.g., P-RNTI or SI-RNTI). The wireless device maymonitor a group common search space which may be used by the basestation for sending (e.g., transmitting) DCIs that are intended for agroup of wireless devices. A group common DCI may correspond to an RNTIwhich is commonly configured for a group of wireless devices. Thewireless device may monitor a wireless device-specific search space. Awireless device specific DCI may correspond to an RNTI configured forthe wireless device.

A communications system (e.g., an NR system) may support a single beamoperation and/or a multi-beam operation. In a multi-beam operation, abase station may perform a downlink beam sweeping to provide coveragefor common control channels and/or downlink SS blocks, which maycomprise at least a PSS, a SSS, and/or PBCH. A wireless device maymeasure quality of a beam pair link using one or more RSs. One or moreSS blocks, or one or more CSI-RS resources (e.g., which may beassociated with a CSI-RS resource index (CRI)), and/or one or moreDM-RSs of a PBCH, may be used as an RS for measuring a quality of a beampair link. The quality of a beam pair link may be based on a referencesignal received power (RSRP) value, a reference signal received quality(RSRQ) value, and/or a CSI value measured on RS resources. The basestation may indicate whether an RS resource, used for measuring a beampair link quality, is quasi-co-located (QCLed) with DM-RSs of a controlchannel. An RS resource and DM-RSs of a control channel may be calledQCLed, for example, if channel characteristics from a transmission on anRS to a wireless device, and that from a transmission on a controlchannel to a wireless device, are similar or the same under a configuredcriterion. In a multi-beam operation, a wireless device may perform anuplink beam sweeping to access a cell.

A wireless device may be configured to monitor a PDCCH on one or morebeam pair links simultaneously, for example, depending on a capabilityof the wireless device. This monitoring may increase robustness againstbeam pair link blocking. A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one ormore messages to configure the wireless device to monitor the PDCCH onone or more beam pair links in different PDCCH OFDM symbols. A basestation may send (e.g., transmit) higher layer signaling (e.g., RRCsignaling) and/or a MAC CE comprising parameters related to the Rx beamsetting of the wireless device for monitoring the PDCCH on one or morebeam pair links. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) anindication of a spatial QCL assumption between an DL RS antenna port(s)(e.g., a cell-specific CSI-RS, a wireless device-specific CSI-RS, an SSblock, and/or a PBCH with or without DM-RSs of the PBCH) and/or DL RSantenna port(s) for demodulation of a DL control channel. Signaling forbeam indication for a PDCCH may comprise MAC CE signaling, RRCsignaling, DCI signaling, and/or specification-transparent and/orimplicit method, and/or any combination of signaling methods.

A base station may indicate spatial QCL parameters between DL RS antennaport(s) and DM-RS antenna port(s) of a DL data channel, for example, forreception of a unicast DL data channel. The base station may send (e.g.,transmit) DCI (e.g., downlink grants) comprising information indicatingthe RS antenna port(s). The information may indicate RS antenna port(s)that may be QCL-ed with the DM-RS antenna port(s). A different set ofDM-RS antenna port(s) for a DL data channel may be indicated as QCL witha different set of the RS antenna port(s).

FIG. 9A shows an example of beam sweeping in a DL channel. In anRRC_INACTIVE state or RRC_IDLE state, a wireless device may assume thatSS blocks form an SS burst 940, and an SS burst set 950. The SS burstset 950 may have a given periodicity. A base station 120 may send (e.g.,transmit) SS blocks in multiple beams, together forming a SS burst 940,for example, in a multi-beam operation. One or more SS blocks may besent (e.g., transmitted) on one beam. If multiple SS bursts 940 aretransmitted with multiple beams, SS bursts together may form SS burstset 950.

A wireless device may use CSI-RS for estimating a beam quality of a linkbetween a wireless device and a base station, for example, in the multibeam operation. A beam may be associated with a CSI-RS. A wirelessdevice may (e.g., based on a RSRP measurement on CSI-RS) report a beamindex, which may be indicated in a CRI for downlink beam selectionand/or associated with an RSRP value of a beam. A CSI-RS may be sent(e.g., transmitted) on a CSI-RS resource, which may comprise at leastone of: one or more antenna ports and/or one or more time and/orfrequency radio resources. A CSI-RS resource may be configured in acell-specific way such as by common RRC signaling, or in a wirelessdevice-specific way such as by dedicated RRC signaling and/or L1/L2signaling. Multiple wireless devices covered by a cell may measure acell-specific CSI-RS resource. A dedicated subset of wireless devicescovered by a cell may measure a wireless device-specific CSI-RSresource.

A CSI-RS resource may be sent (e.g., transmitted) periodically, usingaperiodic transmission, or using a multi-shot or semi-persistenttransmission. In a periodic transmission in FIG. 9A, a base station 120may send (e.g., transmit) configured CSI-RS resources 940 periodicallyusing a configured periodicity in a time domain. In an aperiodictransmission, a configured CSI-RS resource may be sent (e.g.,transmitted) in a dedicated time slot. In a multi-shot and/orsemi-persistent transmission, a configured CSI-RS resource may be sent(e.g., transmitted) within a configured period. Beams used for CSI-RStransmission may have a different beam width than beams used forSS-blocks transmission.

FIG. 9B shows an example of a beam management procedure, such as in anexample new radio network. The base station 120 and/or the wirelessdevice 110 may perform a downlink L1/L2 beam management procedure. Oneor more of the following downlink L1/L2 beam management procedures maybe performed within one or more wireless devices 110 and one or morebase stations 120. A P1 procedure 910 may be used to enable the wirelessdevice 110 to measure one or more Transmission (Tx) beams associatedwith the base station 120, for example, to support a selection of afirst set of Tx beams associated with the base station 120 and a firstset of Rx beam(s) associated with the wireless device 110. A basestation 120 may sweep a set of different Tx beams, for example, forbeamforming at a base station 120 (such as shown in the top row, in acounter-clockwise direction). A wireless device 110 may sweep a set ofdifferent Rx beams, for example, for beamforming at a wireless device110 (such as shown in the bottom row, in a clockwise direction). A P2procedure 920 may be used to enable a wireless device 110 to measure oneor more Tx beams associated with a base station 120, for example, topossibly change a first set of Tx beams associated with a base station120. A P2 procedure 920 may be performed on a possibly smaller set ofbeams (e.g., for beam refinement) than in the P1 procedure 910. A P2procedure 920 may be a special example of a P1 procedure 910. A P3procedure 930 may be used to enable a wireless device 110 to measure atleast one Tx beam associated with a base station 120, for example, tochange a first set of Rx beams associated with a wireless device 110.

A wireless device 110 may send (e.g., transmit) one or more beammanagement reports to a base station 120. In one or more beam managementreports, a wireless device 110 may indicate one or more beam pairquality parameters comprising one or more of: a beam identification; anRSRP; a Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI), Channel Quality Indicator(CQI), and/or Rank Indicator (RI) of a subset of configured beams. Basedon one or more beam management reports, the base station 120 may send(e.g., transmit) to a wireless device 110 a signal indicating that oneor more beam pair links are one or more serving beams. The base station120 may send (e.g., transmit) the PDCCH and the PDSCH for a wirelessdevice 110 using one or more serving beams.

A communications network (e.g., a new radio network) may support aBandwidth Adaptation (BA). Receive and/or transmit bandwidths that maybe configured for a wireless device using a BA may not be large. Receiveand/or transmit bandwidth may not be as large as a bandwidth of a cell.Receive and/or transmit bandwidths may be adjustable. A wireless devicemay change receive and/or transmit bandwidths, for example, to reduce(e.g., shrink) the bandwidth(s) at (e.g., during) a period of lowactivity such as to save power. A wireless device may change a locationof receive and/or transmit bandwidths in a frequency domain, forexample, to increase scheduling flexibility. A wireless device maychange a subcarrier spacing, for example, to allow different services.

A Bandwidth Part (BWP) may comprise a subset of a total cell bandwidthof a cell. A base station may configure a wireless device with one ormore BWPs, for example, to achieve a BA. A base station may indicate, toa wireless device, which of the one or more (configured) BWPs is anactive BWP.

FIG. 10 shows an example of BWP configurations. BWPs may be configuredas follows: BWP1 (1010 and 1050) with a width of 40 MHz and subcarrierspacing of 15 kHz; BWP2 (1020 and 1040) with a width of 10 MHz andsubcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; BWP3 1030 with a width of 20 MHz andsubcarrier spacing of 60 kHz. Any number of BWP configurations maycomprise any other width and subcarrier spacing combination.

A wireless device, configured for operation in one or more BWPs of acell, may be configured by one or more higher layers (e.g., RRC layer).The wireless device may be configured for a cell with: a set of one ormore BWPs (e.g., at most four BWPs) for reception (e.g., a DL BWP set)in a DL bandwidth by at least one parameter DL-BWP; and a set of one ormore BWPs (e.g., at most four BWPs) for transmissions (e.g., UL BWP set)in an UL bandwidth by at least one parameter UL-BWP.

A base station may configure a wireless device with one or more UL andDL BWP pairs, for example, to enable BA on the PCell. To enable BA onSCells (e.g., for CA), a base station may configure a wireless device atleast with one or more DL BWPs (e.g., there may be none in an UL).

An initial active DL BWP may comprise at least one of a location andnumber of contiguous PRBs, a subcarrier spacing, or a cyclic prefix, forexample, for a control resource set for at least one common searchspace. For operation on the PCell, one or more higher layer parametersmay indicate at least one initial UL BWP for a random access procedure.If a wireless device is configured with a secondary carrier on a primarycell, the wireless device may be configured with an initial BWP forrandom access procedure on a secondary carrier.

A wireless device may expect that a center frequency for a DL BWP may besame as a center frequency for an UL BWP, for example, for unpairedspectrum operation. A base station may semi-statically configure awireless device for a cell with one or more parameters, for example, fora DL BWP or an UL BWP in a set of one or more DL BWPs or one or more ULBWPs, respectively. The one or more parameters may indicate one or moreof following: a subcarrier spacing; a cyclic prefix; a number ofcontiguous PRBs; an index in the set of one or more DL BWPs and/or oneor more UL BWPs; a link between a DL BWP and an UL BWP from a set ofconfigured DL BWPs and UL BWPs; a DCI detection to a PDSCH receptiontiming; a PDSCH reception to a HARQ-ACK transmission timing value; a DCIdetection to a PUSCH transmission timing value; and/or an offset of afirst PRB of a DL bandwidth or an UL bandwidth, respectively, relativeto a first PRB of a bandwidth.

For a DL BWP in a set of one or more DL BWPs on a PCell, a base stationmay configure a wireless device with one or more control resource setsfor at least one type of common search space and/or one wirelessdevice-specific search space. A base station may not configure awireless device without a common search space on a PCell, or on aPSCell, in an active DL BWP. For an UL BWP in a set of one or more ULBWPs, a base station may configure a wireless device with one or moreresource sets for one or more PUCCH transmissions.

DCI may comprise a BWP indicator field. The BWP indicator field valuemay indicate an active DL BWP, from a configured DL BWP set, for one ormore DL receptions. The BWP indicator field value may indicate an activeUL BWP, from a configured UL BWP set, for one or more UL transmissions.

For a PCell, a base station may semi-statically configure a wirelessdevice with a default DL BWP among configured DL BWPs. If a wirelessdevice is not provided a default DL BWP, a default BWP may be an initialactive DL BWP.

A base station may configure a wireless device with a timer value for aPCell. A wireless device may start a timer (e.g., a BWP inactivitytimer), for example, if a wireless device detects DCI indicating anactive DL BWP, other than a default DL BWP, for a paired spectrumoperation, and/or if a wireless device detects DCI indicating an activeDL BWP or UL BWP, other than a default DL BWP or UL BWP, for an unpairedspectrum operation. The wireless device may increment the timer by aninterval of a first value (e.g., the first value may be 1 millisecond,0.5 milliseconds, or any other time duration), for example, if thewireless device does not detect DCI at (e.g., during) the interval for apaired spectrum operation or for an unpaired spectrum operation. Thetimer may expire at a time that the timer is equal to the timer value. Awireless device may switch to the default DL BWP from an active DL BWP,for example, if the timer expires.

A base station may semi-statically configure a wireless device with oneor more BWPs. A wireless device may switch an active BWP from a firstBWP to a second BWP, for example, after or in response to receiving DCIindicating the second BWP as an active BWP, and/or after or in responseto an expiry of BWP inactivity timer (e.g., the second BWP may be adefault BWP). FIG. 10 shows an example of three BWPs configured, BWP1(1010 and 1050), BWP2 (1020 and 1040), and BWP3 (1030). BWP2 (1020 and1040) may be a default BWP. BWP1 (1010) may be an initial active BWP. Awireless device may switch an active BWP from BWP1 1010 to BWP2 1020,for example, after or in response to an expiry of the BWP inactivitytimer. A wireless device may switch an active BWP from BWP2 1020 to BWP31030, for example, after or in response to receiving DCI indicating BWP31030 as an active BWP. Switching an active BWP from BWP3 1030 to BWP21040 and/or from BWP2 1040 to BWP1 1050 may be after or in response toreceiving DCI indicating an active BWP, and/or after or in response toan expiry of BWP inactivity timer.

Wireless device procedures on a secondary cell may be same as on aprimary cell using the timer value for the secondary cell and thedefault DL BWP for the secondary cell, for example, if a wireless deviceis configured for a secondary cell with a default DL BWP amongconfigured DL BWPs and a timer value. A wireless device may use anindicated DL BWP and an indicated UL BWP on a secondary cell as arespective first active DL BWP and first active UL BWP on a secondarycell or carrier, for example, if a base station configures a wirelessdevice with a first active DL BWP and a first active UL BWP on asecondary cell or carrier.

FIG. 11A and FIG. 11B show packet flows using a multi connectivity(e.g., dual connectivity, multi connectivity, tight interworking, and/orthe like). FIG. 11A shows an example of a protocol structure of awireless device 110 (e.g., UE) with CA and/or multi connectivity. FIG.11B shows an example of a protocol structure of multiple base stationswith CA and/or multi connectivity. The multiple base stations maycomprise a master node, MN 1130 (e.g., a master node, a master basestation, a master gNB, a master eNB, and/or the like) and a secondarynode, SN 1150 (e.g., a secondary node, a secondary base station, asecondary gNB, a secondary eNB, and/or the like). A master node 1130 anda secondary node 1150 may co-work to communicate with a wireless device110.

If multi connectivity is configured for a wireless device 110, thewireless device 110, which may support multiple reception and/ortransmission functions in an RRC connected state, may be configured toutilize radio resources provided by multiple schedulers of a multiplebase stations. Multiple base stations may be inter-connected via anon-ideal or ideal backhaul (e.g., Xn interface, X2 interface, and/orthe like). A base station involved in multi connectivity for a certainwireless device may perform at least one of two different roles: a basestation may act as a master base station or act as a secondary basestation. In multi connectivity, a wireless device may be connected toone master base station and one or more secondary base stations. Amaster base station (e.g., the MN 1130) may provide a master cell group(MCG) comprising a primary cell and/or one or more secondary cells for awireless device (e.g., the wireless device 110). A secondary basestation (e.g., the SN 1150) may provide a secondary cell group (SCG)comprising a primary secondary cell (PSCell) and/or one or moresecondary cells for a wireless device (e.g., the wireless device 110).

In multi connectivity, a radio protocol architecture that a bearer usesmay depend on how a bearer is setup. Three different types of bearersetup options may be supported: an MCG bearer, an SCG bearer, and/or asplit bearer. A wireless device may receive and/or send (e.g., transmit)packets of an MCG bearer via one or more cells of the MCG. A wirelessdevice may receive and/or send (e.g., transmit) packets of an SCG bearervia one or more cells of an SCG. Multi-connectivity may indicate havingat least one bearer configured to use radio resources provided by thesecondary base station. Multi-connectivity may or may not be configuredand/or implemented.

A wireless device (e.g., wireless device 110) may send (e.g., transmit)and/or receive: packets of an MCG bearer via an SDAP layer (e.g., SDAP1110), a PDCP layer (e.g., NR PDCP 1111), an RLC layer (e.g., MN RLC1114), and a MAC layer (e.g., MN MAC 1118); packets of a split bearervia an SDAP layer (e.g., SDAP 1110), a PDCP layer (e.g., NR PDCP 1112),one of a master or secondary RLC layer (e.g., MN RLC 1115, SN RLC 1116),and one of a master or secondary MAC layer (e.g., MN MAC 1118, SN MAC1119); and/or packets of an SCG bearer via an SDAP layer (e.g., SDAP1110), a PDCP layer (e.g., NR PDCP 1113), an RLC layer (e.g., SN RLC1117), and a MAC layer (e.g., MN MAC 1119).

A master base station (e.g., MN 1130) and/or a secondary base station(e.g., SN 1150) may send (e.g., transmit) and/or receive: packets of anMCG bearer via a master or secondary node SDAP layer (e.g., SDAP 1120,SDAP 1140), a master or secondary node PDCP layer (e.g., NR PDCP 1121,NR PDCP 1142), a master node RLC layer (e.g., MN RLC 1124, MN RLC 1125),and a master node MAC layer (e.g., MN MAC 1128); packets of an SCGbearer via a master or secondary node SDAP layer (e.g., SDAP 1120, SDAP1140), a master or secondary node PDCP layer (e.g., NR PDCP 1122, NRPDCP 1143), a secondary node RLC layer (e.g., SN RLC 1146, SN RLC 1147),and a secondary node MAC layer (e.g., SN MAC 1148); packets of a splitbearer via a master or secondary node SDAP layer (e.g., SDAP 1120, SDAP1140), a master or secondary node PDCP layer (e.g., NR PDCP 1123, NRPDCP 1141), a master or secondary node RLC layer (e.g., MN RLC 1126, SNRLC 1144, SN RLC 1145, MN RLC 1127), and a master or secondary node MAClayer (e.g., MN MAC 1128, SN MAC 1148).

In multi connectivity, a wireless device may configure multiple MACentities, such as one MAC entity (e.g., MN MAC 1118) for a master basestation, and other MAC entities (e.g., SN MAC 1119) for a secondary basestation. In multi-connectivity, a configured set of serving cells for awireless device may comprise two subsets: an MCG comprising servingcells of a master base station, and SCGs comprising serving cells of asecondary base station. For an SCG, one or more of followingconfigurations may be used. At least one cell of an SCG may have aconfigured UL CC and at least one cell of a SCG, named as primarysecondary cell (e.g., PSCell, PCell of SCG, PCell), and may beconfigured with PUCCH resources. If an SCG is configured, there may beat least one SCG bearer or one split bearer. After or upon detection ofa physical layer problem or a random access problem on a PSCell, or anumber of NR RLC retransmissions has been reached associated with theSCG, or after or upon detection of an access problem on a PSCellassociated with (e.g., during) a SCG addition or an SCG change: an RRCconnection re-establishment procedure may not be triggered, ULtransmissions towards cells of an SCG may be stopped, a master basestation may be informed by a wireless device of a SCG failure type, a DLdata transfer over a master base station may be maintained (e.g., for asplit bearer). An NR RLC acknowledged mode (AM) bearer may be configuredfor a split bearer. A PCell and/or a PSCell may not be de-activated. APSCell may be changed with a SCG change procedure (e.g., with securitykey change and a RACH procedure). A bearer type change between a splitbearer and a SCG bearer, and/or simultaneous configuration of a SCG anda split bearer, may or may not be supported.

With respect to interactions between a master base station and asecondary base stations for multi-connectivity, one or more of thefollowing may be used. A master base station and/or a secondary basestation may maintain RRM measurement configurations of a wirelessdevice. A master base station may determine (e.g., based on receivedmeasurement reports, traffic conditions, and/or bearer types) to requesta secondary base station to provide additional resources (e.g., servingcells) for a wireless device. After or upon receiving a request from amaster base station, a secondary base station may create and/or modify acontainer that may result in a configuration of additional serving cellsfor a wireless device (or decide that the secondary base station has noresource available to do so). For a wireless device capabilitycoordination, a master base station may provide (e.g., all or a part of)an AS configuration and wireless device capabilities to a secondary basestation. A master base station and a secondary base station may exchangeinformation about a wireless device configuration such as by using RRCcontainers (e.g., inter-node messages) carried via Xn messages. Asecondary base station may initiate a reconfiguration of the secondarybase station existing serving cells (e.g., PUCCH towards the secondarybase station). A secondary base station may decide which cell is aPSCell within a SCG. A master base station may or may not change contentof RRC configurations provided by a secondary base station. A masterbase station may provide recent (and/or the latest) measurement resultsfor SCG cell(s), for example, if an SCG addition and/or an SCG SCelladdition occurs. A master base station and secondary base stations mayreceive information of SFN and/or subframe offset of each other from anOAM and/or via an Xn interface (e.g., for a purpose of DRX alignmentand/or identification of a measurement gap). Dedicated RRC signaling maybe used for sending required system information of a cell as for CA, forexample, if adding a new SCG SCell, except for an SFN acquired from anMIB of a PSCell of a SCG.

FIG. 12 shows an example of a random access procedure. One or moreevents may trigger a random access procedure. For example, one or moreevents may be at least one of following: initial access from RRC_IDLE,RRC connection re-establishment procedure, handover, DL or UL dataarrival in (e.g., during) a state of RRC_CONNECTED (e.g., if ULsynchronization status is non-synchronized), transition fromRRC_Inactive, and/or request for other system information. A PDCCHorder, a MAC entity, and/or a beam failure indication may initiate arandom access procedure.

A random access procedure may comprise or be one of at least acontention based random access procedure and/or a contention free randomaccess procedure. A contention based random access procedure maycomprise one or more Msg 1 1220 transmissions, one or more Msg2 1230transmissions, one or more Msg3 1240 transmissions, and contentionresolution 1250. A contention free random access procedure may compriseone or more Msg 1 1220 transmissions and one or more Msg2 1230transmissions. One or more of Msg 1 1220, Msg 2 1230, Msg 3 1240, and/orcontention resolution 1250 may be transmitted in the same step. Atwo-step random access procedure, for example, may comprise a firsttransmission (e.g., Msg A) and a second transmission (e.g., Msg B). Thefirst transmission (e.g., Msg A) may comprise transmitting, by awireless device (e.g., wireless device 110) to a base station (e.g.,base station 120), one or more messages indicating an equivalent and/orsimilar contents of Msg1 1220 and Msg3 1240 of a four-step random accessprocedure. The second transmission (e.g., Msg B) may comprisetransmitting, by the base station (e.g., base station 120) to a wirelessdevice (e.g., wireless device 110) after or in response to the firstmessage, one or more messages indicating an equivalent and/or similarcontent of Msg2 1230 and contention resolution 1250 of a four-steprandom access procedure.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit, unicast, multicast, broadcast,etc.), to a wireless device, a RACH configuration 1210 via one or morebeams. The RACH configuration 1210 may comprise one or more parametersindicating at least one of following: an available set of PRACHresources for a transmission of a random access preamble, initialpreamble power (e.g., random access preamble initial received targetpower), an RSRP threshold for a selection of a SS block andcorresponding PRACH resource, a power-ramping factor (e.g., randomaccess preamble power ramping step), a random access preamble index, amaximum number of preamble transmissions, preamble group A and group B,a threshold (e.g., message size) to determine the groups of randomaccess preambles, a set of one or more random access preambles for asystem information request and corresponding PRACH resource(s) (e.g., ifany), a set of one or more random access preambles for a beam failurerecovery procedure and corresponding PRACH resource(s) (e.g., if any), atime window to monitor RA response(s), a time window to monitorresponse(s) on a beam failure recovery procedure, and/or a contentionresolution timer.

The Msg 1 1220 may comprise one or more transmissions of a random accesspreamble. For a contention based random access procedure, a wirelessdevice may select an SS block with an RSRP above the RSRP threshold. Ifrandom access preambles group B exists, a wireless device may select oneor more random access preambles from a group A or a group B, forexample, depending on a potential Msg3 1240 size. If a random accesspreambles group B does not exist, a wireless device may select the oneor more random access preambles from a group A. A wireless device mayselect a random access preamble index randomly (e.g., with equalprobability or a normal distribution) from one or more random accesspreambles associated with a selected group. If a base stationsemi-statically configures a wireless device with an association betweenrandom access preambles and SS blocks, the wireless device may select arandom access preamble index randomly with equal probability from one ormore random access preambles associated with a selected SS block and aselected group.

A wireless device may initiate a contention free random accessprocedure, for example, based on a beam failure indication from a lowerlayer. A base station may semi-statically configure a wireless devicewith one or more contention free PRACH resources for a beam failurerecovery procedure associated with at least one of SS blocks and/orCSI-RSs. A wireless device may select a random access preamble indexcorresponding to a selected SS block or a CSI-RS from a set of one ormore random access preambles for a beam failure recovery procedure, forexample, if at least one of the SS blocks with an RSRP above a firstRSRP threshold amongst associated SS blocks is available, and/or if atleast one of CSI-RSs with a RSRP above a second RSRP threshold amongstassociated CSI-RSs is available.

A wireless device may receive, from a base station, a random accesspreamble index via PDCCH or RRC for a contention free random accessprocedure. The wireless device may select a random access preambleindex, for example, if a base station does not configure a wirelessdevice with at least one contention free PRACH resource associated withSS blocks or CSI-RS. The wireless device may select the at least one SSblock and/or select a random access preamble corresponding to the atleast one SS block, for example, if a base station configures thewireless device with one or more contention free PRACH resourcesassociated with SS blocks and/or if at least one SS block with a RSRPabove a first RSRP threshold amongst associated SS blocks is available.The wireless device may select the at least one CSI-RS and/or select arandom access preamble corresponding to the at least one CSI-RS, forexample, if a base station configures a wireless device with one or morecontention free PRACH resources associated with CSI-RSs and/or if atleast one CSI-RS with a RSRP above a second RSPR threshold amongst theassociated CSI-RSs is available.

A wireless device may perform one or more Msg1 1220 transmissions, forexample, by sending (e.g., transmitting) the selected random accesspreamble. The wireless device may determine a PRACH occasion from one ormore PRACH occasions corresponding to a selected SS block, for example,if the wireless device selects an SS block and is configured with anassociation between one or more PRACH occasions and/or one or more SSblocks. The wireless device may determine a PRACH occasion from one ormore PRACH occasions corresponding to a selected CSI-RS, for example, ifthe wireless device selects a CSI-RS and is configured with anassociation between one or more PRACH occasions and one or more CSI-RSs.The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit), to a base station, aselected random access preamble via a selected PRACH occasions. Thewireless device may determine a transmit power for a transmission of aselected random access preamble at least based on an initial preamblepower and a power-ramping factor. The wireless device may determine anRA-RNTI associated with a selected PRACH occasion in which a selectedrandom access preamble is sent (e.g., transmitted). The wireless devicemay not determine an RA-RNTI for a beam failure recovery procedure. Thewireless device may determine an RA-RNTI at least based on an index of afirst OFDM symbol, an index of a first slot of a selected PRACHoccasions, and/or an uplink carrier index for a transmission of Msg11220.

A wireless device may receive, from a base station, a random accessresponse, Msg 2 1230. The wireless device may start a time window (e.g.,ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a random access response. For a beamfailure recovery procedure, the base station may configure the wirelessdevice with a different time window (e.g., bfr-ResponseWindow) tomonitor response to on a beam failure recovery request. The wirelessdevice may start a time window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow orbfr-ResponseWindow) at a start of a first PDCCH occasion, for example,after a fixed duration of one or more symbols from an end of a preambletransmission. If the wireless device sends (e.g., transmits) multiplepreambles, the wireless device may start a time window at a start of afirst PDCCH occasion after a fixed duration of one or more symbols froman end of a first preamble transmission. The wireless device may monitora PDCCH of a cell for at least one random access response identified bya RA-RNTI, or for at least one response to a beam failure recoveryrequest identified by a C-RNTI, at a time that a timer for a time windowis running.

A wireless device may determine that a reception of random accessresponse is successful, for example, if at least one random accessresponse comprises a random access preamble identifier corresponding toa random access preamble sent (e.g., transmitted) by the wirelessdevice. The wireless device may determine that the contention freerandom access procedure is successfully completed, for example, if areception of a random access response is successful. The wireless devicemay determine that a contention free random access procedure issuccessfully complete, for example, if a contention free random accessprocedure is triggered for a beam failure recovery request and if aPDCCH transmission is addressed to a C-RNTI. The wireless device maydetermine that the random access procedure is successfully completed,and may indicate a reception of an acknowledgement for a systeminformation request to upper layers, for example, if at least one randomaccess response comprises a random access preamble identifier. Thewireless device may stop sending (e.g., transmitting) remainingpreambles (if any) after or in response to a successful reception of acorresponding random access response, for example, if the wirelessdevice has signaled multiple preamble transmissions.

The wireless device may perform one or more Msg 3 1240 transmissions,for example, after or in response to a successful reception of randomaccess response (e.g., for a contention based random access procedure).The wireless device may adjust an uplink transmission timing, forexample, based on a timing advanced command indicated by a random accessresponse. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) one or moretransport blocks, for example, based on an uplink grant indicated by arandom access response. Subcarrier spacing for PUSCH transmission forMsg3 1240 may be provided by at least one higher layer (e.g., RRC)parameter. The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) a random accesspreamble via a PRACH, and Msg3 1240 via PUSCH, on the same cell. A basestation may indicate an UL BWP for a PUSCH transmission of Msg3 1240 viasystem information block. The wireless device may use HARQ for aretransmission of Msg 3 1240.

Multiple wireless devices may perform Msg 1 1220, for example, bysending (e.g., transmitting) the same preamble to a base station. Themultiple wireless devices may receive, from the base station, the samerandom access response comprising an identity (e.g., TC-RNTI).Contention resolution (e.g., comprising the wireless device 110receiving contention resolution 1250) may be used to increase thelikelihood that a wireless device does not incorrectly use an identityof another wireless device. The contention resolution 1250 may be basedon, for example, a C-RNTI on a PDCCH, and/or a wireless devicecontention resolution identity on a DL-SCH. If a base station assigns aC-RNTI to a wireless device, the wireless device may perform contentionresolution (e.g., comprising receiving contention resolution 1250), forexample, based on a reception of a PDCCH transmission that is addressedto the C-RNTI. The wireless device may determine that contentionresolution is successful, and/or that a random access procedure issuccessfully completed, for example, after or in response to detecting aC-RNTI on a PDCCH. If a wireless device has no valid C-RNTI, acontention resolution may be addressed by using a TC-RNTI. If a MAC PDUis successfully decoded and a MAC PDU comprises a wireless devicecontention resolution identity MAC CE that matches or otherwisecorresponds with the CCCH SDU sent (e.g., transmitted) in Msg3 1250, thewireless device may determine that the contention resolution (e.g.,comprising contention resolution 1250) is successful and/or the wirelessdevice may determine that the random access procedure is successfullycompleted.

FIG. 13 shows an example structure for MAC entities. A wireless devicemay be configured to operate in a multi-connectivity mode. A wirelessdevice in RRC_CONNECTED with multiple Rx/Tx may be configured to utilizeradio resources provided by multiple schedulers that may be located in aplurality of base stations. The plurality of base stations may beconnected via a non-ideal or ideal backhaul over the Xn interface. Abase station in a plurality of base stations may act as a master basestation or as a secondary base station. A wireless device may beconnected to and/or in communication with, for example, one master basestation and one or more secondary base stations. A wireless device maybe configured with multiple MAC entities, for example, one MAC entityfor a master base station, and one or more other MAC entities forsecondary base station(s). A configured set of serving cells for awireless device may comprise two subsets: an MCG comprising servingcells of a master base station, and one or more SCGs comprising servingcells of a secondary base station(s). FIG. 13 shows an example structurefor MAC entities in which a MCG and a SCG are configured for a wirelessdevice.

At least one cell in a SCG may have a configured UL CC. A cell of the atleast one cell may comprise a PSCell or a PCell of a SCG, or a PCell. APSCell may be configured with PUCCH resources. There may be at least oneSCG bearer, or one split bearer, for a SCG that is configured. After orupon detection of a physical layer problem or a random access problem ona PSCell, after or upon reaching a number of RLC retransmissionsassociated with the SCG, and/or after or upon detection of an accessproblem on a PSCell associated with (e.g., during) a SCG addition or aSCG change: an RRC connection re-establishment procedure may not betriggered, UL transmissions towards cells of a SCG may be stopped,and/or a master base station may be informed by a wireless device of aSCG failure type and DL data transfer over a master base station may bemaintained.

A MAC sublayer may provide services such as data transfer and radioresource allocation to upper layers (e.g., 1310 or 1320). A MAC sublayermay comprise a plurality of MAC entities (e.g., 1350 and 1360). A MACsublayer may provide data transfer services on logical channels. Toaccommodate different kinds of data transfer services, multiple types oflogical channels may be defined. A logical channel may support transferof a particular type of information. A logical channel type may bedefined by what type of information (e.g., control or data) istransferred. BCCH, PCCH, CCCH and/or DCCH may be control channels, andDTCH may be a traffic channel. A first MAC entity (e.g., 1310) mayprovide services on PCCH, BCCH, CCCH, DCCH, DTCH, and/or MAC controlelements. A second MAC entity (e.g., 1320) may provide services on BCCH,DCCH, DTCH, and/or MAC control elements.

A MAC sublayer may expect from a physical layer (e.g., 1330 or 1340)services such as data transfer services, signaling of HARQ feedback,and/or signaling of scheduling request or measurements (e.g., CQI). Indual connectivity, two MAC entities may be configured for a wirelessdevice: one for a MCG and one for a SCG. A MAC entity of a wirelessdevice may handle a plurality of transport channels. A first MAC entitymay handle first transport channels comprising a PCCH of a MCG, a firstBCH of the MCG, one or more first DL-SCHs of the MCG, one or more firstUL-SCHs of the MCG, and/or one or more first RACHs of the MCG. A secondMAC entity may handle second transport channels comprising a second BCHof a SCG, one or more second DL-SCHs of the SCG, one or more secondUL-SCHs of the SCG, and/or one or more second RACHs of the SCG.

If a MAC entity is configured with one or more SCells, there may bemultiple DL-SCHs, multiple UL-SCHs, and/or multiple RACHs per MACentity. There may be one DL-SCH and/or one UL-SCH on an SpCell. Theremay be one DL-SCH, zero or one UL-SCH, and/or zero or one RACH for anSCell. A DL-SCH may support receptions using different numerologiesand/or TTI duration within a MAC entity. An UL-SCH may supporttransmissions using different numerologies and/or TTI duration withinthe MAC entity.

A MAC sublayer may support different functions. The MAC sublayer maycontrol these functions with a control (e.g., Control 1355 and/orControl 1365) element. Functions performed by a MAC entity may compriseone or more of: mapping between logical channels and transport channels(e.g., in uplink or downlink), multiplexing (e.g., (De-) Multiplexing1352 and/or (De-) Multiplexing 1362) of MAC SDUs from one or differentlogical channels onto transport blocks (TBs) to be delivered to thephysical layer on transport channels (e.g., in uplink), demultiplexing(e.g., (De-) Multiplexing 1352 and/or (De-) Multiplexing 1362) of MACSDUs to one or different logical channels from transport blocks (TBs)delivered from the physical layer on transport channels (e.g., indownlink), scheduling information reporting (e.g., in uplink), errorcorrection through HARQ in uplink and/or downlink (e.g., 1363), andlogical channel prioritization in uplink (e.g., Logical ChannelPrioritization 1351 and/or Logical Channel Prioritization 1361). A MACentity may handle a random access process (e.g., Random Access Control1354 and/or Random Access Control 1364).

FIG. 14 shows an example of a RAN architecture comprising one or morebase stations. A protocol stack (e.g., RRC, SDAP, PDCP, RLC, MAC, and/orPHY) may be supported at a node. A base station (e.g., gNB 120A and/or120B) may comprise a base station central unit (CU) (e.g., gNB-CU 1420Aor 1420B) and at least one base station distributed unit (DU) (e.g.,gNB-DU 1430A, 1430B, 1430C, and/or 1430D), for example, if a functionalsplit is configured. Upper protocol layers of a base station may belocated in a base station CU, and lower layers of the base station maybe located in the base station DUs. An F1 interface (e.g., CU-DUinterface) connecting a base station CU and base station DUs may be anideal or non-ideal backhaul. F1-C may provide a control plane connectionover an F1 interface, and F1-U may provide a user plane connection overthe F1 interface. An Xn interface may be configured between base stationCUs.

A base station CU may comprise an RRC function, an SDAP layer, and/or aPDCP layer. Base station DUs may comprise an RLC layer, a MAC layer,and/or a PHY layer. Various functional split options between a basestation CU and base station DUs may be possible, for example, bylocating different combinations of upper protocol layers (e.g., RANfunctions) in a base station CU and different combinations of lowerprotocol layers (e.g., RAN functions) in base station DUs. A functionalsplit may support flexibility to move protocol layers between a basestation CU and base station DUs, for example, depending on servicerequirements and/or network environments.

Functional split options may be configured per base station, per basestation CU, per base station DU, per wireless device, per bearer, perslice, and/or with other granularities. In a per base station CU split,a base station CU may have a fixed split option, and base station DUsmay be configured to match a split option of a base station CU. In a perbase station DU split, a base station DU may be configured with adifferent split option, and a base station CU may provide differentsplit options for different base station DUs. In a per wireless devicesplit, a base station (e.g., a base station CU and at least one basestation DUs) may provide different split options for different wirelessdevices. In a per bearer split, different split options may be utilizedfor different bearers. In a per slice splice, different split optionsmay be used for different slices.

FIG. 15 shows example RRC state transitions of a wireless device. Awireless device may be in at least one RRC state among an RRC connectedstate (e.g., RRC Connected 1530, RRC_Connected, etc.), an RRC idle state(e.g., RRC Idle 1510, RRC_Idle, etc.), and/or an RRC inactive state(e.g., RRC Inactive 1520, RRC_Inactive, etc.). In an RRC connectedstate, a wireless device may have at least one RRC connection with atleast one base station (e.g., gNB and/or eNB), which may have a contextof the wireless device (e.g., UE context). A wireless device context(e.g., UE context) may comprise at least one of an access stratumcontext, one or more radio link configuration parameters, bearer (e.g.,data radio bearer (DRB), signaling radio bearer (SRB), logical channel,QoS flow, PDU session, and/or the like) configuration information,security information, PHY/MAC/RLC/PDCP/SDAP layer configurationinformation, and/or the like configuration information for a wirelessdevice. In an RRC idle state, a wireless device may not have an RRCconnection with a base station, and a context of the wireless device maynot be stored in a base station. In an RRC inactive state, a wirelessdevice may not have an RRC connection with a base station. A context ofa wireless device may be stored in a base station, which may comprise ananchor base station (e.g., a last serving base station).

A wireless device may transition an RRC state (e.g., UE RRC state)between an RRC idle state and an RRC connected state in both ways (e.g.,connection release 1540 or connection establishment 1550; and/orconnection reestablishment) and/or between an RRC inactive state and anRRC connected state in both ways (e.g., connection inactivation 1570 orconnection resume 1580). A wireless device may transition its RRC statefrom an RRC inactive state to an RRC idle state (e.g., connectionrelease 1560).

An anchor base station may be a base station that may keep a context ofa wireless device (e.g., UE context) at least at (e.g., during) a timeperiod that the wireless device stays in a RAN notification area (RNA)of an anchor base station, and/or at (e.g., during) a time period thatthe wireless device stays in an RRC inactive state. An anchor basestation may comprise a base station that a wireless device in an RRCinactive state was most recently connected to in a latest RRC connectedstate, and/or a base station in which a wireless device most recentlyperformed an RNA update procedure. An RNA may comprise one or more cellsoperated by one or more base stations. A base station may belong to oneor more RNAs. A cell may belong to one or more RNAs.

A wireless device may transition, in a base station, an RRC state (e.g.,UE RRC state) from an RRC connected state to an RRC inactive state. Thewireless device may receive RNA information from the base station. RNAinformation may comprise at least one of an RNA identifier, one or morecell identifiers of one or more cells of an RNA, a base stationidentifier, an IP address of the base station, an AS context identifierof the wireless device, a resume identifier, and/or the like.

An anchor base station may broadcast a message (e.g., RAN pagingmessage) to base stations of an RNA to reach to a wireless device in anRRC inactive state. The base stations receiving the message from theanchor base station may broadcast and/or multicast another message(e.g., paging message) to wireless devices in their coverage area, cellcoverage area, and/or beam coverage area associated with the RNA via anair interface.

A wireless device may perform an RNA update (RNAU) procedure, forexample, if the wireless device is in an RRC inactive state and movesinto a new RNA. The RNAU procedure may comprise a random accessprocedure by the wireless device and/or a context retrieve procedure(e.g., UE context retrieve). A context retrieve procedure may comprise:receiving, by a base station from a wireless device, a random accesspreamble; and requesting and/or receiving (e.g., fetching), by a basestation, a context of the wireless device (e.g., UE context) from an oldanchor base station. The requesting and/or receiving (e.g., fetching)may comprise: sending a retrieve context request message (e.g., UEcontext request message) comprising a resume identifier to the oldanchor base station and receiving a retrieve context response messagecomprising the context of the wireless device from the old anchor basestation.

A wireless device in an RRC inactive state may select a cell to camp onbased on at least a measurement result for one or more cells, a cell inwhich a wireless device may monitor an RNA paging message, and/or a corenetwork paging message from a base station. A wireless device in an RRCinactive state may select a cell to perform a random access procedure toresume an RRC connection and/or to send (e.g., transmit) one or morepackets to a base station (e.g., to a network). The wireless device mayinitiate a random access procedure to perform an RNA update procedure,for example, if a cell selected belongs to a different RNA from an RNAfor the wireless device in an RRC inactive state. The wireless devicemay initiate a random access procedure to send (e.g., transmit) one ormore packets to a base station of a cell that the wireless deviceselects, for example, if the wireless device is in an RRC inactive stateand has one or more packets (e.g., in a buffer) to send (e.g., transmit)to a network. A random access procedure may be performed with twomessages (e.g., 2-stage or 2-step random access) and/or four messages(e.g., 4-stage or 4-step random access) between the wireless device andthe base station.

A base station receiving one or more uplink packets from a wirelessdevice in an RRC inactive state may request and/or receive (e.g., fetch)a context of a wireless device (e.g., UE context), for example, bysending (e.g., transmitting) a retrieve context request message for thewireless device to an anchor base station of the wireless device basedon at least one of an AS context identifier, an RNA identifier, a basestation identifier, a resume identifier, and/or a cell identifierreceived from the wireless device. A base station may send (e.g.,transmit) a path switch request for a wireless device to a core networkentity (e.g., AMF, MME, and/or the like), for example, after or inresponse to requesting and/or receiving (e.g., fetching) a context. Acore network entity may update a downlink tunnel endpoint identifier forone or more bearers established for the wireless device between a userplane core network entity (e.g., UPF, S-GW, and/or the like) and a RANnode (e.g., the base station), such as by changing a downlink tunnelendpoint identifier from an address of the anchor base station to anaddress of the base station).

A base station may communicate with a wireless device via a wirelessnetwork using one or more technologies, such as new radio technologies(e.g., NR, 5G, etc.). The one or more radio technologies may comprise atleast one of: multiple technologies related to physical layer; multipletechnologies related to medium access control layer; and/or multipletechnologies related to radio resource control layer Enhancing the oneor more radio technologies may improve performance of a wirelessnetwork. System throughput, and/or data rate of transmission, may beincreased. Battery consumption of a wireless device may be reduced.Latency of data transmission between a base station and a wirelessdevice may be improved. Network coverage of a wireless network may beimproved. Transmission efficiency of a wireless network may be improved.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) DCI via a PDCCH for at leastone of: a scheduling assignment and/or grant; a slot formatnotification; a preemption indication; and/or a power-control command.The DCI may comprise at least one of: an identifier of a DCI format; adownlink scheduling assignment(s); an uplink scheduling grant(s); a slotformat indicator; a preemption indication; a power-control forPUCCH/PUSCH; and/or a power-control for SRS.

A downlink scheduling assignment DCI may comprise parameters indicatingat least one of: an identifier of a DCI format; a PDSCH resourceindication; a transport format; HARQ information; control informationrelated to multiple antenna schemes; and/or a command for power controlof the PUCCH. An uplink scheduling grant DCI may comprise parametersindicating at least one of: an identifier of a DCI format; a PUSCHresource indication; a transport format; HARQ related information;and/or a power control command of the PUSCH.

Different types of control information may correspond to different DCImessage sizes. Supporting multiple beams, spatial multiplexing in thespatial domain, and/or noncontiguous allocation of RBs in the frequencydomain, may require a larger scheduling message, in comparison with anuplink grant allowing for frequency-contiguous allocation. DCI may becategorized into different DCI formats. A DCI format may correspond to acertain message size and/or usage.

A wireless device may monitor (e.g., in common search space or wirelessdevice-specific search space) one or more PDCCH for detecting one ormore DCI with one or more DCI format. A wireless device may monitor aPDCCH with a limited set of DCI formats, for example, which may reducepower consumption. The more DCI formats that are to be detected, themore power may be consumed by the wireless device.

The information in the DCI formats for downlink scheduling may compriseat least one of: an identifier of a DCI format; a carrier indicator; anRB allocation; a time resource allocation; a bandwidth part indicator; aHARQ process number; one or more MCS; one or more NDI; one or more RV;MIMO related information; a downlink assignment index (DAI); a TPC forPUCCH; an SRS request; and/or padding (e.g., if necessary). The MIMOrelated information may comprise at least one of: a PMI; precodinginformation; a transport block swap flag; a power offset between PDSCHand a reference signal; a reference-signal scrambling sequence; a numberof layers; antenna ports for the transmission; and/or a transmissionconfiguration indication (TCI).

The information in the DCI formats used for uplink scheduling maycomprise at least one of: an identifier of a DCI format; a carrierindicator; a bandwidth part indication; a resource allocation type; anRB allocation; a time resource allocation; an MCS; an NDI; a phaserotation of the uplink DMRS; precoding information; a CSI request; anSRS request; an uplink index/DAI; a TPC for PUSCH; and/or padding (e.g.,if necessary).

A base station may perform CRC scrambling for DCI, for example, beforetransmitting the DCI via a PDCCH. The base station may perform CRCscrambling by binarily adding multiple bits of at least one wirelessdevice identifier (e.g., C-RNTI, CS-RNTI, TPC-CS-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI,TPC-PUSCH-RNTI, SP CSI C-RNTI, and/or TPC-SRS-RNTI) on the CRC bits ofthe DCI. The wireless device may check the CRC bits of the DCI, forexample, if detecting the DCI. The wireless device may receive the DCI,for example, if the CRC is scrambled by a sequence of bits that is thesame as the at least one wireless device identifier.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more PDCCH in differentCORESETs, for example, to support a wide bandwidth operation. A basestation may send (e.g., transmit) one or more RRC messages comprisingconfiguration parameters of one or more CORESETs. A CORESET may compriseat least one of: a first OFDM symbol; a number of consecutive OFDMsymbols; a set of resource blocks; and/or a CCE-to-REG mapping. A basestation may send (e.g., transmit) a PDCCH in a dedicated CORESET forparticular purpose, for example, for beam failure recovery confirmation.A wireless device may monitor a PDCCH for detecting DCI in one or moreconfigured CORESETs, for example, to reduce the power consumption.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more MAC PDUs to awireless device. A MAC PDU may comprise a bit string that may be bytealigned (e.g., multiple of eight bits) in length. Bit strings may berepresented by tables in which the most significant bit is the leftmostbit of the first line of the table, and the least significant bit is therightmost bit on the last line of the table. The bit string may be readfrom the left to right, and then, in the reading order of the lines. Thebit order of a parameter field within a MAC PDU may be represented withthe first and most significant bit in the leftmost bit, and/or with thelast and least significant bit in the rightmost bit.

A MAC SDU may comprise a bit string that may be byte aligned (e.g.,multiple of eight bits) in length. A MAC SDU may be included in a MACPDU, for example, from the first bit onward. A MAC CE may be a bitstring that may be byte aligned (e.g., multiple of eight bits) inlength. A MAC subheader may be a bit string that may be byte aligned(e.g., multiple of eight bits) in length. A MAC subheader may be placedimmediately in front of the corresponding MAC SDU, MAC CE, and/orpadding. A MAC entity may ignore a value of reserved bits in a DL MACPDU.

A MAC PDU may comprise one or more MAC subPDUs. A MAC subPDU of the oneor more MAC subPDUs may comprise at least one of: a MAC subheader only(e.g., including padding); a MAC subheader and a MAC SDU; a MACsubheader and a MAC CE; and/or a MAC subheader and padding. The MAC SDUmay be of variable size. A MAC subheader may correspond to a MAC SDU, aMAC CE, and/or padding.

A MAC subheader may comprise: an R field comprising one bit; an F fieldwith one bit in length; an LCID field with multiple bits in length; an Lfield with multiple bits in length, for example, if the MAC subheadercorresponds to a MAC SDU, a variable-sized MAC CE, and/or padding.

A MAC subheader may comprise, for example, an eight-bit L field. TheLCID field may have six bits in length. The L field may have eight bitsin length. A MAC subheader may comprise, for example, a sixteen-bit Lfield. The LCID field may have six bits in length. The L field may havesixteen bits in length. A MAC subheader may comprise: an R fieldcomprising two bits in length; and an LCID field comprising multiplebits in length (e.g., if the MAC subheader corresponds to a fixed sizedMAC CE), and/or padding. The LCID field may comprise six bits in length,and the R field may comprise two bits in length.

Multiple MAC CEs may be placed together, for example, in a DL MAC PDU. AMAC subPDU comprising a MAC CE may be, for example, prior to: a MACsubPDU comprising a MAC SDU, and/or a MAC subPDU comprising padding.Multiple MAC CEs may be included in an UL MAC PDU. A MAC subPDUcomprising a MAC CE may be, for example, after some or all MAC subPDUscomprising a MAC SDU. The MAC subPDU may be, for example, before a MACsubPDU comprising padding.

A MAC entity of a base station may send (e.g., transmit), to a MACentity of a wireless device, one or more MAC CEs. Multiple LCIDs may beassociated with the one or more MAC CEs. The one or more MAC CEs maycomprise at least one of: a SP ZP CSI-RS resource setactivation/deactivation MAC CE; a PUCCH spatial relationactivation/deactivation MAC CE; an SP SRS activation/deactivation MACCE; an SP CSI reporting on PUCCH activation/deactivation MAC CE; a TCIstate indication for wireless device-specific PDCCH MAC CE; a TCI stateindication for wireless device-specific PDSCH MAC CE; an aperiodic CSItrigger state subselection MAC CE; a SP CSI-RS/CSI-IM resource setactivation/deactivation MAC CE; a wireless device contention resolutionidentity MAC CE; a timing advance command MAC CE; a DRX command MAC CE;a long DRX command MAC CE; an SCell activation/deactivation MAC CE(e.g., 1 Octet); an SCell activation/deactivation MAC CE (e.g., 4Octet); and/or a duplication activation/deactivation MAC CE. A MAC CEmay comprise an LCID in the corresponding MAC subheader. Different MACCEs may have different LCIDs in the corresponding MAC subheader. An LCIDwith 111011 in a MAC subheader may indicate a MAC CE associated with theMAC subheader is a long DRX command MAC CE.

The MAC entity of the wireless device may send (e.g., transmit), to theMAC entity of the base station, one or more MAC CEs. The one or more MACCEs may comprise at least one of: a short buffer status report (BSR) MACCE; a long BSR MAC CE; a C-RNTI MAC CE; a configured grant confirmationMAC CE; a single entry PHR MAC CE; a multiple entry PHR MAC CE; a shorttruncated BSR; and/or a long truncated BSR. A MAC CE may comprise anLCID in the corresponding MAC subheader. Different MAC CEs may havedifferent LCIDs in the corresponding MAC subheader. An LCID with 111011in a MAC subheader may indicate a MAC CE associated with the MACsubheader is a short-truncated command MAC CE.

Two or more component carriers (CCs) may be aggregated, for example, ina carrier aggregation (CA). A wireless device may simultaneously receiveand/or transmit on one or more CCs, for example, depending oncapabilities of the wireless device. The CA may be supported forcontiguous CCs. The CA may be supported for non-contiguous CCs.

A wireless device may have at least one RRC connection with a network,for example, if configured with CA. At (e.g., during) an RRC connectionestablishment, re-establishment and/or handover, a cell providing a NASmobility information may be a serving cell. At (e.g., during) an RRCconnection re-establishment and/or handover procedure, a cell providinga security input may be a serving cell. The serving cell may be referredto as a primary cell (e.g., PCell). A base station may send (e.g.,transmit), to a wireless device, one or more messages comprisingconfiguration parameters of a plurality of one or more secondary cells(e.g., SCells), for example, depending on capabilities of the wirelessdevice.

A base station and/or a wireless device may use an activation and/ordeactivation mechanism of an SCell for an efficient battery consumption,for example, if the base station and/or the wireless device isconfigured with CA. A base station may activate or deactivate at leastone of the one or more SCells, for example, if the wireless device isconfigured with one or more SCells. The SCell may be deactivated, forexample, after or upon configuration of an SCell.

A wireless device may activate and/or deactivate an SCell, for example,after or in response to receiving an SCell activation and/ordeactivation MAC CE. A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to awireless device, one or more messages comprising ansCellDeactivationTimer timer. The wireless device may deactivate anSCell, for example, after or in response to an expiry of thesCellDeactivationTimer timer.

A wireless device may activate an SCell, for example, if the wirelessdevice receives an SCell activation/deactivation MAC CE activating anSCell. The wireless device may perform operations (e.g., after or inresponse to the activating the SCell) that may comprise: SRStransmissions on the SCell; CQI, PMI, RI, and/or CRI reporting for theSCell on a PCell; PDCCH monitoring on the SCell; PDCCH monitoring forthe SCell on the PCell; and/or PUCCH transmissions on the SCell.

The wireless device may start and/or restart a timer (e.g., ansCellDeactivationTimer timer) associated with the SCell, for example,after or in response to activating the SCell. The wireless device maystart the timer (e.g., sCellDeactivationTimer timer) in the slot, forexample, if the SCell activation/deactivation MAC CE has been received.The wireless device may initialize and/or re-initialize one or moresuspended configured uplink grants of a configured grant Type 1associated with the SCell according to a stored configuration, forexample, after or in response to activating the SCell. The wirelessdevice may trigger a PHR, for example, after or in response toactivating the SCell.

The wireless device may deactivate the activated SCell, for example, ifthe wireless device receives an SCell activation/deactivation MAC CEdeactivating an activated SCell. The wireless device may deactivate theactivated SCell, for example, if a timer (e.g., ansCellDeactivationTimer timer) associated with an activated SCellexpires. The wireless device may stop the timer (e.g.,sCellDeactivationTimer timer) associated with the activated SCell, forexample, after or in response to deactivating the activated SCell. Thewireless device may clear one or more configured downlink assignmentsand/or one or more configured uplink grant Type 2 associated with theactivated SCell, for example, after or in response to the deactivatingthe activated SCell. The wireless device may suspend one or moreconfigured uplink grant Type 1 associated with the activated SCell, forexample, after or in response to deactivating the activated SCell. Thewireless device may flush HARQ buffers associated with the activatedSCell.

A wireless device may not perform certain operations, for example, if anSCell is deactivated. The wireless device may not perform one or more ofthe following operations if an SCell is deactivated: transmitting SRS onthe SCell; reporting CQI, PMI, RI, and/or CRI for the SCell on a PCell;transmitting on UL-SCH on the SCell; transmitting on a RACH on theSCell; monitoring at least one first PDCCH on the SCell; monitoring atleast one second PDCCH for the SCell on the PCell; and/or transmitting aPUCCH on the SCell.

A wireless device may restart a timer (e.g., an sCellDeactivationTimertimer) associated with the activated SCell, for example, if at least onefirst PDCCH on an activated SCell indicates an uplink grant or adownlink assignment. A wireless device may restart a timer (e.g., ansCellDeactivationTimer timer) associated with the activated SCell, forexample, if at least one second PDCCH on a serving cell (e.g. a PCell oran SCell configured with PUCCH, such as a PUCCH SCell) scheduling theactivated SCell indicates an uplink grant and/or a downlink assignmentfor the activated SCell. A wireless device may abort the ongoing randomaccess procedure on the SCell, for example, if an SCell is deactivatedand/or if there is an ongoing random access procedure on the SCell.

An SCell activation/deactivation MAC CE may comprise, for example, oneoctet. A first MAC PDU subheader comprising a first LCID may identifythe SCell activation/deactivation MAC CE of one octet. An SCellactivation/deactivation MAC CE of one octet may have a fixed size. TheSCell activation/deactivation MAC CE of one octet may comprise a singleoctet. The single octet may comprise a first number of C-fields (e.g.,seven) and a second number of R-fields (e.g., one).

An SCell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE may comprise, for example, fouroctets. A second MAC PDU subheader with a second LCID may identify theSCell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE of four octets. An SCellactivation/deactivation MAC CE of four octets may have a fixed size. TheSCell activation/deactivation MAC CE of four octets may comprise fouroctets. The four octets may comprise a third number of C-fields (e.g.,31) and a fourth number of R-fields (e.g., 1). A C_(i) field mayindicate an activation/deactivation status of an SCell with an SCellindex i, for example, if an SCell with SCell index i is configured. AnSCell with an SCell index i may be activated, for example, if the C_(i)field is set to one. An SCell with an SCell index i may be deactivated,for example, In an example, if the C_(i) field is set to zero. Thewireless device may ignore the C_(i) field, for example, if there is noSCell configured with SCell index i. An R field may indicate a reservedbit. The R field may be set to zero.

A base station may configure a wireless device with uplink (UL)bandwidth parts (BWPs) and downlink (DL) BWPs, for example, to enablebandwidth adaptation (BA) for a PCell. The base station may configurethe wireless device with at least DL BWP(s) (e.g., an SCell may not haveUL BWPS) to enable BA for an SCell, for example, if CA is configured.For the PCell, a first initial BWP may be a first BWP used for initialaccess. For the SCell, a second initial BWP may be a second BWPconfigured for the wireless device to first operate on the SCell if theSCell is activated.

A first DL and a first UL may switch BWP independently, for example, inpaired spectrum (e.g., FDD). A second DL and a second UL may switch BWPsimultaneously, for example, in unpaired spectrum (e.g., TDD). Switchingbetween configured BWPs may be based on DCI and/or an inactivity timer.An expiry of the inactivity timer associated with a cell may switch anactive BWP to a default BWP, for example, if the inactivity timer isconfigured for a serving cell. The default BWP may be configured by thenetwork.

One UL BWP for each uplink carrier and one DL BWP may be active at atime in an active serving cell, for example, in FDD systems configuredwith BA. One DL/UL BWP pair may be active at a time in an active servingcell, for example, in TDD systems. Operating on the one UL BWP and theone DL BWP (and/or the one DL/UL pair) may enable a wireless device touse a reasonable amount of power (e.g., reasonable battery consumption).BWPs other than the one UL BWP and the one DL BWP that the wirelessdevice may be configured with may be deactivated. The wireless devicemay refrain from monitoring a PDCCH, and/or may refrain fromtransmitting via a PUCCH, PRACH and/or UL-SCH, for example, ondeactivated BWPs.

A serving cell may be configured with a first number (e.g., four) ofBWPs. A wireless device and/or a base station may have one active BWP atany point in time, for example, for an activated serving cell. A BWPswitching for a serving cell may be used to activate an inactive BWPand/or deactivate an active BWP. The BWP switching may be controlled bya PDCCH indicating a downlink assignment or an uplink grant. The BWPswitching may be controlled by an inactivity timer (e.g.,bandwidthpartInactivityTimer). The BWP switching may be controlled by aMAC entity, for example, based on initiating a random access procedure.A BWP may be initially active without receiving a PDCCH indicating adownlink assignment or an uplink grant, for example, based on anaddition of an SpCell or an activation of an SCell. The active BWP for aserving cell may be indicated by an RRC message and/or a PDCCH message(e.g., PDCCH order). A DL BWP may be paired with an UL BWP, and/or BWPswitching may be common for both UL and DL, for example, for unpairedspectrum.

A MAC entity may use operations on an active BWP for an activatedserving cell configured with a BWP, such as one or more of: transmittingvia an UL-SCH; transmitting via a RACH; monitoring a PDCCH; transmittingvia a PUCCH; receiving via a DL-SCH; initializing and/or reinitializingsuspended configured uplink grants of configured grant Type 1 accordingto a stored configuration, if any and/or to start in a symbol based on aprocedure. On an inactive BWP for each activated serving cell configuredwith a BWP, a MAC entity: may refrain from transmitting via an UL-SCH,may refrain from transmitting via a RACH, may refrain from monitoring aPDCCH, may refrain from transmitting via a PUCCH, may refrain fromtransmitting an SRS, may refrain from receiving via a DL-SCH, may clearany configured downlink assignment and configured uplink grant ofconfigured grant Type 2, and/or may suspend any configured uplink grantof configured Type 1.

A MAC entity may perform a random access procedure (e.g., based on aninitiation of the random access procedure) on an active DL BWP and theactive UL BWP, for example, if PRACH resources are configured for theactive UL BWP. A MAC entity may switch to an initial DL BWP and aninitial UL BWP, for example, if PRACH resources are not configured foran active UL BWP (e.g., based on initiation of a random accessprocedure). The MAC entity may perform the random access procedure onthe initial DL BWP and the initial UL BWP, for example, based on the BWPswitching.

A wireless device may perform BWP switching to a BWP indicated by aPDCCH, for example, if a MAC entity receives a PDCCH (e.g., a PDCCHorder) for a BWP switching of a serving cell, for example, if a randomaccess procedure associated with this serving cell is not ongoing. Awireless device may determine whether to switch a BWP or ignore thePDCCH for the BWP switching, for example, if a MAC entity received aPDCCH for a BWP switching while a random access procedure is ongoing inthe MAC entity. The MAC entity may stop the ongoing Random Accessprocedure and initiate a second Random Access procedure on a newactivated BWP, for example, if the MAC entity decides to perform the BWPswitching. The MAC entity may continue with the ongoing Random Accessprocedure on the active BWP, for example if the MAC decides to ignorethe PDCCH for the BWP switching. A wireless device may perform the BWPswitching to a BWP indicated by the PDCCH, for example, if a MAC entityreceives a PDCCH for a BWP switching addressed to a C-RNTI for asuccessful completion of a Random Access procedure.

The MAC entity may start or restart the BWP-InactivityTimer associatedwith the active DL BWP for a variety of reasons. The MAC entity maystart or restart the BWP-InactivityTimer associated with the active DLBWP, for example, if one or more of the following occur: aBWP-InactivityTimer is configured for an activated serving sell, if aDefault-DL-BWP is configured and an active DL BWP is not a BWP indicatedby the Default-DL-BWP, if the Default-DL-BWP is not configured and theactive DL BWP is not the initial BWP; and/or if one or more of thefollowing occur: if a PDCCH addressed to C-RNTI or CS-RNTI indicatingdownlink assignment or uplink grant is received on the active BWP,and/or if there is not an ongoing random access procedure associatedwith the activated serving cell.

The MAC entity may start or restart the BWP-InactivityTimer associatedwith the active DL BWP, for example, if one or more of the followingoccur: if a BWP-InactivityTimer is configured for an activated servingcell, if a Default-DL-BWP is configured and an active DL BWP is not aBWP indicated by the Default-DL-BWP, and/or if the Default-DL-BWP is notconfigured and the active DL BWP is not the initial BWP; and/or if oneor more of the following occur: if a MAC-PDU is transmitted in aconfigured uplink grant or received in a configured downlink assignment,and/or if there is not an ongoing random access procedure associatedwith the activated serving cell.

The MAC entity may start or restart the BWP-InactivityTimer associatedwith the active DL BWP, for example, if one or more of the followingoccur: if a BWP-InactivityTimer is configured for an activated servingcell, if a Default-DL-BWP is configured and an active DL BWP is not aBWP indicated by the Default-DL-BWP, and/or if the Default-DL-BWP is notconfigured and the active DL BWP is not the initial BWP; and/or if oneor more of the following occur: if a PDCCH addressed to C-RNTI orCS-RNTI indicating downlink assignment or uplink grant is received onthe active BWP, if a MAC-PDU is transmitted in a configured uplink grantor received in a configured downlink assignment, and/or if an ongoingrandom access procedure associated with the activated Serving Cell issuccessfully completed in response to receiving the PDCCH addressed to aC-RNTI.

The MAC entity may start or restart the BWP-InactivityTimer associatedwith the active DL BWP based on switching the active BWP. For example,the MAC entity may start or restart the BWP-InactivityTimer associatedwith the active DL BWP if a PDCCH for BWP switching is received and thewireless device switches an active DL BWP to the DL BWP, and/or if oneor more of the following occur: if a default downlink BWP is configuredand the DL BWP is not the default downlink BWP, and/or if a defaultdownlink BWP is not configured and the DL BWP is not the initialdownlink BWP.

The MAC entity may stop the BWP-InactivityTimer associated with anactive DL BWP of the activated serving cell, for example, if one or moreof the following occur: if BWP-InactivityTimer is configured for anactivated serving cell, if the Default-DL-BWP is configured and theactive DL BWP is not the BWP indicated by the Default-DL-BWP, and/or ifthe Default-DL-BWP is not configured and the active DL BWP is not theinitial BWP; and/or if a random access procedure is initiated. The MACentity may stop a second BWP-InactivityTimer associated with a secondactive DL BWP of an SpCell, for example, if the activated Serving Cellis an SCell (other than a PSCell).

The MAC entity may perform BWP switching to a BWP indicated by theDefault-DL-BWP, for example, if one or more of the following occur: if aBWP-InactivityTimer is configured for an activated serving cell, if theDefault-DL-BWP is configured and the active DL BWP is not the BWPindicated by the Default-DL-BWP, if the Default-DL-BWP is not configuredand the active DL BWP is not the initial BWP, if BWP-InactivityTimerassociated with the active DL BWP expires, and/or if the Default-DL-BWPis configured. The MAC entity may perform BWP switching to the initialDL BWP, for example, if the MAC entity may refrain from performing BWPswitching to a BWP indicated by the Default-DL-BWP.

A wireless device may be configured for operation in BWPs of a servingcell. The wireless device may be configured by higher layers for theserving cell for a set of (e.g., four) bandwidth parts (BWPs) forreceptions by the wireless device (e.g., DL BWP set) in a DL bandwidthby a parameter (e.g., DL-BWP). The wireless device may be configuredwith a set of (e.g., four) BWPs for transmissions by the wireless device(e.g., UL BWP set) in an UL bandwidth by a parameter (e.g., UL-BWP) forthe serving cell. An initial active DL BWP may be determined, forexample, by: a location and number of contiguous PRBs; a subcarrierspacing; and/or a cyclic prefix (e.g., for the control resource set fora Type0-PDCCH common search space). A wireless device may be provided(e.g., by a higher layer) a parameter (e.g., initial-UL-BWP) for aninitial active UL BWP for a random access procedure, for example, foroperation on a primary cell. The wireless device may be provided (e.g.,by a higher layer) a parameter (e.g., Active-BWP-DL-Pcell) for firstactive DL BWP for receptions, for example, if a wireless device has adedicated BWP configuration. The wireless device may be provided (e.g.,by a higher layer) a parameter (e.g., Active-BWP-UL-Pcell) for a firstactive UL BWP for transmissions on a primary cell, for example, if awireless device has a dedicated BWP configuration.

The wireless device may be configured with a variety of parameters for aDL BWP and/or for an UL BWP in a set of DL BWPs and/or UL BWPs,respectively, for a serving cell. The wireless device may be configuredwith one or more of: a subcarrier spacing (e.g., provided by higherlayer parameter DL-BWP-mu or UL-BWP-mu), a cyclic prefix (e.g., providedby higher layer parameter DL-BWP-CP or UL-BWP-CP), a PRB offset withrespect to the PRB (e.g., determined by higher layer parametersoffset-pointA-low-scs and ref-scs) and a number of contiguous PRBs(e.g., provided by higher layer parameter DL-BWP-BW or UL-BWP-BW), anindex in the set of DL BWPs or UL BWPs (e.g., by respective higher layerparameters DL-BWP-index or UL-BWP-index), a DCI format 1_0 or DCI format1_1 detection to a PDSCH reception timing values (e.g., provided byhigher layer parameter DL-data-time-domain), a PDSCH reception to aHARQ-ACK transmission timing values (e.g., provided by higher layerparameter DL-data-DL-acknowledgement), and/or a DCI 0_0 or DCI 0_1detection to a PUSCH transmission timing values (e.g., provided byhigher layer parameter UL-data-time-domain).

A DL BWP from a set of configured DL BWPs (e.g., with an index providedby higher layer parameter DL-BWP-index) may be paired with an UL BWPfrom a set of configured UL BWPs (e.g., with an index provided by higherlayer parameter UL-BWP-index). A DL BWP from a set of configured DL BWPsmay be paired with an UL BWP from a set of configured UL BWPs, forexample, if the DL BWP index and the UL BWP index are equal (e.g., forunpaired spectrum operation). A wireless device may not be expected toreceive a configuration where the center frequency for a DL BWP isdifferent from the center frequency for an UL BWP, for example, if theDL-BWP-index of the DL BWP is equal to the UL-BWP-index of the UL BWP(e.g., for unpaired spectrum operation).

A wireless device may be configured with control resource sets (e.g.,coresets) for every type of common search space and/or for wirelessdevice-specific search space, for example, for a DL BWP in a set of DLBWPs on a primary cell. The wireless device may not be expected to beconfigured without a common search space on the PCell, or on the PSCell,in the active DL BWP. The wireless device may be configured with controlresource sets for PUCCH transmissions, for example, for an UL BWP in aset of UL BWPs. A wireless device may receive a PDCCH message and/or aPDSCH message in a DL BWP, for example, according to a configuredsubcarrier spacing and/or a CP length for the DL BWP. A wireless devicemay transmit via a PUCCH and/or via a PUSCH in an UL BWP, for example,according to a configured subcarrier spacing and CP length for the ULBWP.

The BWP indicator field value may indicate an active DL BWP, from theconfigured DL BWP set, for DL receptions, for example, if a BWPindicator field is configured in DCI format 1_1. The BWP indicator fieldvalue may indicate the active UL BWP, from the configured UL BWP set,for UL transmissions. A wireless device may be provided (e.g., for theprimary cell) with a higher layer parameter (e.g., Default-DL-BWP, orany other a default DL BWP among the configured DL BWPs), for example,if a BWP indicator field is configured in DCI format 0_1. The defaultBWP may be the initial active DL BWP, for example, if a wireless deviceis not provided a default DL BWP by higher layer parameterDefault-DL-BWP. A wireless device may be expected to detect a DCI format0_1 indicating active UL BWP change, or a DCI format 1_1 indicatingactive DL BWP change, for example, if a corresponding PDCCH is receivedwithin first 3 symbols of a slot.

A wireless device may be provided (e.g., for a primary cell) with ahigher layer parameter (e.g., Default-DL-BWP, or any other a default DLBWP among the configured DL BWPs). The default DL BWP may be the initialactive DL BWP, for example, if a wireless device is not provided adefault DL BWP by the higher layer parameter Default-DL-BWP. A wirelessdevice may be provided with a higher layer parameter (e.g.,BWP-InactivityTimer) for a timer value for the primary cell. Thewireless device may increment the timer, if running, every interval of 1millisecond for frequency range 1, every 0.5 milliseconds for frequencyrange 2, or any other interval, for example, if the wireless device maynot detect a DCI format 1_1 for paired spectrum operation or, forexample, if the wireless device may not detect a DCI format 1_1 or DCIformat 0_1 for unpaired spectrum operation during the interval.

Wireless device procedures on the secondary cell may be same as on theprimary cell. Wireless device procedures may use the timer value for thesecondary cell and the default DL BWP for the secondary cell, forexample, if a wireless device is configured for a secondary cell with ahigher layer parameter (e.g., Default-DL-BWP) indicating a default DLBWP among the configured DL BWPs and the wireless device is configuredwith a higher layer parameter (e.g., BWP-InactivityTimer) indicating atimer value. The wireless device may use the indicated DL BWP and theindicated UL BWP on the secondary cell as the respective first active DLBWP and first active UL BWP on the secondary cell or carrier, forexample, if a wireless device is configured by a higher layer parameter(e.g., Active-BWP-DL-SCell) for a first active DL BWP and by a higherlayer parameter (e.g., Active-BWP-UL-SCell) for a first active UL BWP ona secondary cell or carrier.

FIG. 16 shows an example of BWP switching. The BWP switching may be on aPCell. A base station 1602 may send (e.g., transmit) one or moremessages (e.g., one or more RRC messages) 1612 for configuring multipleBWPs (e.g., multiple BWPs comprising a DL BWP 0, a DL BWP 1, a DL BWP 2,a DL BWP 3, an UL BWP 0, an UL BWP 1, an UL BWP 2, and an UL BWP 3 shownin a table 1608). The DL (and/or UL) BWP 0 may be a default BWP. The DL(and/or UL) BWP 1 may be an initial active BWP (e.g., an initial DL BWPor an initial UL BWP). A wireless device 1604 may determine the multipleBWPs configured for the wireless device 1604, for example, based on theone or more messages 1612. The base station 1602 may send DCI 1614 for aDL assignment (e.g., at a time n). The DCI 1614 may be sent via the DLBWP 1 (e.g., an initial DL BWP). The wireless device 1604 may receive apacket via the DL BWP 1 or via another active DL BWP (e.g., at a timen+k), for example, based on the DL assignment. The wireless device 1604may start a BWP inactivity timer (e.g., at the time n+k). The wirelessdevice 1604 may start the BWP inactivity timer, for example, afterreceiving scheduled downlink packets. The base station 1602 may send DCI1614 for an UL grant (e.g., at the time n). The DCI 1614 may be sent viathe DL BWP 1 (e.g., a first DL BWP or an initial DL BWP). The wirelessdevice 1604 may send a packet via an UL BWP 1 (e.g., via a first UL BWPor an initial UL BWP at a time n+k), for example, based on the UL grant.The wireless device 1604 may start a BWP inactivity timer (e.g., at thetime n+k). The wireless device 1604 may start the BWP inactivity timer,for example, after sending scheduled uplink packets.

The base station 1602 may send DCI 1616 for BWP switching (e.g., a BWPswitching from the DL BWP 1 to the DL BWP 2). The DCI 1616 may be sentvia the active DL BWP 1 (e.g., at a time m). The wireless device 1604may receive the DCI 1616, for example, by monitoring a PDCCH on theactive DL BWP 1. The wireless device 1604 may switch the DL BWP 1 to theDL BWP 2 (e.g., at a time m+l), for example, based on the DCI 1616.There may be a delay (e.g., a gap) between the wireless device 1604receiving the DCI 1616 and the wireless device 1604 switching to the DLBWP 2. The wireless device 1604 may start and/or re-start the BWPinactivity timer (e.g., at the time m+l), for example, after the BWPswitching. The BWP inactivity timer may expire (e.g., at a time o), forexample, if the wireless device 1604 does not perform reception ortransmission for a period of time (e.g., a period from the time m+l tothe time o). The wireless device 1604 may switch the DL BWP 2 to the DLBWP 0 (e.g., a default BWP). The fallback to the DL BWP 0 may occur(e.g., at a time o+q), for example, after the BWP inactivity timerexpires. There may be a delay (e.g., a gap) between the BWP inactivitytimer expiration (e.g., at a time o) and the wireless device 1604switching to the DL BWP 0 (e.g., at a time o+q). BWPs are described asexample resources, and any wireless resource may be applicable to one ormore procedures described herein.

FIG. 17 shows an example of BWP switching. The BWP switching may beperformed on an SCell. A base station 1702 may send (e.g., transmit) oneor more messages (e.g., one or more RRC messages) 1712 for configuringmultiple BWPs (e.g., multiple BWPs comprising a DL BWP 0, a DL BWP 1, aDL BWP 2, a DL BWP 3, an UL BWP 0, an UL BWP 1, an UL BWP 2, and an ULBWP 3 shown in tables 1706 and 1708, respectively). The multiple BWPsmay be BWPs of an SCell. The DL (and/or UL) BWP 0 may be a default BWP.The DL (and/or UL) BWP 1 may be a first (or initial) active BWP (e.g., afirst DL BWP or a first UL BWP). A wireless device 1704 may determinethe multiple BWPs configured for the wireless device 1704, for example,based on the one or more messages 1712. The base station 1702 may send,to the wireless device 1704, a MAC CE 1714 for activating the SCell(e.g., at a time n). The wireless device 1704 may activate the SCell(e.g., at a time n+k). The wireless device 1704 may start to monitor aPDCCH on (e.g., sent via) the DL BWP 1. The base station 1702 may sendDCI 1716 for a DL assignment (e.g., at a time m). The DCI 1716 may besent via the DL BWP 1 (e.g., a first DL BWP). The wireless device 1704may receive a packet via the DL BWP 1 or via another active DL BWP(e.g., at a time m+l), for example, based on the DL assignment. Thewireless device 1704 may start a BWP inactivity timer (e.g., at the timem+l). The wireless device 1704 may start the BWP inactivity timer, forexample, after receiving scheduled downlink packets. The base station1702 may send DCI 1716 for an UL grant (e.g., at the time m). The DCI1716 may be sent via the DL BWP 1 (e.g., a first DL BWP or an initial DLBWP). The wireless device 1704 may send a packet via an UL BWP 1 (e.g.,via a first UL BWP or an initial UL BWP at a time m+l), for example,based on the UL grant. The wireless device 1704 may start a BWPinactivity timer (e.g., at the time m+l). The wireless device 1704 maystart the BWP inactivity timer, for example, after sending scheduleduplink packets.

The BWP inactivity timer may expire (e.g., at a time s). The BWPinactivity may expire, for example, if the wireless device 1704 does notperform reception or transmission for a period of time (e.g., a periodfrom the time m+l to the time s). The wireless device 1704 may switchthe DL BWP 1 to the DL BWP 0 (e.g., a default BWP). The fallback to theDL BWP 0 may occur (e.g., at a time s+t), for example, after the BWPinactivity timer expires. The base station 1702 may send, to thewireless device 1704, a MAC CE 1718 for deactivating the SCell (e.g., ata time o). The wireless device 1704 may deactivate the SCell and/or stopthe BWP inactivity timer (e.g., at a time o+p). The wireless device 1704may deactivate the SCell and/or stop the BWP inactivity timer, forexample, after receiving and/or checking an indication of the MAC CE1718.

A MAC entity may use operations on an active BWP for an activatedserving cell configured with a BWP, such as one or more of: transmittingvia an UL-SCH; transmitting via a RACH; monitoring a PDCCH; transmittingvia a PUCCH; receiving via a DL-SCH; initializing and/or reinitializingsuspended configured uplink grants of configured grant Type 1 accordingto a stored configuration, if any and/or to start in a symbol based on aprocedure. On an inactive BWP for each activated serving cell configuredwith a BWP, a MAC entity: may refrain from transmitting via an UL-SCH,may refrain from transmitting via a RACH, may refrain from monitoring aPDCCH, may refrain from transmitting via a PUCCH, may refrain fromtransmitting an SRS, may refrain from receiving via a DL-SCH, may clearany configured downlink assignment and configured uplink grant ofconfigured grant Type 2, and/or may suspend any configured uplink grantof configured Type 1.

A random access procedure (e.g., based on an initiation of the randomaccess procedure) on an active DL BWP and the active UL BWP may beperformed, for example, if PRACH resources are configured for the activeUL BWP. The random access procedure may be performed, for example, by aMAC entity. A MAC entity may switch to an initial DL BWP and an initialUL BWP, for example, if PRACH resources are not configured for an activeUL BWP (e.g., based on initiation of a random access procedure). The MACentity may perform the random access procedure on the initial DL BWP andthe initial UL BWP, for example, based on the BWP switching.

A wireless device may perform BWP switching to a BWP indicated by aPDCCH, for example, if a MAC entity receives a PDCCH (e.g., a PDCCHorder) for a BWP switching of a serving cell, for example, if a randomaccess procedure associated with this serving cell is not ongoing.

A wireless device may determine whether to switch a BWP or ignore thePDCCH for the BWP switching, for example, if a MAC entity received aPDCCH for a BWP switching while a random access procedure is ongoing inthe MAC entity. The MAC entity may stop the ongoing Random Accessprocedure and initiate a second Random Access procedure on a newactivated BWP, for example, if the MAC entity decides to perform the BWPswitching. The MAC entity may continue with the ongoing Random Accessprocedure on the active BWP, for example if the MAC decides to ignorethe PDCCH for the BWP switching. A wireless device may perform the BWPswitching to a BWP indicated by the PDCCH, for example, if a MAC entityreceives a PDCCH for a BWP switching addressed to a C-RNTI for asuccessful completion of a Random Access procedure.

The MAC entity may start or restart the BWP-InactivityTimer associatedwith the active DL BWP for a variety of reasons. The MAC entity maystart or restart the BWP-InactivityTimer associated with the active DLBWP, for example, if one or more of the following occur: aBWP-InactivityTimer is configured for an activated serving sell, if aDefault-DL-BWP is configured and an active DL BWP is not a BWP indicatedby the Default-DL-BWP, if the Default-DL-BWP is not configured and theactive DL BWP is not the initial BWP; and/or if one or more of thefollowing occur: if a PDCCH addressed to C-RNTI or CS-RNTI indicatingdownlink assignment or uplink grant is received on the active BWP,and/or if there is not an ongoing random access procedure associatedwith the activated serving cell.

The MAC entity may start or restart the BWP-InactivityTimer associatedwith the active DL BWP, for example, if one or more of the followingoccur: if a BWP-InactivityTimer is configured for an activated servingcell, if a Default-DL-BWP is configured and an active DL BWP is not aBWP indicated by the Default-DL-BWP, and/or if the Default-DL-BWP is notconfigured and the active DL BWP is not the initial BWP; and/or if oneor more of the following occur: if a MAC-PDU is transmitted in aconfigured uplink grant or received in a configured downlink assignment,and/or if there is not an ongoing random access procedure associatedwith the activated serving cell.

The MAC entity may start or restart the BWP-InactivityTimer associatedwith the active DL BWP, for example, if one or more of the followingoccur: if a BWP-InactivityTimer is configured for an activated servingcell, if a Default-DL-BWP is configured and an active DL BWP is not aBWP indicated by the Default-DL-BWP, and/or if the Default-DL-BWP is notconfigured and the active DL BWP is not the initial BWP; and/or if oneor more of the following occur: if a PDCCH addressed to C-RNTI orCS-RNTI indicating downlink assignment or uplink grant is received onthe active BWP, if a MAC-PDU is transmitted in a configured uplink grantor received in a configured downlink assignment, and/or if an ongoingrandom access procedure associated with the activated Serving Cell issuccessfully completed in response to receiving the PDCCH addressed to aC-RNTI.

The MAC entity may start or restart the BWP-InactivityTimer associatedwith the active DL BWP based on switching the active BWP. For example,the MAC entity may start or restart the BWP-InactivityTimer associatedwith the active DL BWP if a PDCCH for BWP switching is received and thewireless device switches an active DL BWP to the DL BWP, and/or if oneor more of the following occur: if a default downlink BWP is configuredand the DL BWP is not the default downlink BWP, and/or if a defaultdownlink BWP is not configured and the DL BWP is not the initialdownlink BWP.

The MAC entity may stop the BWP-InactivityTimer associated with anactive DL BWP of the activated serving cell, for example, if one or moreof the following occur: if BWP-InactivityTimer is configured for anactivated serving cell, if the Default-DL-BWP is configured and theactive DL BWP is not the BWP indicated by the Default-DL-BWP, and/or ifthe Default-DL-BWP is not configured and the active DL BWP is not theinitial BWP; and/or if a random access procedure is initiated. The MACentity may stop a second BWP-InactivityTimer associated with a secondactive DL BWP of an SpCell, for example, if the activated Serving Cellis an SCell (other than a PSCell).

The MAC entity may perform BWP switching to a BWP indicated by theDefault-DL-BWP, for example, if one or more of the following occur: if aBWP-InactivityTimer is configured for an activated serving cell, if theDefault-DL-BWP is configured and the active DL BWP is not the BWPindicated by the Default-DL-BWP, if the Default-DL-BWP is not configuredand the active DL BWP is not the initial BWP, if BWP-InactivityTimerassociated with the active DL BWP expires, and/or if the Default-DL-BWPis configured. The MAC entity may perform BWP switching to the initialDL BWP, for example, if the MAC entity may refrain from performing BWPswitching to a BWP indicated by the Default-DL-BWP.

A wireless device may be configured for operation in BWPs of a servingcell. The wireless device may be configured by higher layers for theserving cell for a set of (e.g., four) bandwidth parts (BWPs) forreceptions by the wireless device (e.g., DL BWP set) in a DL bandwidthby a parameter (e.g., DL-BWP). The wireless device may be configuredwith a set of (e.g., four) BWPs for transmissions by the wireless device(e.g., UL BWP set) in an UL bandwidth by a parameter (e.g., UL-BWP) forthe serving cell. An initial active DL BWP may be determined, forexample, by: a location and number of contiguous PRBs; a subcarrierspacing; and/or a cyclic prefix (e.g., for the control resource set fora Type0-PDCCH common search space). A wireless device may be provided(e.g., by a higher layer) a parameter (e.g., initial-UL-BWP) for aninitial active UL BWP for a random access procedure, for example, foroperation on a primary cell. The wireless device may be provided (e.g.,by a higher layer) a parameter (e.g., Active-BWP-DL-Pcell) for firstactive DL BWP for receptions, for example, if a wireless device has adedicated BWP configuration. The wireless device may be provided (e.g.,by a higher layer) a parameter (e.g., Active-BWP-UL-Pcell) for a firstactive UL BWP for transmissions on a primary cell, for example, if awireless device has a dedicated BWP configuration.

The wireless device may be configured with a variety of parameters for aDL BWP and/or for an UL BWP in a set of DL BWPs and/or UL BWPs,respectively, for a serving cell. The wireless device may be configuredwith one or more of: a subcarrier spacing (e.g., provided by higherlayer parameter DL-BWP-mu or UL-BWP-mu), a cyclic prefix (e.g., providedby higher layer parameter DL-BWP-CP or UL-BWP-CP), a PRB offset withrespect to the PRB (e.g., determined by higher layer parametersoffset-pointA-low-scs and ref-scs) and a number of contiguous PRBs(e.g., provided by higher layer parameter DL-BWP-BW or UL-BWP-BW), anindex in the set of DL BWPs or UL BWPs (e.g., by respective higher layerparameters DL-BWP-index or UL-BWP-index), a DCI format 1_0 or DCI format1_1 detection to a PDSCH reception timing values (e.g., provided byhigher layer parameter DL-data-time-domain), a PDSCH reception to aHARQ-ACK transmission timing values (e.g., provided by higher layerparameter DL-data-DL-acknowledgement), and/or a DCI 0_0 or DCI 0_1detection to a PUSCH transmission timing values (e.g., provided byhigher layer parameter UL-data-time-domain).

A DL BWP from a set of configured DL BWPs (e.g., with an index providedby higher layer parameter DL-BWP-index) may be paired with an UL BWPfrom a set of configured UL BWPs (e.g., with an index provided by higherlayer parameter UL-BWP-index). A DL BWP from a set of configured DL BWPsmay be paired with an UL BWP from a set of configured UL BWPs, forexample, if the DL BWP index and the UL BWP index are equal (e.g., forunpaired spectrum operation). A wireless device may not be expected toreceive a configuration where the center frequency for a DL BWP isdifferent from the center frequency for an UL BWP, for example, if theDL-BWP-index of the DL BWP is equal to the UL-BWP-index of the UL BWP(e.g., for unpaired spectrum operation).

A wireless device may be configured with control resource sets (e.g.,coresets) for every type of common search space and/or for wirelessdevice-specific search space, for example, for a DL BWP in a set of DLBWPs on a primary cell. The wireless device may not be expected to beconfigured without a common search space on the PCell, or on the PSCell,in the active DL BWP. The wireless device may be configured with controlresource sets for PUCCH transmissions, for example, for an UL BWP in aset of UL BWPs. A wireless device may receive a PDCCH message and/or aPDSCH message in a DL BWP, for example, according to a configuredsubcarrier spacing and/or a CP length for the DL BWP. A wireless devicemay transmit via a PUCCH and/or via a PUSCH in an UL BWP, for example,according to a configured subcarrier spacing and CP length for the ULBWP.

The BWP indicator field value may indicate an active DL BWP, from theconfigured DL BWP set, for DL receptions, for example, if a BWPindicator field is configured in DCI format 1_1. The BWP indicator fieldvalue may indicate the active UL BWP, from the configured UL BWP set,for UL transmissions. A wireless device may be provided (e.g., for theprimary cell) with a higher layer parameter (e.g., Default-DL-BWP, orany other a default DL BWP among the configured DL BWPs), for example,if a BWP indicator field is configured in DCI format 0_1. The defaultBWP may be the initial active DL BWP, for example, if a wireless deviceis not provided a default DL BWP by higher layer parameterDefault-DL-BWP. A wireless device may be expected to detect a DCI format0_1 indicating active UL BWP change, or a DCI format 1_1 indicatingactive DL BWP change, for example, if a corresponding PDCCH is receivedwithin first 3 symbols of a slot.

A wireless device may be provided (e.g., for a primary cell) with ahigher layer parameter (e.g., Default-DL-BWP, or any other a default DLBWP among the configured DL BWPs). The default DL BWP may be the initialactive DL BWP, for example, if a wireless device is not provided adefault DL BWP by the higher layer parameter Default-DL-BWP. A wirelessdevice may be provided with a higher layer parameter (e.g.,BWP-InactivityTimer) for a timer value for the primary cell. Thewireless device may increment the timer, if running, every interval of 1millisecond for frequency range 1, every 0.5 milliseconds for frequencyrange 2, or any other interval, for example, if the wireless device maynot detect a DCI format 1_1 for paired spectrum operation or, forexample, if the wireless device may not detect a DCI format 1_1 or DCIformat 0_1 for unpaired spectrum operation during the interval.

Wireless device procedures on the secondary cell may be same as on theprimary cell. Wireless device procedures may use the timer value for thesecondary cell and the default DL BWP for the secondary cell, forexample, if a wireless device is configured for a secondary cell with ahigher layer parameter (e.g., Default-DL-BWP) indicating a default DLBWP among the configured DL BWPs and the wireless device is configuredwith a higher layer parameter (e.g., BWP-InactivityTimer) indicating atimer value. The wireless device may use the indicated DL BWP and theindicated UL BWP on the secondary cell as the respective first active DLBWP and first active UL BWP on the secondary cell or carrier, forexample, if a wireless device is configured by a higher layer parameter(e.g., Active-BWP-DL-SCell) for a first active DL BWP and by a higherlayer parameter (e.g., Active-BWP-UL-SCell) for a first active UL BWP ona secondary cell or carrier.

A wireless device may have difficulty in determining whether DCI isindicating a BWP switching, a BWP activation, or a BWP deactivation, forexample, if multiple active BWPs in a cell (e.g., PCell or SCell) aresupported. A DCI format may be used (e.g., any legacy DCI format, a DCIformat of NR Release 15, or any other DCI format). The DCI format maycomprise a BWP index indicating a new BWP. Misalignment between a basestation and the wireless device may occur regarding a state of a BWP. Abase station may send (e.g., transmit) DCI comprising: a first fieldindicating a BWP, and/or a second field indicating a BWP action. The BWPaction may comprise one or more of: switching to the BWP, activating theBWP, and/or deactivating the BWP. A base station may send (e.g.,transmit) a MAC CE comprising an n-bit bitmap (e.g., an 8-bit bitmapassociated with 4 bits for DL BWPs and/or 4 bits for UL BWPs, or anyother quantity of bits) indicating that one or more BWPs may beactivated/deactivated (e.g., activated or deactivated). A base stationmay designate a first BWP of a cell as a primary active BWP. The basestation may send (e.g., transmit), via the primary active BWP, DCIactivating/deactivating (e.g., activating or deactivating) a secondaryBWP of the cell.

Multiple active BWPs may increase spectral efficiency, communicationspeed, interference mitigation, provide service-friendly BWP management,and/or other performance measures, for example, relative to aconfiguration supporting a single active BWP at a time (e.g., a singleDL BWP and a single UL BWP at a time). Multiple active BWPs may supporta plurality of active DL BWPs and/or a plurality of active UL BWPs.Configuring multiple active BWPS may require more complex BWP controlprotocols and technical designs, for example, relative to a singleactive BWP configuration. Some RRC signaling and/or DCI formats (e.g.,legacy signaling and/or format, and/or other signaling and/or formats)may cause one or more problems, such as the misalignment between a basestation and a wireless device regarding states of multiple BWPs.

One or more RRC signaling messages and/or one or more DCI formats may beenhanced. An RRC message may configure multiple active BWPs. An RRCmessage may configure one or more primary BWPs and one or more secondaryBWPs. An RRC message may configure whether the one or more primary BWPsare switchable by DCI and/or a MAC CE. An RRC message may configuredifferent BWPs for sending DCI for indicating a BWP change, for example,based on whether the one or more primary BWPs are switchable by DCIand/or a MAC CE. DCI may have a plurality of fields associated with aBWP control. A first field of DCI may indicate a BWP ID. A second fieldof the DCI may indicate an action associated with a BWP indicated by theBWP ID. The second field may have different sizes, for example,depending on different configurations and/or requirements. The size ofthe second field may be (e.g., semi-statically) changed (e.g., based onone or more RRC messages). The size of the second field may bedetermined, for example, based on whether a designated BWP is indicatedas a primary active BWP and/or whether the designated BWP is allowed tobe switched dynamically.

One or more MAC CEs may be configured for a plurality of BWP control,for example, if multiple active BWPs are supported. A MAC CE maycomprise a bitmap associated with a plurality of DL BWPs and/or aplurality of UL BWPs. The MAC CE may indicate activation/deactivation ofeach of multiple BWPs.

Some communications (e.g., communications based on one or more DCIs) mayenable dynamic BWP state changes without (or with reduced) processingdelays and may avoid or reduce misalignments between a base station anda wireless device. These communications may be applicable, for example,if services, channel quality, and/or traffic loading on BWPs changefrequently. Some other communications (e.g., communications based on oneor more MAC CEs) may provide more robust BWP state controls and/or mayreduce blind decoding complexity and/or power consumption of wirelessdevices. The latter communications may change states of a plurality ofBWPs at the same time and may reduce signaling overhead. The lattercommunications may be applicable, for example, if services, channelquality, and/or traffic loading on BWPs change infrequently. Differentcommunications may be used together or may be separately configuredbetween a base station and a wireless device, for example, depending onvarying requirements and signaling environments.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) to, or receive from, a wirelessdevice one or more data packets. The one or more data packets may besent, or received, via one or more radio resources. The one or more datepackets may be one or more URLLC (Ultra-Reliable Low LatencyCommunication) data packets with a small packet size (e.g., <100 bytes),which may require ultra-reliable (e.g., BLER less than10^({circumflex over ( )}(−5))) and low latency delivery (e.g., lessthan 1 millisecond) between the base station and the wireless device.The one or more data packets may be one or more eMBB (enhanced MobileBroadband) data packets with a large packet size (e.g., >1000 bytes),which may require a large bandwidth (e.g., 400 MHz˜1 GHz) and/or a largeamount of radio resources for transmission. The one or more date packetsmay be one or more machine-type communication (e.g., MTC) data packetswith a small packet size, which require a wide communication coverage(e.g., 10KM˜100KM) or a transmission to a wireless device located in abasement. Other types of the one or more data packets may comprisevehicle to everything (V2X) packet(s) which may be transmitted betweenvehicles, or between vehicle and pedestrian, or between vehicle androadside node, packet of industrial internet of things (IIOT), and thelike. It may be beneficial to transmit a first type of service (eMBB,URLLC, MTC, V2X and/or IIOT) on a first active BWP of a cell andtransmit a second type of service (eMBB, URLLC, V2X and/or IIOT) on asecond active BWP of the cell, for example, if multiple services arelaunched in a cell. BWP and/or CA operation configurations may supportat most one active BWP in a cell. The BWP and/or CA operationconfigurations may be less efficient and/or result in significanttransmission latency, for example, if a base station attempts to send(e.g., transmit), to a wireless device, data packets for multipleservices on multiple active BWPs. Activation/deactivation of an SCellbased on a MAC CE (e.g., for adding an additional active BWP) may take along time (e.g., several tens of milliseconds) and a significant delaymay occur, for example, if the base station attempts to send the datapackets by frequently activating and/or deactivating the multiple BWPs.Data transmission associated with some types of service on an additionalactive BWP of the SCell may not be tolerant of a delay caused by theactivation/deactivation. The transmission latency may be improved, forexample, by supporting multiple active BWPs in a cell.

A base station and/or a wireless device may be configured with multipleBWPs for a cell. A base station and a wireless device may communicatewith each other via multiple active BWPs of the multiple BWPs inparallel (e.g., simultaneously or overlapped in time) to accommodatemultiple services (e.g., eMBB, URLLC, VTX, IIOT, and/or MTC). A basestation may send (e.g., transmit), via a first active BWP, an eMBB datapacket to a wireless device. The base station may send (e.g., transmit),via a second active BWP, a URLLC data packet to the wireless device. Thebase station may send (e.g., transmit), via a third active BWP, an MTCdata packet to the wireless device. Transmitting multiple data packetsfor different services via different active BWPs in parallel (e.g.,simultaneously or overlapped in time) may reduce latency. Transmittingfirst data (e.g., eMBB data) and second data (e.g., URLLC data) via asingle active BWP may cause interruption of one transmission (e.g., theeMBB data transmission) by another transmission (e.g., the URLLC datatransmission). Transmitting multiple data packets for different servicesvia different active BWPs in parallel (e.g., simultaneously oroverlapped in time) may avoid the interruption. Physical and MAC layerprocedures configured for the BWP operation configuration that does notsupport multiple active BWPs in a cell may not be suitable for the BWPoperation configuration that supports multiple active BWPs in a cell(e.g., such an implementation may result in an inefficient BWPmanagement process). Multiple active BWPs may not be efficientlysupported in some systems (e.g., legacy systems and/or NR physical layerand MAC layer operation procedures). Physical layer and MAC layerprocedures may be enhanced, and evolved signaling for an efficient BWPoperation procedure may be configured to support multiple active BWPsoperation in a cell.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device, one ormore messages comprising configuration parameters of a cell. The one ormore messages may comprise one or more RRC messages (e.g., an RRCconnection reconfiguration message, an RRC connection reestablishmentmessage, and/or an RRC connection setup message). The cell may be aPCell (or a PSCell) or an SCell, for example, if a carrier aggregationor dual connectivity is configured. The cell may comprise a plurality ofdownlink BWPs. Each of the plurality of downlink BWPs may be associatedwith a BWP ID (e.g., a BWP-specific ID) and/or one or more parameters.The cell may comprise a plurality of uplink BWPs. Each of the pluralityof uplink BWPs may be associated with a BWP ID (e.g., a BWP-specific ID)and/or one or more second parameters.

Each of the plurality of the downlink BWPs may be in one of an activestate and an inactive state. A wireless device may perform operationsvia an active BWP (e.g., a DL BWP or an UL BWP). The operations maycomprise transmitting an UL-SCH, transmitting a RACH, monitoring aPDCCH, transmitting a PUCCH, receiving a DL-SCH, and/or initializing (orreinitializing) any suspended configured uplink grants of configuredgrant Type 1 according to a stored configuration. For an inactive BWP(e.g., a DL BWP or an UL BWP), the wireless device may not transmit anUL-SCH, may not transmit a RACH, may not monitor a PDCCH, may nottransmit a PUCCH, may not transmit an SRS, may not receive a DL-SCH, mayclear any configured downlink assignment and configured uplink grant ofconfigured grant Type 2, and/or may suspend any configured uplink grantof configured Type 1.

The one or more parameters (and/or the one or more second parameters)may comprise at least one of: a control resource set identified by acontrol resource set index; a subcarrier spacing; a cyclic prefix; aDM-RS scrambling sequence initialization value; a number of consecutivesymbols; a set of resource blocks in frequency domain; a CCE-to-REGmapping; an REG bundle size; a cyclic shift for the REG bundle; anantenna port quasi-co-location; and/or an indication for a presence orabsence of a TCI field for DCI format 1_0 or 1_1 transmitted on thecontrol resource set. The one or more parameters may comprisecell-specific parameters. The one or more second parameters may compriseBWP-specific parameters. The configuration parameters may furtherindicate at least one of: an initial active DL BWP, of the plurality ofDL BWPs, identified by a first BWP ID and/or a default DL BWP, of theplurality of DL BWPs, identified by a second BWP ID. The second BWP IDmay be same as, or different from, the first BWP ID. The default DL BWPmay be in inactive state, for example, if the second BWP ID is differentfrom the first BWP ID of the initial active DL BWP.

The initial active DL BWP may be associated with one or more controlresource set for one or more common search space (e.g., type0-PDCCHcommon search space). A wireless device may monitor a first PDCCH sentvia the initial active DL BWP of a PCell (or a PSCell) to detect DCI inthe first PDCCH, for example, if the wireless device switches from RRCidle state to RRC connected state.

A base station may activate an additional BWP dynamically (e.g., viaDCI, a MAC CE, etc.), for example, if at least one of multiple types ofservices are triggered for transmission via the additional BWP. The basestation may send (e.g., transmit) a first command to the wireless deviceto activate a second DL BWP, of the plurality of DL BWPs, indicated(e.g., identified) by a third BWP ID. The first command may be a MAC CEor DCI. The third BWP ID may be different from the first BWP ID and/ordifferent from the second BWP ID. The wireless device may transition(e.g., switch) the second DL BWP from inactive state to active stateand/or may maintain the initial active BWP in active state, for example,after or in response to the activating. The wireless device may monitora first PDCCH sent via the initial active DL BWP. The wireless devicemay monitor a second PDCCH sent via the second DL BWP in parallel (e.g.,simultaneously or overlapped in time), for example, after or in responseto the activating. Activating the second DL BWP may not change the stateof the initial active DL BWP.

FIG. 18A shows an example of configuring multiple active BWPs. The basestation may send (e.g., transmit) the first command (e.g., at a time T1)to the wireless device to activate another BWP (e.g., an A-BWP2), forexample, if there is at least one active DL BWP (e.g., an A-BWP1) of aplurality of active BWPs in a cell. The A-BWP2 may be different from theA-BWP1. The wireless device may transition (e.g., switch) the A-BWP2from inactive state to active state and/or maintain the A-BWP1 in activestate (e.g., at a time T2 after the time T1). Activating the A-BWP2 maynot change the state of the A-BWP1.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device, one ormore RRC messages comprising configuration parameters indicating a firstactive DL BWP and at least one second active DL BWP of a PCell (or aPSCell), for example, if multiple active BWPs are supported by thewireless device. The wireless device may monitor a first PDCCH sent viathe first active DL BWP of a PCell (or a PSCell) and monitor at leastone second PDCCH sent via the at least one second active DL BWP of thePCell (or the PSCell). The wireless device may monitor the first PDCCHand the at least one second PDCCH to detect one or more DCIs (e.g., whenthe wireless device is in RRC connected mode or the wireless devicesswitches from RRC idle state to RRC connected state). Configuringmultiple active BWPs by the one or more RRC messages may reducesignaling overhead for BWP activation.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device, one ormore RRC messages comprising configuration parameters indicating a firstactive DL BWP of an SCell and at least one second active DL BWP of theSCell, for example, if multiple active BWPs are supported by thewireless device. The wireless device may monitor a first PDCCH sent viathe first active DL BWP and at least one second PDCCH sent via the atleast one second active DL BWP of the SCell. The wireless device maymonitor the first PDCCH and the at least one second PDCCH to detect oneor more DCIs (e.g., after or in response to the SCell being activated bya MAC CE or DCI). Configuring multiple active BWPs by the one or moreRRC messages may reduce signaling overhead for BWP activation.

FIG. 18B shows an example of a BWP switching if multiple active BWPs aresupported. A base station may send (e.g., transmit) a second command toa wireless device to switch from an A-BWP1 to an A-BWP3 (at a time T2),for example, if there are at least two active DL BWPs (e.g., the A-BWP1and an A-BWP2) of a plurality of active BWPs in a cell (at a time T1before the time T2). The A-BWP1 may be the initial active DL BWPconfigured by the one or more messages. The A-BWP2 may be a DL BWPactivated by the first command. The second command may be a MAC CE orDCI. The A-BWP3 may be different from the A-BWP1 and from the A-BWP2.The wireless device may transition (e.g., switch) the A-BWP1 from activestate to inactive state, transition (e.g., switch) the A-BWP3 frominactive state to active state, and/or maintain the A-BWP2 in activestate, for example, after or in response to the switching. The wirelessdevice may monitor a first PDCCH sent via the A-BWP3 and/or monitor asecond PDCCH sent via the A-BWP2 in parallel (e.g., simultaneously oroverlapped in time), for example, after or in response to the switching.Switching to the A-BWP3 from A-BWP1 may comprise deactivating the A-BWP1and activating the A-BWP3.

FIG. 18C shows an example of BWP deactivation if multiple active BWPsare supported. A base station may send (e.g., transmit) a third commandto a wireless device to deactivate an A-BWP2, for example, if there areat least two active DL BWPs (e.g., an A-BWP1 and the A-BWP2) of aplurality of active BWPs in a cell. The third command may be a MAC CE orDCI. The base station and/or the wireless device may deactivate theA-BWP2, for example, after or in response to an expiration of a BWPinactivity timer (e.g., associated with the A-BWP2 or associated withthe cell). The deactivating may comprise transiting (e.g., switching)the A-BWP2 from active state to inactive state and/or maintaining theA-BWP1 in active state (e.g., at a time T2). The wireless device maymonitor a first PDCCH sent via the A-BWP1 and/or stop monitoring asecond PDCCH associated with the A-BWP2, for example, after or inresponse to the deactivating. The deactivating the A-BWP2 may not changethe state of the A-BWP1 (e.g., the active state of the A-BWP1).

A base station and/or a wireless device may communicate via more thantwo active DL BWPs in a cell. The base station and/or the wirelessdevice may perform BWP activation, BWP deactivation, and BWP switching,for example, to flexibly provide different services. A base stationand/or a wireless device may maintain a first active DL BWP for a firsttransmission of a first service. The base station may activate a secondDL BWP to be a second active DL BWP, for example, if a second service istriggered. The wireless device may monitor one or more PDCCHs and/orreceive data packets on both the first active DL BWP and the secondactive DL BWP, for example, after or in response to the activating. Thebase station and/or the wireless device may activate a third DL BWP tobe a third active DL BWP, for example, if a third service is triggered.The wireless device may monitor one or more PDCCHs and/or receive datapackets on the first active DL BWP, the second active DL BWP, and thethird active DL BWP, for example, after or in response to theactivating.

A base station may cross-BWP schedule a second active DL BWP based on afirst active DL BWP, for example, which may reduce blind decodingcomplexity. Cross-BWP scheduling may comprise scheduling, by a basestation, a transmission (e.g., downlink or uplink transmissions) on ashared channel (e.g., downlink or uplink shared channels) of a secondBWP via control channels of a first BWP. The first active DL BWP may beconfigured with a first number of control resource sets and/or a secondnumber of search spaces. The second active DL BWP may be configured witha third number of control resource sets, and/or a fourth number ofsearch spaces. The first number may be greater than the third number.The second number may be greater than the fourth number. The secondactive DL BWP may be configured with no PDCCH resource.

FIG. 19A shows an example of a cross-BWP scheduling. A base station maysend (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device, a first PDCCH 1901A via afirst active DL BWP (e.g., a BWP 1) to schedule a first PDSCH 1911A ofthe BWP 1. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) a second PDCCH1902A via the BWP 1 to schedule a second PDSCH 1912A of a second activeBWP (e.g., a BWP 2), for example, if the BWP 2 is configured to becross-BWP scheduled by the BWP 1. The base station may send (e.g.,transmit) a third PDCCH 1903A via the BWP 1 to schedule a third PDSCH1913A of a third active BWP (e.g., a BWP 3), for example, if the BWP 3is configured to be cross-BWP scheduled by the BWP 1. The base stationmay send (e.g., transmit) a fourth PDCCH 1904A via the BWP 3 to schedulea fourth PDSCH 1914A of the BWP 3, for example, if BWP 3 is configuredto be self-scheduled. A wireless device may monitor one or more PDCCHssent via the BWP 1 for at least one second BWP, for example, if thecross-BWP scheduling is supported and the at least one second BWP isconfigured to be cross-BWP scheduled by the BWP 1. The first PDCCH1901A, the second PDCCH 1902A, and the third PDCCH 1903A may be threedistinct PDCCHs on a same search space. Each of the three distinctPDCCHs may be sent via different locations in the same search space.

FIG. 19B shows an example of a self-BWP scheduling. A PDSCH of an activeBWP may be self-scheduled by a PDCCH of the active BWP. A base stationmay schedule a first PDSCH resource 1911B on a first active BWP (e.g., aBWP 1) by a first PDCCH 1901B on the first active BWP. The base stationmay schedule a second PDSCH resource 1912B on a second active BWP (e.g.,a BWP 2) by a second PDCCH 1902B on the second active BWP. The basestation may schedule a third PDSCH resource 1913B on a third active BWP(e.g., a BWP 3) by a third PDCCH 1903B on the third active BWP.

A wireless device may monitor one or more PDCCHs in one or more commonsearch spaces on the multiple active DL BWPs, for example, with multipleactive DL BWPs in a cell (e.g., as shown in FIG. 18A, FIG. 18B and FIG.18C). Each of the multiple active DL BWPs may be associated with one ofthe one or more common search spaces. Configuring a common search spacefor each of multiple active DL BWPs may not be efficient for a PDCCHresource utilization in the cell. Configuring a common search space foreach of the multiple active DL BWPs may require a wireless device tomonitor multiple common search spaces for the multiple active DL BWPs,which may consume battery power in an inefficient manner PDCCH resourceutilization efficiency and battery power efficiency may be improved byone or more configurations described herein. The one or moreconfigurations may comprise designating a first active DL BWP, ofmultiple active DL BWPs, as a primary active DL BWP (PBWP). The primaryactive DL BWP may be the initial active DL BWP configured in the one ormore messages. The primary active DL BWP may be associated with one ormore common search spaces, and/or one or more wireless device-specificsearch spaces (e.g., UE-specific search spaces). The primary active BWPmay be a BWP via which the wireless device may perform an initialconnection establishment procedure or may initiate a connectionre-establishment procedure. The primary active DL BWP may be associatedwith one or more common search spaces for one or more DCI formats withCRC scrambled by one of SI-RNTI, RA-RNTI, TC-RNTI, P-RNTI, INT-RNTI,SFI-RNTI, TPC-PUSCH-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, TPC-SRS-RNTI, CS-RNTI,SP-CSI-RNTI, and/or C-RNTI. The one or more common search spaces maycomprise at least one of: a type0-PDCCH common search space; atype0A-PDCCH common search space; a type1-PDCCH common search space; atype2-PDCCH common search space; and/or a type3-PDCCH common searchspace. The one or more DCI formats may comprise at least one of: a DCIformat 0_0; a DCI format 0_1; a DCI format 1_0; a DCI format 1_1; a DCIformat 2_0; a DCI format 2_1; a DCI format 2_2; and/or a DCI format 2_3.

The determination of the PBWP may be indicated by an RRC message, afirst MAC CE, and/or first DCI. At least one second active DL BWP of themultiple active DL BWPs may be designated as at least one secondaryactive DL BWP (SBWP). The determination of the at least one SBWP may beindicated by a second MAC CE and/or second DCI. A secondary active DLBWP may be associated with one or more wireless device-specific searchspaces. A wireless device may monitor one or more common search spacesand one or more first wireless device-specific search spaces on a PBWPof the cell and/or one or more second wireless device-specific searchspaces on an SBWP of the cell, for example, if the PBWP and the SBWP aredesignated in the cell.

FIG. 20A shows an example of a PBWP switching. A base station maydesignate, from the multiple active DL BWPs, a first active DL BWP as aPBWP (e.g., a PBWP1), and a second active DL BWP as an SBWP (e.g., anSBWP1), for example, if multiple DL BWPs are in active states in a cell.A wireless device may monitor a first PDCCH on the PBWP1 and a secondPDCCH on the SBWP1 (e.g., at a time T1). A base station may send (e.g.,transmit), to a wireless device, a first command to instruct a switchfrom the PBWP1 to a third BWP as a new primary BWP (e.g., a PBWP2). Thewireless device may transition (e.g., switch) the PBWP1 from activestate to inactive state and transition (e.g., switch) the third BWP(e.g., the PBWP2) from inactive state to active state, for example,after or in response to switching from the PBWP1 to the PBWP2. Theactivated third BWP may be a primary active BWP, for example, after orin response to the switching. The wireless device may monitor a firstPDCCH on common search spaces and first wireless device-specific searchspaces on the PBWP2 and/or may monitor a second PDCCH on second wirelessdevice-specific search spaces on the SBWP1, for example, after or inresponse to the switching from the PBWP1 to the PBWP2.

FIG. 20B shows an example of SBWP activation. A base station may send(e.g., transmit) a second command to a wireless device to activate asecond DL BWP (e.g., an SBWP1) as a secondary BWP, for example, if aprimary active BWP (e.g., a PBWP1) of a plurality of active BWPs aredesignated in a cell. The second DL BWP may be different from the PBWP1and/or the plurality of active BWPs. The wireless device may transition(e.g., switch) the second DL BWP from inactive state to active state andmaintain the PBWP1 in active state, for example, after or in response tothe activating. The second DL BWP may be designated as an SBWP (e.g., anSBWP1), for example, after or in response to the activation. Thewireless device may monitor a first PDCCH on common search spaces andfirst wireless device-specific search spaces on the PBWP1 and maymonitor a second PDCCH on second wireless device-specific search spaceson the SBWP1, for example, after or in response to the activation.

FIG. 20C shows an example of SBWP switching. A base station may assign,to a wireless device and/or from the multiple active DL BWPs, a firstactive DL BWP as a PBWP (e.g., a PBWP1) and a second active DL BWP as anSBWP (e.g., an SBWP1), for example, if a primary active BWP (e.g., thePBWP1) of a plurality of active BWPs is designated in a cell. Thewireless device may monitor a first PDCCH on a PBWP1 and/or a secondPDCCH on an SBWP1. The base station may send (e.g., transmit), to thewireless device, a third command to switch from the SBWP1 to a third BWP(e.g., an SBWP2) as a new secondary BWP. The wireless device maytransition (e.g., switch) the SBWP1 from active state to inactive stateand/or transition (e.g., switch) the third BWP from inactive state toactive state, for example, after or in response to switching from theSBWP1 to the SBWP2. The activated third BWP may be a secondary activeBWP, for example, after or in response to the switching. The wirelessdevice may monitor the first PDCCH on common search spaces and/or firstwireless device-specific search spaces on the PBWP1 and/or a third PDCCHon second wireless device-specific search spaces on the SBWP2, forexample, after or in response to the switching from the SBWP1 to theSBWP2.

FIG. 20D shows an example of SBWP deactivation from a configuration inwhich multiple active DL BWPs are supported. A base station may send(e.g., transmit) a fourth command to a wireless device to deactivate anSBWP1, for example, if a primary active BWP (e.g., a PBWP1) and asecondary active BWP (e.g., the SBWP1) of a plurality of active DL BWPsare designated in a cell. The fourth command may be a MAC CE or DCI. Thebase station and/or the wireless device may deactivate the SBWP1, forexample, after or in response to an expiration of a BWP inactivitytimer. The BWP inactivity timer may be associated with the SBWP1. Thewireless device may transition (e.g., switch) the SBWP1 from activestate to inactive state and/or maintain the PBWP1 in active state, forexample, after or in response to the deactivating. The wireless devicemay monitor a first PDCCH on (e.g., sent via) the PBWP1 and/or stopmonitoring a second PDCCH on (e.g., associated with) the SBWP1, forexample, after or in response to the deactivating. Deactivating theSBWP1 may not change the state of the PBWP1.

A base station and/or a wireless device may not allow a PBWP switchingto a second active BWP by a MAC CE or by DCI, for example, in aconfiguration in which multiple active DL BWPs comprise a PBWP and atleast one SBWP in a cell. The base station and/or the wireless devicemay trigger an SBWP deactivation, an SBWP activation, and/or an SBWPswitching. Configuring the PBWP to be unswitchable may simplifysignaling designs and/or reduce implementation complexity of thewireless device. The PBWP may be switched to the second PBWP, forexample, only by an RRC message but not by a MAC CE or DCI. The RRCmessage triggering a PBWP switching may enable a base station tostatically (or semi-statically) switch the PBWP. FIG. 21A, FIG. 21B andFIG. 21C show examples of configurations in which a PBWP is configuredto be unswitchable (e.g., always active), such as by DCI. Configuring aPBWP to be unswitchable (e.g., at least by DCI) may simplifyimplementation of procedures for a base station and a wireless device,reduce signaling overhead, and/or reduce battery consumption of thewireless device. A wireless device may switch the PBWP to a new PBWP,for example, after or in response to receiving an RRC message indicatingPBWP switching.

FIG. 21A shows an example of SBWP activation. A base station may send(e.g., transmit) a first command to a wireless device to activate asecond DL BWP as a secondary BWP (e.g., an SBWP1), for example, if aprimary active BWP (e.g., a PBWP1) of a plurality of active DL BWPs isdesignated in a cell. The second DL BWP may be different from the PBWP1and/or the plurality of active BWPs. The wireless device may transition(e.g., switch) the second DL BWP from inactive state to active state andmay maintain the PBWP1 in active state, for example, after or inresponse to the activating. The second DL BWP may be designated as anSBWP (e.g., an SBWP1), for example, after or in response to theactivation. The wireless device may monitor a first PDCCH on commonsearch spaces and/or first wireless device-specific search spaces onPBWP1 and/or a second PDCCH on second wireless device-specific searchspaces on the SBWP1, for example, after or in response to theactivation.

FIG. 21B shows an example of SBWP deactivation. A base station may send(e.g., transmit) a second command to a wireless device to deactivate theSBWP1, for example, if a primary active BWP (e.g., a PBWP1) and asecondary active BWP (e.g., the SBWP1) of a plurality of active DL BWPsare designated in a cell. The second command may be a MAC CE or DCI. Thebase station and/or the wireless device may deactivate the SBWP1, forexample, after or in response to an expiration of a BWP inactivitytimer. The BWP inactivity timer may be associated with the SBWP1. Thewireless device may transition (e.g., switch) the SBWP1 from activestate to inactive state and/or may maintain the PBWP1 in active state,for example, after or in response to the deactivating. The wirelessdevice may monitor a first PDCCH on (e.g., sent via) the PBWP1 and/ormay stop monitoring a second PDCCH on (e.g., associated with) the SBWP1,for example, after or in response to the deactivating.

FIG. 21C shows an example of SBWP switching. A base station may assign,to a wireless device and/or from multiple DL active BWPs, a first activeDL BWP as a PBWP (e.g., a PBWP1) and a second active DL BWP as an SBWP(e.g., an SBWP1), for example, if the multiple DL active BWPs areconfigured in a cell. The wireless device may monitor a first PDCCH on(e.g., sent via) the PBWP1 and a second PDCCH on (e.g., sent via) theSBWP1. A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to the wireless device,a third command to switch from the SBWP1 to a third BWP as a secondaryBWP (e.g., the SBWP2). The wireless device may transition (e.g., switch)the SBWP1 from active state to inactive state and/or transition (e.g.,switch) the third BWP from inactive state to active state, for example,after or in response to switching from the SBWP1 to the SBWP2. Theactivated third BWP may be the secondary active BWP (e.g., the SBWP2).The wireless device may monitor the first PDCCH on common search spacesand/or first wireless device-specific search spaces on the PBWP1 and/ora third PDCCH on second wireless device-specific search spaces on theSBWP2, for example, after or in response to the switching from the SBWP1to the SBWP2.

In an A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device,one or more messages comprising configuration parameters of a pluralityof DL BWPs in a cell. Multiple DL BWPs of a plurality of DL BWPs may beactivated as active DL BWPs. A wireless device and/or a base station maycommunicate via the active DL BWPs comprising a PBWP and an SBWP. ThePBWP may switch to a first DL BWP as a new PBWP. The SBWP may switch toa second DL BWP as a new SBWP. The SBWP may be deactivated. A third BWPmay be activated as a second SBWP. A base station may send (e.g.,transmit) one or more DCIs indicating a PBWP switching, an SBWPactivation, an SBWP deactivation, an SBWP switching, and/or a PDSCHscheduling on a PBWP or on an SBWP. The indication by the one or moreDCIs may be, for example, based on at least one of: one or more valuesof one or more fields of the one or more DCI; and/or whether the one ormore DCI is transmitted via a PBWP or an SBWP. The one or more DCIs maybe sent (e.g., transmitted) with DCI format 1_0 or 1_1 indicating aPDSCH scheduling. The one or more fields may comprise at least one of: acarrier indicator; an identifier for a DCI format; a BWP indicator; afirst field indicating a frequency domain resource assignment; a secondfield indicating a time domain resource assignment; a PUCCH resourceindicator; a TPC command for a scheduled PUCCH; and/or aPDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator. Reusing an existing DCI format(e.g., DCI format 1_0 or 1_1) for a BWP operation supporting multipleactive BWPs may reduce blind decoding complexity at a wireless device.

A wireless device may switch the PBWP to a first BWP as a new PBWPindicated (e.g., identified) by the BWP indicator, for example, based onat least one of: the one or more DCI being transmitted via the PBWP; theBWP indicator indicating the first BWP different from the PBWP and theSBWP (e.g., if configured); and/or a value of the first field and/or thesecond field being different from a first value (e.g., all zeros) and/ora second value (e.g., all ones). The first value and/or the second valuemay be predefined (e.g., fixed). The wireless device may switch the SBWPto a second BWP as a new SBWP indicated (e.g., identified) by the BWPindicator, for example, based on at least one of: the one or more DCIsbeing transmitted via the SBWP; the BWP indicator indicating the secondBWP different from the PBWP and from the SBWP; and/or a value of thefirst field and/or the second field being different from the first value(e.g., all zeros) and/or the second value (e.g., all ones).

The wireless device may activate a third BWP as a new SBWP indicated(e.g., identified) by the BWP indicator, for example, based on at leastone of: the BWP indicator indicating the third BWP different from thePBWP and from the SBWP; and/or the value of the first field and/or thesecond field being the first value (e.g., all zeros). The wirelessdevice may deactivate the SBWP, for example, based on at least one of:the one or more DCIs being transmitted via the PBWP; the BWP indicatorindicating the SBWP; and/or the value of the first field or the secondfield being the second value (e.g., all ones).

The wireless device may receive a DL assignment via a PBWP (e.g.,without a PBWP switching), for example, based on at least one of: theBWP indicator indicating the PBWP; and/or the value of the first fieldor the second field being different from the first value (e.g., allzeros) and/or the second value (e.g., all ones). The wireless device mayreceive a DL assignment via an SBWP (e.g., without an SBWPswitching/activation/deactivation), for example, based on at least oneof: the BWP indicator indicating the SBWP; and/or the value of the firstfield or the second field being different from the first value (e.g.,all zeros) and/or the second value (e.g., all ones). The wireless devicemay receive one or more DL data packets from a first PDSCH on (e.g.,sent via) the PBWP, for example, after or in response to receiving theDL assignment on the PBWP. The wireless device may receive one or moreDL data packets from a second PDSCH on (e.g., sent via) the SBWP, forexample, after or in response to receiving the DL assignment via theSBWP.

A base station and/or a wireless device may support, for example, a PBWPand at most one SBWP of a plurality of BWPs. Supporting the PBWP and theat most one SBWP, compared with one single active BWP in a cell, mayimprove spectrum efficiency and maintain an acceptable level ofimplementation complexity of the base station and/or the wirelessdevice.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more DCIs indicating aPBWP switching, an SBWP activation, and/or a PDSCH scheduling on a PBWPor on an SBWP, for example, based on at least one of: one or more valuesof one or more fields of the one or more DCIs; and/or whether the one ormore DCIs are transmitted via a PBWP or an SBWP. The one or more DCIsmay be sent, for example, if a PBWP and at most one SBWP of a pluralityof DL BWPs are supported. Activation of an SBWP may comprisedeactivating a first SBWP and activating a first inactive BWP as an SBWP(e.g., at a time). Activation of an SBWP may comprise activating a firstinactive BWP as an SBWP (e.g., if there is no SBWP before theactivating).

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more DCIs indicating aPBWP switching, for example, if a PBWP and at most one SBWP of aplurality of BWPs are supported. The base station may send the one ormore DCIs indicating the PBWP switching based on at least one of: theBWP indicator indicating a first BWP different from the PBWP and fromthe SBWP; the one or more DCIs being transmitted via the PBWP; and/orone or more value of the first field and/or the second field beingdifferent from a first value (e.g., all zeros) and/or a second value(e.g., all ones). The first value and/or the second value may bepredefined (e.g., fixed).

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more DCIs indicating anSBWP activation, for example, if a PBWP and at most one SBWP of aplurality of BWPs are supported. The base station may send the one ormore DCIs indicating the SBWP activation based on at least one of: theBWP indicator indicating a BWP different from the PBWP (e.g., if thereis no SBWP in the cell); the BWP indicator indicating the BWP differentfrom the SBWP; the one or more DCIs being transmitted via the PBWP; theone or more DCIs being transmitted via the SBWP; one or more value ofthe first field and/or the second field being the first value (e.g., allzeros); and/or the value of the first field or the second field beingthe second value (e.g., all ones).

A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device, a MAC CEto activate or deactivate an SBWP, for example, if an SBWP activation ordeactivation is not urgent (e.g., not time sensitive). The base stationmay send (e.g., transmit) DCI to switch from a first PBWP to a secondBWP as a second PBWP and/or to switch from a first SBWP to a third BWPas a second SBWP. The base station may send the DCI to switch a BWP, forexample, if BWP switching is urgent (e.g., time sensitive, such as forURLLC).

A MAC CE may comprise at least one of: one or more first fieldsindicating activation or deactivation of one or more DL BWPs; and/or oneor more second fields indicating activation or deactivation of one ormore UL BWPs. The one or more first fields may comprise a quantity ofbits (e.g., D4, D3, D2, and D1 for four bits associated with four DLBWPs, respectively). Di may indicate activation/deactivation (e.g.,activation or deactivation) of the DL BWP associated with DL BWP ID=i(e.g., i=1, 2, 3, and 4). Di (i=1, 2, 3, and 4) may correspond to fourmost significant bits of an octet 2 (Oct 2). The Oct 2 may comprise 8bits and each of the 8 bits may be associated with an index (e.g., indexk=0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7). k may be i+3, for example, if Di (i=1, 2,3, and 4) corresponds to four most significant bits of the Oct 2identified by the indexes (k=4, 5, 6, and 7). Each of the number of bitsmay indicate activation of a corresponding DL BWP, for example, based onthe bit being set to a first value (e.g., 1). Each of the number of bitsmay indicate deactivation of a corresponding DL BWP, for example, basedon the bit being set to a second value (e.g., 0). D4 being set to thefirst value may indicate a DL BWP associated with a BWP ID 4 isactivated if the DL BWP is configured. D4 being set to the second valuemay indicate the DL BWP associated with the BWP ID 4 is deactivated ifthe DL BWP is configured. The wireless device may ignore the value ofD4, for example, if the DL BWP associated with the BWP ID 4 is notconfigured. The wireless device may activate/deactivate a DL BWPassociated with a BWP ID 3 based on a value of D3, for example, if theDL BWP associated with the BWP ID 3 is configured. The wireless devicemay activate/deactivate a DL BWP associated with a BWP ID 2 based on avalue of D2, for example, if the DL BWP associated with the BWP ID 2 isconfigured. The wireless device may activate/deactivate a DL BWPassociated with a BWP ID 1 based on a value of D1, for example, if theDL BWP associated with the BWP ID 1 is configured. An RRC message mayindicate an association between a DL BWP and a BWP ID (e.g., the mappingrelationships between the BWP ID 1 and a first DL BWP, between the BWPID 2 and a second DL BWP, between the BWP ID 3 and a third DL BWP,and/or between the BWP ID 4 and a fourth DL BWP). An RRC message may notuse the indexes i, j and/or k. The RRC message may indicate that thefour DL BWPs and/or the four UL BWPs are associated with one of theeight indexes (e.g., the index k).

The one or more second fields may comprise a quantity of bits (e.g., U4,U3, U2, and U1 for 4 bits associated with four UL BWPs, respectively).Uj may indicate activation/deactivation (e.g., activation ordeactivation) of the UL BWP associated with UL BWP ID=j (e.g., j=1, 2,3, and 4). Uj (j=1, 2, 3, and 4) may correspond to four leastsignificant bits of the Oct 2. k may be j−1, for example, if Uj (j=1, 2,3, and 4) corresponds to four least significant bits of the Oct 2identified by the indexes (k=0, 1, 2, and 3). Each of the number of bitsmay indicate activation of a corresponding UL BWP, for example, based onthe bit being set to a first value (e.g., 1), if the UL BWP isconfigured. Each of the number of bits may indicate deactivation of acorresponding UL BWP, for example, based on the bit being set to asecond value (e.g., 0), if the UL BWP is configured. The wireless devicemay ignore the value of Uj, for example, if the UL BWP associated withthe UL BWP ID j is not configured.

A MAC CE may comprise at least one of: one or more first fieldsindicating activation or deactivation of one or more DL BWPs; and/or oneor more second fields indicating activation or deactivation of one ormore UL BWPs. Uj (j=1, 2, 3, and 4) may correspond to four mostsignificant bits of the Oct 2 identified by the indexes (k=4, 5, 6, and7). Di (i=1, 2, 3, and 4) may correspond to four least significant bitsof the Oct 2 identified by the indexes (k=0, 1, 2, and 3). k may be j+3,and k may be i−1.

A MAC CE may comprise at least one of: one or more first fieldsindicating activation or deactivation of one or more DL BWPs; and/or oneor more second fields indicating activation or deactivation of one ormore UL BWPs. Uj (j=1, 2, 3, and 4) may correspond to four odd-numberedbits of the Oct 2 identified by the indexes (k=1, 3, 5, and 7). Di (i=1,2, 3, and 4) may correspond to four even-numbered bits of the Oct 2identified by the indexes (k=0, 2, 4, and 6). k may be 2j−1, and/or kmay be 2i−2. Also or alternatively, Uj (j=1, 2, 3, and 4) may correspondto four even-numbered bits of the Oct 2 identified by the indexes (k=0,2, 4, and 6) and Di (i=1, 2, 3, and 4) may correspond to fourodd-numbered bits of the Oct 2 identified by the indexes (k=1, 3, 5, and7). k may be 2j−2, and/or k may be 2i−1. A base station and/or awireless device may dynamically use the eight bits of the Oct 2. Thefour most significant bits may be used for other purposes or may bereserved, for example, if the wireless device is configured with two DLBWPs (e.g., DL BWPs associated with D1 and D2) and with two UL BWPs(e.g., UL BWPs associated with U1 and U2). Two least significant bits(e.g., associated with D1 and U1) may always have the first value (e.g.,1), for example, a primary DL BWP and a primary UL BWP are designated(e.g., semi-statically). The two least significant bits may always havethe first value (e.g., 1), for example, for the configurations of FIGS.21A, 21B, and 21C (e.g., the primary DL BWP and the primary UL BWP areunswitchable).

A MAC subheader may be used for BWP activation/deactivation. The MACsubheader may comprise at least one of: a reserved field; a flag field;an LCID field with a first value indicating the MAC CE for BWPactivation/deactivation; and/or a length field. The LCID field mayindicate the first value different from other LCID values. The MACsubheader may not comprise the length field, for example, based on theMAC CE for SBWP activation/deactivation having a fixed bit length.

The base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more DCIs to switchfrom a first PBWP to a second BWP as a second PBWP or switch from afirst SBWP to a third BWP as a second SBWP, for example, if one or moreMAC CEs are used for activating/deactivating one or more SBWPs. The basestation may send the one or more DCIs to switch from the first PBWP tothe second BWP or switch from the first SBWP to the third BWP, forexample, based on at least one of: one or more values of one or morefields of the one or more DCIs; and/or whether the one or more DCIs aretransmitted on a PBWP or an SBWP.

The wireless device may switch the PBWP to a first BWP as a new PBWPindicated (e.g., identified) by the BWP indicator, for example, based onat least one of: the one or more DCIs being transmitted on the PBWP;and/or the BWP indicator indicating the first BWP different from thePBWP and from the SBWP (e.g., if configured). The wireless device mayswitch the SBWP to a second BWP as a new SBWP indicated (e.g.,identified) by the BWP indicator, for example, based on at least one of:the one or more DCIs being transmitted on the SBWP; and/or the BWPindicator indicating the second BWP different from the PBWP and from theSBWP.

The wireless device may receive a DL assignment on (e.g., sent via) aPBWP (e.g., without PBWP switching), for example, after or in responseto the BWP indicator indicating the PBWP. The wireless device mayreceive a DL assignment on (e.g., sent via) an SBWP (e.g., without SBWPswitching/activation), for example, after or in response to the BWPindicator indicating the SBWP. The wireless device may receive one ormore DL data packets from a first PDSCH mapped on the PBWP, for example,after or in response to receiving the DL assignment via the PBWP. Thewireless device may receive one or more DL data packets from a secondPDSCH mapped on the SBWP, for example, after or in response to receivingthe DL assignment via the SBWP.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more DCIs indicating aPBWP switching or a PDSCH scheduling on a PBWP or on an SBWP, forexample, if the PBWP and at most one SBWP of a plurality of BWPs aresupported and/or one or more MAC CEs are used foractivating/deactivating an SBWP. The base station may send the one ormore DCIs indicating the PBWP switching or the PDSCH scheduling on thePBWP or on the SBWP, for example, based on a BWP indicator. The wirelessdevice may switch the PBWP to a first BWP as a new PBWP indicated (e.g.,identified) by the BWP indicator, for example, based on the BWPindicator indicating the first BWP different from the PBWP and from theSBWP (e.g., if configured). The wireless device may receive a DLassignment on (e.g., sent via) a PBWP (e.g., without PBWP switching),for example, after or in response to the BWP indicator indicating thePBWP. The wireless device may receive a DL assignment on (e.g., sentvia) an SBWP (e.g., without SBWP switching/activation), for example,after or in response to the BWP indicator indicating the SBWP. Thewireless device may receive one or more DL data packets from a firstPDSCH mapped on the PBWP, after or in response to receiving the DLassignment via the PBWP. The wireless device may receive one or more DLdata packets from a second PDSCH mapped on the SBWP, for example, afteror in response to receiving the DL assignment via the SBWP. CombiningMAC CE for SBWP activation/deactivation and DCI for PBWP/SBWP switchingmay reduce blind decoding complexity and dynamical signaling overhead(e.g., DCI for SBWP activation/deactivation) to support multiple activeBWPs in a cell.

One or more MAC CEs for SBWP activation/deactivation may introduceintolerant transition latency (e.g., scheduling the MAC CE in PDSCHresources and sending one or more HARQ feedback for the MAC CE inPUCCH/PUSCH resources) for some services (e.g., URLLC services). Awireless device may receive multiple types of services, at least some ofwhich may require a quick SBWP activation/deactivation. The transitionlatency may be reduced and/or avoided by introducing a first DCI format,different from one or more other (e.g., existing) DCI formats (e.g., DCIformat 1_0/1_1). The first DCI format may comprise one or more fieldsindicating a PBWP switching, an SBWP activation, an SBWP deactivation,and/or an SBWP switching based on one or more values of the one or morefields of the first DCI format. The first DCI format may comprise atleast one of: a BWP indicator; and/or a second field (e.g., BWPaction/mode indication) indicating one of a PBWP switching, an SBWPactivation, an SBWP deactivation, and/or an SBWP switching.

A DCI format may comprise a BWP ID field and a second field. The secondfield may be an action indication field (e.g., a field indicating anaction associated with a BWP indicated by the BWP ID field). A wirelessdevice may switch a PBWP to a first BWP as a new PBWP, for example, ifthe wireless device receives one or more DCIs based on the first DCIformat. The wireless device may switch the PBWP to the first BWP, forexample, based on at least one of: the BWP indicator (e.g., a BWP ID inthe BWP ID field) indicating the first BWP; the first BWP beingdifferent from the PBWP; and/or the second field being set to a firstvalue (e.g., “00” if a size of the second field corresponds to twobits). The wireless device may receive a DL assignment on (e.g., sentvia) a PBWP (e.g., without PBWP switching), for example, based on theBWP indicator indicating the PBWP and/or the second field being set tothe first value (e.g., “00”).

The wireless device may activate a second BWP as an SBWP, for example,if the wireless device receives the one or more DCIs based on the firstDCI format. The wireless device may activate the second BWP, forexample, based on at least one of: the BWP indicator indicating thesecond BWP; and/or the second field being set to a second value (e.g.,“01” if the size of the second field corresponds to two bits).

The wireless device may deactivate an SBWP, for example, if the wirelessdevice receives the one or more DCIs based on the first DCI format. Thewireless device may deactivate the SBWP, for example, based on at leastone of: the BWP indicator indicating the SBWP; and the second fieldbeing set to a third value (e.g., “10”).

The wireless device may switch an SBWP to a third BWP, for example, ifthe wireless device receives the one or more DCIs based on the first DCIformat. The wireless device may switch the SBWP to the third BWP, forexample, based on at least one of: the BWP indicator indicating thethird BWP; the third BWP being different from the PBWP and from theSBWP; and/or the second field being set to a fourth value (e.g., “11” ifthe size of the second field corresponds to two bits). The wirelessdevice may receive a DL assignment on (e.g., sent via) an SBWP (e.g.,without SBWP switching), for example, after or in response to the BWPindicator indicating the SBWP and/or the second field being set to thefourth value (e.g., “11”).

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) first DCI based on an existingDCI format (e.g., DCI format 1_0/1_1) indicating PBWP/SBWP switchingand/or indicating a DL scheduling on the PBWP/SBWP. A base station maysend (e.g., transmit) second DCI based on second DCI format (e.g.,different from the existing DCI format) indicating SBWPactivation/deactivation. The second DCI format may comprise at least oneof: a BWP indicator; and/or a second field indicating activation ordeactivation of an SBWP.

A DCI format may comprise a BWP ID field and a second field. A wirelessdevice may switch from the PBWP to a first BWP as a new PBWP, forexample, if the wireless device receives the first DCI based on aparticular DCI format (e.g., an existing DCI format, such as DCI format1_0/1_1, or any other DCI format). The wireless device may receive firstDCI, for example, based on the BWP indicator indicating the first BWPdifferent from the PBWP and/or first DCI being transmitted via the PBWP.The wireless device may receive a DL assignment on (e.g., sent via) thePBWP, for example, after or in response to the BWP indicator indicatingthe PBWP.

A wireless device may switch from the SBWP to a second BWP as a newSBWP, for example, if the wireless device receives first DCI based on aparticular DCI format (e.g., an existing DCI format such as DCI format1_0/1_1, or any other DCI format). The wireless device may receive thefirst DCI, for example, based on the BWP indicator indicating the secondBWP different from the SBWP and/or the first DCI being transmitted viathe SBWP. The wireless device may receive a DL assignment on (e.g., sentvia) the SBWP, for example, after or in response to the BWP indicatorindicate the SBWP.

A wireless device may activate a third BWP indicated by the BWPindicator as a second SBWP, for example, if the wireless device receivesthe second DCI based on the second DCI format (e.g., different from DCIformat 1_0/1_1). The wireless device may activate the third BWP, forexample, based on the second field of the second DCI being a first value(e.g., “1” if a size of the second fields corresponds to one bit).

A wireless device may deactivate the SBWP indicated by the BWPindicator, for example, if the wireless device receives the second DCIbased on the second DCI format (e.g., different from DCI format1_0/1_1). The wireless device may deactivate the SBWP, for example,based on the second field of the second DCI being a second value (e.g.,“0”).

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) DCI based on a third DCI format(e.g., different from an existing format such as DCI format 1_0/1_1, orany other DCI format) indicating a PBWP switching or an SBWP activation,for example, if at most one SBWP is supported. The third DCI format maycomprise at least one of: a BWP indicator; and/or a second fieldindicating a PBWP switching or an SBWP activation. The PBWP switching orthe SBWP activation may be indicated based on a value of the secondfield. Activation of a BWP as a new SBWP may deactivate an active SBWPand activate the BWP as the new SBWP (e.g., at a time), for example, ifat most one SBWP is supported.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) the DCI based on the third DCIformat to a wireless device. The wireless device may switch from thePBWP to a first BWP indicated by the BWP indicator, as a new PBWP, forexample, if the wireless device receives the DCI and at most one SBWP issupported. The wireless device may switch from the PBWP to the firstBWP, for example, based on the second field being a first value (e.g.,“1” if a size of the second field corresponds to one bit). The wirelessdevice may receive a DL assignment on (e.g., sent via) the PBWP, forexample, if the BWP indicator indicates the PBWP.

The wireless device may activate a second BWP indicated by the BWPindicator, as a new SBWP, for example, if the wireless device receivesthe DCI based on the third DCI format and at most one SBWP is supported.The wireless device may activate the second BWP, for example, based onthe second field being a second value (e.g., “0” if a size of the secondfield corresponds to one bit). The wireless device may deactivate afirst SBWP (e.g., if the first SBWP is configured and in active state),for example, after or in response to activating the second BWP. Thewireless device may receive a DL assignment on (e.g., sent via) theSBWP, for example, if the BWP indicator indicates the SBWP.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more DCIs (e.g., DCIformat 1_0/1_1), to a wireless device, indicating an SBWP activation, anSBWP deactivation, or an SBWP switching, for example, based on at leastone of: one or more values of one or more fields of the one or moreDCIs; and/or whether the one or more DCIs are transmitted via a PBWP orvia an SBWP. The one or more DCIs may be transmitted based on DCI format1_0 or 1_1 indicating a PDSCH scheduling. The one or more fields maycomprise at least one of: a carrier indicator; an identifier for a DCIformat; a BWP indicator; a first field indicating a frequency domainresource assignment; a second field indicating a time domain resourceassignment; a PUCCH resource indicator; a TPC command for a scheduledPUCCH; and/or a PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator. Reusing anexisting DCI format (e.g., DCI format 1_0 or 1_1) for a BWP operationsupporting multiple active BWPs may reduce blind decoding complexity ata wireless device. A PBWP may be in active state, for example, at leastuntil receiving an RRC message.

The wireless device may switch the SBWP to a first BWP as a new SBWPindicated (e.g., identified) by the BWP indicator, for example, based onat least one of: the one or more DCIs being transmitted via the SBWP;the BWP indicator indicating the first BWP different from the PBWP andfrom the SBWP; a value of the first field or the second field beingdifferent from a first value (e.g., all zeros); and/or the value of thefirst field or the second field being different from a second value(e.g., all ones). The first value and/or the second value may bepredefined (e.g., fixed).

The wireless device may activate a second BWP as a new SBWP indicated(e.g., identified) by the BWP indicator, for example, based on at leastone of: the BWP indicator indicating the second BWP different from thePBWP and from the SBWP; and/or the value of the first field or thesecond field being the first value (e.g., all zeros). The wirelessdevice may deactivate the SBWP, for example, based on at least one of:the one or more DCIs being transmitted via the PBWP; the BWP indicatorindicating the SBWP different from the PBWP; and/or the value of thefirst field or the second field being the second value (e.g., all ones).

The wireless device may receive a DL assignment on (e.g., sent via) aPBWP, for example, based on the BWP indicator indicating the PBWP. Thewireless device may receive a DL assignment on (e.g., sent via) an SBWP(e.g., without SBWP switching/activation/deactivation), for example,based on the BWP indicator indicating the SBWP. The wireless device mayreceive one or more DL data packets from a first PDSCH mapped on thePBWP, for example, after or in response to receiving the DL assignmentvia the PBWP. The wireless device may receive one or more DL datapackets from a second PDSCH mapped on the SBWP, for example, after or inresponse to receiving the DL assignment via the SBWP.

The base station and the wireless device may dynamically activate anSBWP, deactivate an SBWP, and/or switch an SBWP to a new SBWP, forexample, based on one or more fields of one or more DCIs. Transitionlatency and/or implementation cost of the wireless device may bereduced, and/or multiple active BWPs may be flexibly supported.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more DCIs indicating anSBWP activation, for example, if a PBWP and at most one SBWP aresupported. The base station may send the one or more DCIS indicating theSBWP activation, for example, based on at least one of: the BWPindicator indicating a BWP different from the PBWP (e.g., if there is noSBWP in the cell); the BWP indicator indicating the BWP different fromthe SBWP; the one or more DCIs being transmitted via the PBWP; and/orthe one or more DCIs being transmitted via the SBWP.

Activation of an SBWP may comprise deactivating a first SBWP andactivating a first inactive BWP as the SBWP (e.g., at a time).Activation of an SBWP may comprise activating a first inactive BWP asthe SBWP, for example, if there is no active SBWP before the activating.

The wireless device may receive a DL assignment via a PBWP (e.g.,without PBWP switching), for example, based on the BWP indicatorindicating the PBWP. The wireless device may receive a DL assignment viaan SBWP (e.g., without SBWP switching/activation), for example, based onthe BWP indicator indicating the SBWP. The wireless device may receiveone or more DL data packets from a first PDSCH via the PBWP, forexample, after or in response to receiving the DL assignment via thePBWP. The wireless device may receive one or more DL data packets from asecond PDSCH via the SBWP, for example, after or in response toreceiving the DL assignment via the SBWP. Blind decoding complexityand/or implementation cost of the wireless device may be reduced, and/ora PBWP and an SBWP (e.g., at most one SBWP) may be flexibly supported.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device, a MAC CEto activate or deactivate an SBWP, for example, if an SBWP activation ordeactivation is not urgent (or time sensitive). The base station maysend (e.g., transmit) DCI to switch from a first SBWP to a second BWP asa second SBWP, for example, if a PBWP is in an active state untilswitched by an RRC message. A MAC CE and a corresponding MAC subheadermay be used for one or more SBWP activation/deactivation.

The base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more DCIs (e.g., DCIformat 1_0/1_1) to switch from a first SBWP to a second BWP as a secondSBWP, for example, if one or more MAC CEs are used foractivating/deactivating an SBWP and the PBWP is always in active stateuntil switched by an RRC message. The base station may send the one ormore DCIs to switch from the first SBWP to the second BWP, for example,based on at least one of: one or more values of one or more fields ofthe one or more DCIs; and/or whether the one or more DCIs aretransmitted via a PBWP or via an SBWP. The wireless device may switch afirst SBWP to a second BWP as a second SBWP indicated (e.g., identified)by the BWP indicator, for example, based on at least one of: the one ormore DCIs being transmitted via the first SBWP; and/or the BWP indicatorindicating the second BWP different from the PBWP and from the firstSBWP.

The wireless device may receive a DL assignment via a PBWP, for example,based on the BWP indicator indicating the PBWP. The wireless device mayreceive a DL assignment via an SBWP (e.g., without SBWP switching), forexample, based on the BWP indicator indicating the SBWP. The wirelessdevice may receive one or more DL data packets from a first PDSCH viathe PBWP, for example, after or in response to receiving the DLassignment via the PBWP. The wireless device may receive one or more DLdata packets from a second PDSCH via the SBWP, for example, after or inresponse to receiving the DL assignment via the SBWP.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more DCIs indicating aPDSCH scheduling on a PBWP or an SBWP, for example, if a PBWP and atmost one SBWP of a plurality of BWPs are supported and one or more MACCEs are used for activating/deactivating an SBWP. The base station maysend the one or more DCIs indicating the PDSCH scheduling, for example,based on a BWP indicator of the one or more DCIs. The wireless devicemay receive a DL assignment via a PBWP, for example, based on the BWPindicator indicating the PBWP. The wireless device may receive a DLassignment via an SBWP (e.g., without SBWP switching/activation), forexample, based on the BWP indicator indicating the SBWP. The wirelessdevice may receive one or more DL data packets from a first PDSCH viathe PBWP, for example, after or in response to receiving the DLassignment via the PBWP. The wireless device may receive one or more DLdata packets from a second PDSCH via the SBWP, for example, after or inresponse to receiving the DL assignment via the SBWP.

A wireless device may perform SBWP switching based on the one or moreMAC CEs. A base station may send (e.g., transmit) the one or more MACCEs indicating an activation of a second SBWP and/or a deactivation of afirst SBWP, for example, by setting a second field of the one or morefirst fields corresponding the second SBWP to a first value (e.g., “1”)and/or setting a first field of the one or more first fieldscorresponding to the first SBWP to a second value (e.g., “0”). Thewireless device may switch from the first SBWP to the second SBWP, forexample, after or in response to receiving the one or more MAC CEs.Combining MAC CE for SBWP activation/deactivation and DCI for SBWPswitching may reduce blind decoding complexity and/or dynamic signalingoverhead (e.g., DCI for SBWP activation/deactivation) to supportmultiple active BWPs in a cell.

One or more MAC CEs for SBWP activation/deactivation may introduceintolerant transition latency (e.g., which may be caused by schedulingthe MAC CE in PDSCH resources at a base station and sending one or moreHARQ feedbacks for the MAC CE in PUCCH/PUSCH resources at a wirelessdevice) for some services (e.g., URLLC). A wireless device may receivemultiple types of services, which may require a quick SBWPactivation/deactivation. The transition latency may be reduced, forexample, by introducing a first DCI format, which may be different fromone or more other DCI formats (e.g., an existing DCI format such as DCIformat 1_0/1_1, or any other DCI format). The first DCI format maycomprise one or more fields indicating SBWPactivation/deactivation/switching based on one or more values of the oneor more fields of the first DCI format. The first DCI format maycomprise at least one of: a BWP indicator; a second field (e.g., BWPaction/mode indication) indicating one of SBWP activation, SBWPdeactivation, and/or SBWP switching, for example, if a PBWP is in activestate until switched/deactivated by an RRC message.

A DCI format may comprise a BWP ID field and an action indication field(e.g., a second field for indicating a change of a BWP). A wirelessdevice may receive a DL assignment via a PBWP, for example, if thewireless device receives one or more DCIs based on the first DCI format.The wireless device may receive the DL assignment via the PBWP, forexample, based on a BWP indicator indicating the PBWP and/or the secondfield being set to a first value (e.g., “00” if a size of the secondfield corresponds to two bits). A wireless device may receive a DLassignment via an SBWP, for example, if the wireless device receives oneor more DCIs based on the first DCI format. The wireless device mayreceive the DL assignment via the SBWP, for example, based on the BWPindicator indicating the SBWP and/or the second field being set to afirst value (e.g., “00”).

The wireless device may activate a first BWP as an SBWP, for example, ifthe wireless device receives the one or more DCIs based on the first DCIformat. The wireless device may activate the first BWP as an SBWP, forexample, based on at least one of: the BWP indicator indicating thefirst BWP; and/or the second field being set to a second value (e.g.,“01” if a size of the second field corresponds to two bits).

The wireless device may deactivate an SBWP, for example, if the wirelessdevice receives the one or more DCIs based on the first DCI format. Thewireless device may deactivate the SBWP, for example, based on at leastone of: the BWP indicator indicating the SBWP; and the second fieldbeing set to a third value (e.g., “10”).

The wireless device may switch an SBWP to a second BWP, for example, ifthe wireless device receives the one or more DCIs based on the first DCIformat. The wireless device may switch the SBWP to the second BWP, forexample, based on at least one of: the BWP indicator indicating thesecond BWP; the second BWP being different from the PBWP and from theSBWP; and/or the second field being set to a fourth value (e.g., “11”).

A DCI format may comprise a BWP ID field and an action indication field(e.g., a second field for indicating a change of a BWP). A base stationmay send (e.g., transmit) first DCI based on a DCI format (e.g., anexisting DCI format such as DCI format 1_0/1_1, or any other DCI format)indicating SBWP switching, or DL scheduling on the PBWP/SBWP. A basestation may send (e.g., transmit) second DCI based on the second DCIformat (e.g., different from the existing DCI format, such as DCI format1_0/1_1, or any other DCI format) indicating SBWPactivation/deactivation. The second DCI format may comprise at least oneof: a BWP indicator; and/or a second field indicating activation ordeactivation of an SBWP.

A wireless device may switch from the SBWP to a first BWP as a new SBWP,for example, if the wireless device receives the first DCI based on theDCI format (e.g., an existing such as DCI format 1_0/1_1, or any otherDCI format). The wireless device may switch from the SBWP to the firstBWP, for example, based on the BWP indicator indicating the first BWPdifferent from the SBWP and/or the first DCI being transmitted via theSBWP.

A wireless device may activate a second BWP indicated by the BWPindicator as a second SBWP, for example, if the wireless device receivesthe second DCI based on the second DCI format (e.g., different from DCIformat 1_0/1_1 or another DCI format). The wireless device may activatethe second BWP as the second SBWP, for example, based on the secondfield of the second DCI being a first value (e.g., “1” if a size of thesecond field corresponds to one bit). A wireless device may deactivatethe SBWP indicated by the BWP indicator, for example, if the wirelessdevice receives the second DCI based on the second DCI format (e.g.,different from DCI format 1_0/1_1 or another DCI format). The wirelessdevice may deactivate the SBWP indicated by the BWP indicator, forexample, based on the second field of the second DCI being a secondvalue (e.g., “0”).

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) DCI based on a DCI format(e.g., an existing DCI format such as DCI format 1_0/1_1, or any otherDCI format) indicating an SBWP activation, for example, if at most oneSBWP is supported. A wireless device may activate a first BWP as asecond SBWP, for example, based on the BWP indicator indicating thefirst BWP is different from a first SBWP and from the PBWP. Theactivating the first BWP as the second SBWP may comprise deactivatingthe first SBWP and activating the first BWP as the second SBWP (e.g., ata time), for example, if at most one SBWP is supported and the PBWP isin active state at least until switched/deactivated by an RRC message.The activating the first BWP as the second SBWP may comprise activatingthe first BWP as the second SBWP, for example, if there is no SBWPbefore the activating and/or if at most one SBWP is supported and thePBWP is in an active state at least until switched/deactivated by an RRCmessage.

A wireless device may support a plurality of active BWPs in a cell, forexample, if a determination of a PBWP or an SBWP of the plurality ofactive BWPs is not performed. A base station may send (e.g., transmit)one or more DCIs indicating an active BWP switching, a BWP activation, aBWP deactivation, or a PDSCH scheduling on the active BWP, for example,based on at least one of: one or more values of one or more fields ofthe one or more DCIs. The one or more DCIs may be sent (e.g.,transmitted) based on a DCI format (e.g., DCI format 1_0 or 1_1, or anyother DCI format) indicating a PDSCH scheduling. The one or more fieldsmay comprise at least one of: a carrier indicator; an identifier for aDCI format; a BWP indicator; a first field indicating a frequency domainresource assignment; a second field indicating a time domain resourceassignment; a PUCCH resource indicator; a TPC command for scheduledPUCCH; and/or a PDSCH-to-HARQ_feedback timing indicator. Reusing a DCIformat (e.g., an existing DCI format such as DCI format 1_0 or 1_1, orany other DCI format) for a BWP operation supporting multiple activeBWPs may reduce blind decoding complexity at a wireless device.

A wireless device (e.g., with active BWPs in active state) may switchfrom a first active BWP to a second BWP indicated (e.g., identified) bythe BWP indicator, for example, based on at least one of: the one ormore DCIs being transmitted via the first active BWP; the BWP indicatorindicating the second BWP different from the active BWPs; one or morevalues of the first field and/or the second field being different from afirst value (e.g., all zeros); and/or the value of the first field orthe second field being different from a second value (e.g., all ones).

A wireless device (e.g., tith active BWPs in active state) may activatea third BWP indicated (e.g., identified) by the BWP indicator, forexample, based on at least one of: the BWP indicator indicating thethird BWP different from the active BWPs; and/or the value of the firstfield or the second field being the first value (e.g., all zeros). Awireless device (e.g., with active BWPs in active state) may deactivatean active BWP, for example, based on at least one of: the BWP indicatorindicating the active BWP; and/or the value of the first field or thesecond field being the second value (e.g., all ones).

A wireless device may receive a DL assignment via an active BWP (e.g.,without active BWP switching), for example, based on at least one of:the BWP indicator indicating the active BWP; the value of the firstfield or the second field not being the first value (e.g., all zeros);and/or the value of the first field or the second field not being thesecond value (e.g., all ones). The wireless device may receive one ormore DL data packets from a PDSCH via the active BWP, for example, afteror in response to receiving the DL assignment via the active BWP.

A base station and/or a wireless device may dynamicallyswitch/activate/deactivate a BWP based on one or more fields of one ormore DCIs. Blind decoding complexity and implementation cost of thewireless device may be reduced and/or multiple active BWPs may beflexibly supported.

A wireless device may support a plurality of active BWPs in a cell, forexample, if a determination of a PBWP or an SBWP of the plurality ofactive BWPs is not performed. A base station may send (e.g., transmit),to a wireless device, a MAC CE to activate or deactivate a BWP, forexample, if BWP activation or deactivation is not urgent (e.g., not timesensitive). The base station may send (e.g., transmit) DCI to switchfrom a first active BWP to a second BWP as a second active BWP. FA MACCE and a corresponding MAC subheader may be used for one or more BWPactivation/deactivation.

A wireless device (e.g., with active BWPs in active state) may switchfrom a first active BWP to a second BWP indicated (e.g., identified) bythe BWP indicator, for example, based on at least one of: the BWPindicator indicating the second BWP different from the active BWPs;and/or the DCI being transmitted via the first active BWP. A wirelessdevice may receive a DL assignment via an active BWP (e.g., withoutactive BWP switching), for example, based on the BWP indicatorindicating the active BWP. A wireless device may receive one or more DLdata packets from a PDSCH via the active BWP, for example, after or inresponse to receiving the DL assignment via the active BWP.

A wireless device may support a plurality of active BWPs in a cell, forexample, if a determination of a PBWP or an SBWP of the plurality ofactive BWPs is not performed. One or more MAC CEs for SBWPactivation/deactivation may introduce intolerant transition latency(e.g., caused by scheduling the MAC CE in PDSCH resources and sendingone or more HARQ feedbacks for the MAC CE in PUCCH/PUSCH resources) forsome services (e.g., URLLC). A wireless device may receive one or moreof multiple types of services, at least some of which may require quickSBWP activation/deactivation. The transition latency by introducing afirst DCI format, different from one or more other DCI formats (e.g., anexisting DCI format such as DCI format 1_0/1_1, or any other DCIformat), may be improved. The first DCI format may comprise one or morefields indicating one of BWP switching, BWP activation, and/or BWPdeactivation, for example, based on one or more values of the one ormore fields of the first DCI format. The first DCI format may compriseat least one of: a BWP indicator; and/or a second field (e.g., BWPaction/mode indication) indicating one of BWP switching, BWP activation,and/or BWP deactivation.

A first DCI format may comprise a BWP ID field and an action indicationfield (e.g., a second field for indicating a change of a BWP). Awireless device may switch a first active BWP to a first BWP as a secondactive BWP, for example, if the wireless device receives one or moreDCIs based on the first DCI format and multiple BWPs are in activestate. The wireless device may switch the first active BWP to the firstBWP, for example, based on at least one of: the BWP indicator indicatingthe first BWP; the first BWP being different from the multiple BWPs;and/or the second field being set to a first value (e.g., “00” if a sizeof the second field corresponds to two bits). The wireless device mayreceive a DL assignment via an active BWP (e.g., without BWP switching),for example, based on the BWP indicator indicating the active BWP and/orthe second field being set to a first value (e.g., “00” if a size of thesecond field corresponds to two bits).

The wireless device may activate a second BWP as an active BWP, forexample, if the wireless device receives the one or more DCIs based onthe first DCI format and multiple BWPs are in active state. The wirelessdevice may activate the second BWP as an active BWP, for example, basedon at least one of: the BWP indicator indicating the second BWP; and/orthe second field being set to a second value (e.g., “01” if the size ofthe second field corresponds to two bits).

The wireless device may deactivate an active BWP, for example, if thewireless device receives the one or more DCIs based on the first DCIformat and multiple BWPs are in active state. The wireless device maydeactivate the active BWP, for example, based on at least one of: theBWP indicator indicating the active BWP; and the second field being setto a third value (e.g., “10” if the size of the second field correspondsto two bits).

The wireless device may switch a first active BWP to a third BWP, forexample, if the wireless device receives the one or more DCIs based onthe first DCI format and multiple BWPs are in active state. The wirelessdevice may switch the first active BWP to the third BWP, for example,based on at least one of: the BWP indicator indicating the third BWP;the third BWP being different from the multiple BWPs; and/or the secondfield being set to a fourth value (e.g., “11” if the size of the secondfield corresponds to two bits).

A DCI format may comprise a BWP ID field and an action indication field(e.g., a second field for indicating a change of a BWP). A base stationmay send (e.g., transmit) first DCI based on a DCI format (e.g., anexisting DCI format such as DCI format 1_0/1_1, or any other DCI format)indicating BWP switching, and/or DL scheduling on an active BWP.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) second DCI based on the secondDCI format (e.g., different from the first DCI format and/or differentfrom an existing DCI format) indicating BWP activation/deactivation. Thesecond DCI format may comprise at least one of: a BWP indicator; and/ora second field indicating activation or deactivation of a BWP.

A wireless device may switch from a first active BWP to a first BWP as asecond active BWP, for example, if the wireless device receives thefirst DCI based on a DCI format (e.g., an existing DCI format such asDCI format 1_0/1_1, or any other DCI format) and multiple BWPs are inactive states. The wireless device may switch from the first active BWPto the first BWP, for example, based on the BWP indicator indicating thefirst BWP different from the multiple active BWPs and/or the first DCIbeing transmitted via the first active BWP. The wireless device mayreceive a DL assignment via the first active BWP, for example, if theBWP indicator indicates the first active BWP.

A wireless device may activate a third BWP indicated by the BWPindicator as a second active BWP, for example, if the wireless devicereceives the second DCI based on the second DCI format (e.g., differentfrom DCI format 1_0/1_1 or another DCI format). The wireless device mayactivate the third BWP as the second active BWP, for example, based onthe second field of the second DCI being a first value (e.g., “1” if asize of the second field corresponds to one bit).

A wireless device may deactivate an active BWP indicated by the BWPindicator, for example, if the wireless device receives the second DCIbased on the second DCI format (e.g., different from DCI format1_0/1_1). The wireless device may deactivate the active BWP, forexample, based on the second field of the second DCI being a secondvalue (e.g., “0” if the size of the second field corresponds to onebit).

A wireless device may be configured to use one or more resources (e.g.,bandwidth parts (BWPs)). At least some wireless devices (e.g., legacywireless devices, wireless devices compliant with 3GPP Release 15, orany other wireless device) may be configured to up to a maximum quantityof resources (e.g., up to four BWPs, or up to any other quantity ofresources). For example, at least some wireless devices may activateonly one of four BWPs at a time. For such wireless devices, at most oneBWP (e.g., uplink BWP, downlink BWP) may be active in a cell (e.g.,primary cell, secondary cell, etc.) at a given time. At least somewireless devices may stop a BWP timer (e.g., BWP inactivity timer) ofthe primary cell (PCell), for example, if the wireless device receives(e.g., from a base station) a random-access response (msg2) for arandom-access procedure on an active downlink BWP of the PCell (e.g., ifthe wireless device initiates a random-access procedure for a secondarycell (SCell)). The wireless device may start monitoring an activedownlink BWP of the PCell for the random-access response, for example,after sending (e.g., transmitting) a random-access preamble (e.g., msg1)for the random-access procedure. A wireless device may activate at leasttwo downlink BWPs on a PCell, for example, if multiple active downlinkBWPs are supported for a cell. Monitoring all of the active downlinkBWPs (e.g., at least two downlink BWPs) by a wireless device may resultin increased power consumption. This increase in power consumption mayoccur when the wireless device initiates a random-access procedure foran SCell, for example, based on sending (e.g., transmitting) arandom-access preamble for the random-access procedure, for example, ifthe wireless device does not know in advance which active downlinkBWP(s), of the at least two downlink BWPs, the wireless device shouldmonitor for a random-access response.

A wireless device may select a downlink BWP, among the at least twodownlink BWPs, with the lowest or highest BWP index. The wireless devicemay select a downlink BWP, among the at least two downlink BWPs,designated as a primary BWP (e.g., default BWP, initial downlink BWP,etc.). The wireless device may select a downlink BWP, among the at leasttwo downlink BWPs, configured with one or more common control channels.The base station may send, and the wireless device may receive, a PDCCHorder indicating a downlink BWP ID associated with the downlink BWP. Thewireless device may refrain from stopping the BWP timer (e.g., BWPinactivity timer) of all the active downlink BWPs (e.g., at least twodownlink BWPs). The wireless device may stop the BWP timer (e.g., BWPinactivity timer) of the selected downlink BWP.

A wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) a random-access preamble fora random-access procedure via an active uplink BWP of a cell, forexample, if the wireless device initiates a random-access procedure. Awireless device may activate at least two uplink BWPs on a cell, forexample, if multiple active uplink BWPs are supported for a cell. Awireless device may not know which active uplink BWP, of the at leasttwo uplink BWPs, the wireless device should select to send (e.g.,transmit) the random-access preamble, for example, if the wirelessdevice initiates a random-access procedure for the cell.

The wireless device may select an active uplink BWP, among the at leasttwo uplink BWPs, having the lowest or highest BWP index. The wirelessdevice may select an active uplink BWP, among the at least two uplinkBWPs, designated as a primary BWP (e.g., initial uplink BWP, etc.). Thewireless device may select an active uplink BWP, among the at least twouplink BWPs, having the earliest random-access occasion to send (e.g.,transmit) the random-access preamble. The wireless device may select anactive uplink BWP, among the at least two uplink BWPs, having an uplinkBWP ID that is the same as a downlink BWP ID of an active downlink BWP.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more messages comprisingconfiguration parameters of a plurality of cells. At least one cell ofthe plurality of cells may comprise a plurality of BWPs, among which oneBWP may be designated a default BWP. The configuration parameters mayindicate that the at least one cell may be associated with a BWP timer(e.g., BWP inactivity timer) and/or a timer value. A first timer valueassociated with a first cell of the at least one cell may be the same asor different from a second timer value associated with a second cell ofthe at least one cell. The base station and/or the wireless device mayswitch to the default BWP as an active BWP, for example, based on or inresponse to an expiry of the BWP timer associated with the at least onecell.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit), to a wireless device, a PDCCHon or using a first active BWP. The wireless device may receive, fromthe base station, the PDCCH on the first active BWP. The wireless devicemay start the BWP timer (e.g., BWP inactivity timer) having a timervalue, for example, after or in response to receiving the PDCCH on thefirst active BWP.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) first DCI via a PDCCH on orusing a first active BWP of a first active cell of the at least onecell. The first DCI may be used for scheduling a second BWP of a secondactive cell of the at least one cell, for example, if cross-carrierscheduling is supported. A wireless device may receive, from the basestation, the first DCI on or using the first active BWP of the firstactive cell. The wireless device may transition (e.g., switch) thesecond BWP of the second cell from an inactive state to an active state,for example, if the second BWP is in an inactive state at a time of (orprior to) receiving the first DCI. The wireless device may start and/orrestart a first BWP timer using a timer value associated with the firstcell (and/or the first active BWP), for example, after or in response toreceiving the first DCI. The wireless device may start and/or restart asecond BWP timer using a timer value associated with the second cell(and/or the second BWP), for example, after or in response to receivingthe first DCI on the first active BWP. A base station and/or a wirelessdevice may switch to a default BWP as an active BWP, for example, basedon or in response to an expiry of a BWP timer associated with the atleast one cell.

Some devices (e.g., legacy devices and/or other devices) may allow atmost one active resource (e.g., BWP) in a cell. The cell may beassociated with a resource timer (e.g., BWP timer) associated with atimer value. A wireless device may start the resource timer (e.g., BWPtimer) (e.g., using the timer value), for example, after or in responseto receiving first DCI on a first resource (e.g., BWP, such as an activeBWP). The wireless device may switch to a second resource (e.g., asecond BWP), for example, after or in response to receiving the firstDCI for resource switching (e.g., BWP switching) from the first resource(e.g., first BWP) to the second resource (e.g., second BWP). Thewireless device may start and/or restart the BWP timer (e.g., using thetimer value), for example, after or in response to the resourceswitching (e.g., BWP switching) from the first resource (e.g., firstBWP) to the second resource (e.g., second BWP). At least some devicesmay not support multiple active resources (e.g., multiple active BWPs)in a cell. Such devices may not efficiently manage a state (e.g., anactive state or inactive state) of multiple active BWPs, for example, ifmultiple active BWPs are supported and/or if multiple BWP timers areassociated with the multiple active BWPs. Efficient BWP operationmechanisms may support multiple active BWPs operating within a cell.Efficient BWP timer management may support multiple active BWPsoperating in a cell.

A base station and/or a wireless device may communicate on or usingmultiple active resources (e.g., multiple active BWPs) of a plurality ofresources (e.g., a plurality of BWPs) for sending/receiving multipletypes of services in a cell. Each of the plurality of resources (e.g.,plurality of BWPs) may be in one of an active state or an inactivestate. The plurality of resources (e.g., plurality of BWPs) may comprisea default resource (e.g., a default BWP). The default resource (e.g.,BWP) may be in an inactive state if the default resource (e.g., defaultBWP) is different from one or more of the multiple active resources(e.g., multiple active BWPs). A wireless device may switch a firstactive resource (e.g., a first active BWP) of the multiple activeresources (e.g., multiple active BWPs) to the default resource (e.g.,default BWP), for example, after or in response to at least one of:receiving DCI for resource switching (e.g., BWP switching) to thedefault resource (e.g., default BWP); and/or a first resource timer(e.g., first BWP timer) associated with the first active resource (e.g.,first active BWP) expiring. A wireless device may switch a second activeresource (e.g., second active BWP) of the multiple active resources(e.g., multiple active BWPs) to the default resource (e.g., the defaultBWP), for example, after or in response to at least one of: receivingDCI for resource switching (e.g., BWP switching) to the default resource(e.g., default BWP); or a second resource timer (e.g., second BWP timer)associated with the second active resource (e.g., second active BWP)expiring. The first inactivity timer may be associated with a firsttimer value. The second inactivity timer may be associated with a secondtimer value. The second timer value may be different from or the same asthe first timer value.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more messages comprisingconfiguration parameters indicating a cell comprising a default BWPand/or a plurality of BWPs. The configuration parameters may indicatethat each of the plurality of BWPs may be associated with a BWP-specifictimer and/or a BWP timer value. A first BWP timer value associated witha first BWP of the plurality of BWPs may be the same or different from asecond BWP timer value associated with a second BWP of the plurality ofBWPs. The configuration parameters may indicate that each of theplurality of BWPs may be associated with a BWP-specific timer and a celltimer value. The BWP timers of the plurality of BWPs may be associatedwith the same cell timer value.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more messages comprisingconfiguration parameters. The configuration parameters may indicate acell comprising a default BWP and/or a plurality of BWP groups. Theconfiguration parameters may indicate each BWP group of the plurality ofBWP groups that may be associated with a BWP group-specific timer and/orthat may be associated with a BWP group timer value.

A wireless device may receive first DCI via a first PDCCH on or using afirst BWP of the plurality of BWPs. The wireless device may start and/orrestart a first BWP-specific timer associated with a first BWP (and/orcell) timer value, for example, after or in response to receiving thefirst DCI on or using the first BWP. A wireless device may receivesecond DCI via a second PDCCH on or using a second BWP of the pluralityof BWPs. The wireless device may start and/or restart a secondBWP-specific timer associated with a second BWP (and/or cell) timervalue, for example, after or in response to receiving the second DCI onor using the second BWP. The wireless device may manage the firstBWP-specific timer of the first BWP and the second BWP-specific timer ofthe second BWP independently.

The wireless device may start and/or restart a first BWP group-specifictimer associated with a first BWP group (and/or cell) timer value, forexample, after or in response to receiving DCI on or using a first BWPof a first BWP group of the plurality of BWP groups. The wireless devicemay start and/or restart a second BWP group-specific timer associatedwith a second BWP group (and/or cell) timer value, for example, after orin response to receiving DCI on or using a second BWP of a second BWPgroup of the plurality of BWP groups. The wireless device may manage thefirst BWP group-specific timer of the first BWP group and the second BWPgroup-specific timer of the second BWP group independently.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more messages comprisingconfiguration parameters. The configuration parameters may indicate acell comprising a primary active BWP and/or a plurality of BWPs in acell. The configuration parameters may indicate that each of theplurality of BWPs may be associated with a BWP-specific timer, a BWPtimer value, and/or a cell-specific timer value. The primary active BWPmay remain in an active state, for example, at least until receiving asecond command indicating a primary active BWP switching. The secondcommand may be an RRC message, a MAC CE, and/or DCI (e.g., DCIindicating a primary active BWP switching). The primary active BWP mayrefrain from being associated with a BWP-specific timer. The wirelessdevice may manage a first BWP-specific timer of a first BWP of theplurality of BWPs and the second BWP-specific timer of a second BWP ofthe plurality of BWPs independently. The wireless device may keep theprimary active BWP active, for example, at least until receiving thesecond command

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) first DCI on or using a firstBWP (e.g., a first DL BWP) of the plurality of BWPs. The DCI mayindicate a DL assignment and/or a UL grant for a second BWP of theplurality of BWPs. The first BWP may be associated with a firstBWP-specific timer and/or a first BWP timer value (and/or a cell timervalue). The first BWP may be a primary active BWP. The second BWP may beassociated with a second BWP-specific timer and/or a second BWP timervalue (and/or a cell timer value). The wireless device may start and/orrestart the first BWP-specific timer (e.g., based on the first BWP timervalue and/or the cell timer value), for example, after or in response toreceiving the first DCI. The wireless device may start and/or restartthe second BWP-specific timer (e.g., based on the second BWP timer valueand/or the cell timer value), for example, after or in response toreceiving the first DCI.

The first DCI sent (e.g., transmitted) on or using the first BWP mayindicate a configured (and/or dynamic) downlink assignment on the secondBWP (e.g., a second DL BWP). The first DCI sent (e.g., transmitted) onor using the first BWP may indicate a configured (and/or dynamic) uplinkgrant on or using the second BWP (e.g., a UL BWP). The first DCI sent(e.g., transmitted) on or using the first BWP may be sent (e.g.,transmitted) via a PDCCH addressed to a first identifier on the firstBWP. The first identifier may be at least one of: a C-RNTI and/or aCS-RNTI. The first identifier may be at least one of: a SI-RNTI, aRA-RNTI, a TC-RNTI, a P-RNTI, a INT-RNTI, a SFI-RNTI, a TPC-PUSCH-RNTI,a TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, a TPC-SRS-RNTI, a CS-RNTI, a SP-CSI-RNTI, and/or aC-RNTI.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) second DCI (and/or a MAC CE) onor using a first BWP of the plurality of BWPs. The second DCI mayindicate activating a second BWP of the plurality of BWPs. The first BWPmay be associated with a first BWP-specific timer and/or a first BWPtimer value (and/or a cell timer value). The first BWP may be a primaryactive BWP. The second BWP may be associated with a second BWP-specifictimer and/or a second BWP timer value (and/or a cell timer value). Thewireless device may start and/or restart the first BWP-specific timer(e.g., based on the first BWP timer value and/or the cell timer value),for example, after or in response to receiving the second DCI. Thewireless device may activate the second BWP, for example, after or inresponse to receiving the second DCI. The wireless device may startand/or restart the second BWP-specific timer (e.g., based on the secondBWP timer value and/or the cell timer value), for example, after or inresponse to activating the second BWP. A gap between a first time atwhich DCI for the activation is received and a second time at which theactivation is completed may be zero or a value greater than zero.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) third DCI (and/or a MAC CE) onor using a first BWP of the plurality of BWPs. The third DCI mayindicate deactivating a second BWP of the plurality of BWPs. The firstBWP may be associated with a first BWP-specific timer and/or a first BWPtimer value (and/or a cell timer value). The first BWP may be a primaryactive BWP. The second BWP may be associated with a second BWP-specifictimer and/or a second BWP timer value (and/or a cell timer value). Thewireless device may not start and/or restart the first BWP-specifictimer (e.g., based on the first BWP timer value and/or the cell timervalue), for example, after or in response to receiving the second DCI.The wireless device may deactivate the second BWP, for example, after orin response to receiving the second DCI. The wireless device may resetthe second BWP-specific timer (e.g., based on the second BWP-specifictimer value and/or the cell-specific timer value). The wireless devicemay refrain from starting the second BWP-specific timer, for example,after or in response to deactivating the second BWP.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) fourth DCI on or using a firstactive BWP of the plurality of BWPs. The fourth DCI may indicateswitching from a second active BWP to a third BWP as a third active BWP.The first active BWP may be associated with a first BWP-specific timerand/or a first BWP timer value (and/or a cell timer value). The firstBWP may be a primary active BWP. The second active BWP may be associatedwith a second BWP-specific timer and/or a second BWP timer value (and/ora cell timer value). The third BWP may be associated with a thirdBWP-specific timer and/or a third BWP timer value (and/or a cell timervalue). The wireless device may start and/or restart the firstBWP-specific timer (e.g., based on the first BWP timer value and/or thecell timer value), for example, after or in response to receiving thefourth DCI. The wireless device may deactivate the second active BWPand/or activate the third BWP as the third active BWP, for example,after or in response to receiving the fourth DCI. The wireless devicemay reset the second BWP-specific timer (e.g., based on the second BWPtimer value and/or the cell timer value). The wireless device mayrefrain from starting the second BWP-specific timer, for example, afteror in response to deactivating the second active BWP. The wirelessdevice may start and/or restart the third BWP-specific timer (e.g.,based on the third BWP timer value and/or the cell timer value), forexample, after or in response to activating the third BWP. A gap betweena first time at which DCI for the switching is received by the wirelessdevice and a second time at which the switching is completed may be zeroor a value greater than zero.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more messages comprisingconfiguration parameters indicating a cell comprising a default BWPand/or a plurality of BWPs in a cell. The configuration parameters mayindicate that each of the plurality of BWPs may be associated with aBWP-specific timer and a BWP timer value or a cell timer value. A firstactive BWP of multiple active BWPs of the plurality of BWPs may bedesignated as a primary active BWP (PBWP). At least a second active BWPof multiple active BWPs of the plurality of BWPs may be designated as asecondary active BWP (SBWP). The default BWP may be in an inactivestate, for example, if the default BWP is different from the PBWP.

A wireless device may start and/or restart a first BWP-specific timer,for example, after or in response to receiving a first commandindicating at least one of: the PBWP being activated; a PBWP switching;and/or a DL assignment/UL grant on the PBWP. The wireless device maystart and/or restart a second BWP-specific timer, for example, after orin response to receiving a second command indicating at least one of:the SBWP being activated; a SBWP switching; and/or a DL assignment/ULgrant on the SBWP.

The wireless device may monitor a first PDCCH on the PBWP, for example,after or in response to the first BWP-specific timer running (e.g.,starting to run or still running) The wireless device may monitor asecond PDCCH on the SBWP, for example, after or in response to thesecond BWP-specific timer running (e.g., starting to run or stillrunning)

The wireless device may deactivate the SBWP, for example, after or inresponse to the second BWP-specific timer expiring and the firstBWP-specific timer running (e.g., starting to run or still running) Thewireless device may keep the PBWP in an active state, for example, afteror in response to the second BWP-specific timer expiring and the firstBWP-specific timer running (e.g., starting to run or still running) Thewireless device may keep the default BWP in an inactive state, forexample, after or in response to the second BWP-specific timer expiringand the first BWP-specific timer running (e.g., starting to run or stillrunning).

The wireless device may switch from the PBWP to the default BWP, forexample, after or in response to the second BWP-specific timer expiringand the first BWP-specific timer expiring. The wireless device mayswitch from the PBWP to the default BWP, for example, after or inresponse to one or more BWP-specific timers expiring. The one or moreBWP-specific timers may comprise at least the second BWP-specific timerand/or the first BWP-specific timer. The wireless device may activatethe default BWP and/or deactivate the PBWP, for example, after or inresponse to the switching from the PBWP to the default BWP. A gapbetween a first time at which the switching is started and a second timeat which the switching is completed may be zero or a value greater thanzero.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more messages comprisingconfiguration parameters indicating a cell comprising a default BWP anda plurality of BWPs in a cell. The configuration parameters may indicatethat each of the plurality of BWPs may be associated with a BWP-specifictimer, a BWP timer value, and/or a cell timer value. A first active BWPof multiple active BWPs of the plurality of BWPs may be designated as aprimary active BWP (PBWP). At least a second active BWP of multipleactive BWPs of the plurality of BWPs may be designated as a secondaryactive BWP (SBWP). The default BWP may be in an inactive state, forexample, if the default BWP is different from the PBWP. One or moredevices may refrain from configuring the SBWP with a PDCCH. A basestation may send (e.g., transmit) a downlink scheduling and/or an uplinkgrant for the SBWP via a PDCCH on or using the PBWP. One or more devicesmay refrain from associating the SBWP with a BWP-specific timer, forexample, if the SBWP is not configured with a PDCCH on the SBWP.

A wireless device may start and/or restart a first BWP-specific timer,for example, after or in response to receiving a first commandindicating at least one of: the PBWP being activated; a PBWP switching;and/or a DL assignment/UL grant on the PBWP. The wireless device maystart and/or restart a second BWP-specific timer (e.g., if configured),for example, after or in response to receiving a second commandindicating at least one of: the SBWP being activated; a SBWP switching;or a DL assignment/UL grant on the SBWP.

The wireless device may monitor a first PDCCH on the PBWP, for example,if the first BWP-specific timer is running. The wireless device maymonitor the first PDCCH and/or a second PDCCH on the PBWP for the SBWP,for example, if the second BWP-specific timer is running

The wireless device may switch from the PBWP to the default BWP, forexample, after or in response to the first BWP-specific timer expiringand/or if the second BWP-specific timer (e.g., if configured) isrunning. The wireless device may deactivate the PBWP and/or activate thedefault BWP, for example, after or in response to the switching from thePBWP to the default BWP. The wireless device may deactivate the SBWP,for example, after or in response to the switching from the PBWP to thedefault BWP. A gap between a first time at which the switching isstarted and a second time at which the switching is completed may bezero or a value greater than zero.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more messages comprisingconfiguration parameters indicating a cell comprising a default BWP anda plurality of BWPs in a cell. The configuration parameters may indicatethat each of the plurality of BWPs may be associated with a BWP-specifictimer, a BWP timer value, and/or a cell timer value.

A wireless device may start and/or restart a first BWP-specific timer,for example, after or in response to receiving a first commandindicating at least one of: a first BWP being activated and/or a DLassignment/UL grant on the first BWP. The wireless device may startand/or restart a second BWP-specific timer (e.g., if configured), forexample, after or in response to receiving a second command indicatingat least one of: a second BWP being activated and/or a DL assignment/ULgrant on the second BWP.

The wireless device may monitor a first PDCCH on the first BWP, forexample, if the first BWP-specific timer is running. The wireless devicemay monitor a second PDCCH on the second BWP, for example, if the secondBWP-specific timer is running.

The wireless device may switch from the second BWP to the default BWP,for example, after or in response to the second BWP-specific timerexpiring and/or if the first BWP-specific timer is running (e.g.,starting to run and/or still running) The wireless device may deactivatethe second BWP and/or activate the default BWP, for example, after or inresponse to the switching from the second BWP to the default BWP. Thewireless device may keep the first BWP in an active state, for example,based on the switching from the second BWP to the default BWP. A gapbetween a first time at which the switching is started and a second timeat which the switching is completed may be zero or a value greater thanzero. The wireless device may deactivate the first BWP and/or keep thedefault BWP in an active state, for example, after or in response to oneor more BWP-specific timers expiring. The one or more BWP-specifictimers may comprise at least: the first BWP-specific timer; and/or thesecond BWP-specific timer.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) one or more messages comprisingconfiguration parameters indicating a cell comprising a default BWPand/or a plurality of BWPs in a cell. The configuration parameters mayindicate that each of the plurality of BWPs may be associated with aBWP-specific timer, a BWP timer value, and/or a cell timer value.

A wireless device may start and/or restart a first BWP-specific timer,for example, after or in response to receiving a first commandindicating at least one of: a first BWP being activated and/or a DLassignment/UL grant on the first BWP. The wireless device may startand/or restart a second BWP-specific timer (e.g., if configured), forexample, after or in response to receiving a second command indicatingat least one of: a second BWP being activated and/or a DL assignment/ULgrant on the second BWP.

The wireless device may monitor a first PDCCH on the first BWP, forexample, if the first BWP-specific timer is running. The wireless devicemay monitor a second PDCCH on the second BWP, for example, if the secondBWP-specific timer is running

The wireless device may deactivate the second BWP, for example, after orin response to the second BWP-specific timer expiring and/or if thefirst BWP-specific timer is running (e.g., starting to run or stillrunning). The wireless device may deactivate the second BWP, forexample, after or in response to the switching. The wireless device maykeep the first BWP in an active state, for example, based on theswitching. A gap between a first time at which the switching is startedand a second time at which the switching is completed may be zero or avalue greater than zero.

The wireless device may switch to the default BWP, for example, after orin response to one or more BWP-specific timers expiring. The one or moreBWP-specific timers may comprise at least: the first BWP-specific timer;and/or the second BWP-specific timer. The wireless device may deactivatethe first BWP, deactivate, the second BWP, and/or activate the defaultBWP, for example, after or in response to the switching.

A base station and/or a wireless device may align multiple BWP timers,for example, if multiple active BWPs are supported. A wireless devicemay reduce power consumption if multiple active BWPs are supported. Abase station may reduce signaling overhead to maintain time alignmentsand/or synchronization on multiple active BWPs.

At least some wireless devices (e.g., legacy wireless devices and/or anyother wireless device) may stop a BWP timer (e.g., BWP inactivity timer)associated with an active DL BWP of the secondary cell, for example, ifa wireless device initiates a random access procedure for a secondarycell. The wireless device may stop the BWP timer (e.g., BWP inactivitytimer) to avoid an expiry of the BWP timer, for example, during therandom access procedure. The expiry of the BWP timer (e.g., BWPinactivity timer) may interrupt the random access procedure on theactive DL BWP.

The wireless device may receive a random access response of the randomaccess procedure for the secondary cell on a primary cell. The wirelessdevice may stop a second BWP timer (e.g., BWP inactivity timer)associated with a second active DL BWP of the primary cell, for example,based on the initiating of random access for the secondary cell. Thewireless device may still receive (e.g., avoid missing receiving) therandom access response, for example, by stopping the second BWP timer.The wireless device may stop the BWP timer (e.g., BWP inactivity timer)associated with an active DL BWP of the secondary cell and/or may stopthe second BWP timer (e.g., BWP inactivity timer) associated with thesecond active DL BWP of the primary cell, for example, based oninitiating random access.

FIG. 22A and FIG. 22B show examples of BWP operations for random access(e.g., for a secondary cell). The random access may use a second cell2204 for a preamble transmission on a third active BWP (e.g., activeBWP-3) and a first cell 2202 for a random access response (RAR) on afirst active BWP (e.g., active BWP-1). The first cell 2202 may comprisethe first active BWP (e.g., active BWP-1) and at least one inactive BWP(e.g., inactive BWP-2). The second cell 2204 may comprise the thirdactive BWP (e.g., active BWP-3) and at least one inactive BWP (e.g.,inactive BWP-4). A base station 2206 may send, to a wireless device2208, a PDCCH order (e.g., at time T₀). The wireless device 2208 mayinitiate a random access on a second cell (e.g., at time T₁). Thewireless device 2208 may initiate the random access on the second cellbased on the PDCCH order. The wireless device 2208 may stop a BWP timerfor the second cell and/or stop a BWP timer for a first cell (e.g., attime T₁). The wireless device 2208 may send (e.g., transmit), to thebase station 2206, a preamble on a second cell (e.g., at time T₂). Thebase station 2206 may send (e.g., transmit), to the wireless device2206, a random access response on the first cell (e.g., at time T₃). Therandom access response may be completed, for example, if the wirelessdevice 2208 receives the random access response. The wireless device mayrestart the BWP for the second cell and/or restart the BWP timer for thefirst cell, for example, based on or in response to receiving the randomaccess response.

A misalignment may arise between a BWP on which a random access responseis sent (e.g., transmitted) (such as BWP-1) and a BWP on which awireless device 2208 monitors for the random access response (such asBWP-3), for example, if the wireless device 2208 supports multipleactive BWPs in a cell. The wireless device 2208 may stop a BWP timer(e.g., BWP inactivity timer) of the BWP which the wireless device 2208monitors for the random access response. This misalignment may lead to,for example, unnecessary delay, data loss, and/or signaling overhead.Recovery from the misalignment that may be caused by the wireless device2208 missing the random access response may result in a transmissiondelay and/or signaling overhead, which may increase the latency of arandom access procedure and, in turn, may result in a waste of radioresources for redundant transmission of the random access response.

A wireless device 2208 may have multiple active UL BWPs in a cell. Thewireless device 2208 may select an UL BWP of the multiple active UL BWPsto send (e.g., transmit) a random access preamble, for example, if thewireless device 2208 initiates random access (e.g., contention-free orcontention-based). A wireless device 2208 may have multiple active DLBWPs in a cell. The wireless device 2208 may select a DL BWP of themultiple active DL BWPs to monitor for a random access response, forexample, if the wireless device 2208 initiates random access (e.g.,contention-free or contention-based). The wireless device 2208 mayrefrain from monitoring the multiple active DL BWPs to receive therandom access response, which may lead to a more efficient operationand/or reducing power consumption.

A wireless device 2208 may support multiple active BWPs in a cell, forexample, to improve upon random access procedures such as by increasingdownlink radio efficiency and/or reducing uplink signaling overhead. Abase station 2206 may send (e.g., transmit), to one or more wirelessdevices 2208, one or more messages comprising configuration parameters.A wireless device 2208 may receive, from the base station 2206, one ormore messages comprising the configuration parameters. The one or moremessages may comprise one or more RRC messages (e.g., an RRC connectionreconfiguration message, RRC connection reestablishment message, and/orRRC connection setup message). The configuration parameters may compriseconfiguration parameters for a primary cell (e.g., associated with afirst base station 2202) and/or one or more secondary cells (e.g.,associated with one or more second base stations 2204). The one or moresecondary cells may comprise a first secondary cell. The configurationparameters may comprise BWP configuration parameters for a plurality ofBWPs. The plurality of BWPs may comprise a first plurality of BWPs ofthe primary cell comprising a first DL BWP and/or a second DL BWP. Theplurality of BWPs may comprise a second plurality of BWPs of the firstsecondary cell comprising a third DL BWP.

Some or all of the plurality of BWPs may be indicated (e.g., identified)by a BWP-specific index. Some or all of the plurality of BWPs may beassociated with a BWP-specific inactivity timer.

A wireless device 2208 may receive (e.g., in a first slot) first DCIindicating switching a first active BWP of the primary cell from a firstactive DL BWP to the first DL BWP. The first DCI may comprise a firstBWP indicator. The wireless device 2208 may determine that the first DCIindicates BWP switching, for example, based on the first BWP indicatorindicating a BWP different from the first active DL BWP. The wirelessdevice 2208 may start a first inactivity timer associated with the firstDL BWP, for example, based on switching the first active BWP from thefirst active DL BWP to the first DL BWP.

A wireless device 2208 may receive (e.g., in a first slot) first DCIand/or a first MAC CE indicating activating the first DL BWP of theprimary cell. The first DCI and/or the first MAC CE may comprise a firstBWP indicator. The wireless device 2208 may determine that the first DCIand/or the first MAC CE indicates BWP activating, for example, based onthe first BWP indicator indicating the first DL BWP. The wireless device2208 may start a first inactivity timer associated with the first DLBWP, for example, based on activating the first DL BWP.

A wireless device 2208 may receive (e.g., in a second slot) second DCIindicating switching a second active BWP of the primary cell from asecond active DL BWP to the second DL BWP. The second DCI may comprise asecond BWP indicator. The wireless device 2208 may determine that thesecond DCI indicates BWP switching from the second active DL BWP to thesecond DL BWP, for example, based on the second BWP indicator indicatinga BWP different from the second active DL BWP. The wireless device 2208may start a second inactivity timer associated with the second DL BWP,for example, based on switching the second active BWP from the secondactive DL BWP to the second DL BWP.

A wireless device 2208 may receive (e.g., in a second slot) second DCIand/or a second MAC CE indicating activating the second DL BWP of theprimary cell. The second DCI and/or the second MAC CE may comprise asecond BWP indicator. The wireless device may determine that the secondDCI and/or the second MAC CE indicates BWP activating, for example,based on the second BWP indicator indicating the second DL BWP. Thewireless device 2208 may start a second inactivity timer associated withthe second DL BWP, for example, based on activating the second DL BWP.

A wireless device 2208 may receive (e.g., in a third slot) third DCIindicating switching a third active BWP of the first secondary cell froma third active DL BWP to the third DL BWP. The third DCI may comprise athird BWP indicator. The wireless device 2208 may determine that thethird DCI indicates BWP switching, for example, based on the third BWPindicator indicating a BWP different from the third active DL BWP. Thewireless device 2208 may start a third inactivity timer associated withthe third DL BWP, for example, based on switching the third active BWPfrom the third active DL BWP to the third DL BWP.

A wireless device 2208 may receive (e.g., in a third slot) third DCIand/or a third MAC CE indicating activating the third DL BWP of thefirst secondary cell. The third DCI and/or the third MAC CE may comprisea third BWP indicator. The wireless device 2208 may determine that thethird DCI and/or the third MAC CE indicates BWP activating, for example,based on the third BWP indicator indicating the third DL BWP. Thewireless device 2208 may start a third inactivity timer associated withthe third DL BWP, for example, based on activating the third DL BWP. Thewireless device 2208 may start the third inactivity timer of the thirdDL BWP, for example, based on receiving an SCell activation/deactivationMAC CE signal activating the first secondary cell.

The wireless device 2208 may activate at least two BWPs (e.g., the firstDL BWP and the second DL BWP) of the first plurality of BWPs and atleast one BWP (e.g., the third DL BWP) of the second plurality of BWPs.Activating each BWP of the at least two BWPs of the primary cell andeach BWP of the at least one BWP of the first secondary cell may beperformed in different time slots. The wireless device 2208 may startthe BWP-specific inactivity timer of each of the at least two BWPsand/or the BWP-specific inactivity timer of each of the at least oneBWP, for example, based on activating the BWPs.

The first DL BWP and the second DL BWP of the first plurality of BWPs ofthe primary cell, and the third DL BWP of the second plurality of BWPsof the first secondary cell, may be active at the same time. The firstinactivity timer, the second inactivity timer, and the third inactivitytimer may be running at the same time.

FIG. 23A and FIG. 23B show examples of BWP operations for random access(e.g., for a secondary cell). The random access procedures may comprisesending messages via a second cell 2304, such as for a preambletransmission on a third active BWP (e.g., active BWP-3). The randomaccess procedures may comprise sending messages via a first cell 2302,such as for a random access response (RAR) on a first active BWP (e.g.,active BWP-1) or a second active BWP (e.g., active BWP-2). The firstcell 2302 may be a primary cell. The second cell 2304 may be a secondarycell. The first cell 2302 may comprise the first active BWP (e.g.,active BWP-1) and the second active BWP (e.g., active BWP-2). The secondcell 2304 may comprise the third active BWP (e.g., active BWP-3) and atleast one inactive BWP (e.g., inactive BWP-4). A base station 2306 maysend, to a wireless device 2308, a PDCCH order (e.g., at time T0). Thewireless device 2308 may initiate the random access on the second cell(e.g., at time T₁). The wireless device 2308 may initiate the randomaccess on the second cell based on the PDCCH order. The wireless device2308 may initiate the random access on the second cell based ondetecting, by the wireless device 2308, a beam failure (e.g., at timeT₀). The wireless device 2308 may stop a BWP timer for the second celland/or stop BWP timers (e.g., BWP-1 timer and BWP-2 timer) for a firstcell (e.g., at time T₁). The wireless device 2308 may send, to the basestation 2306, a preamble on a second cell (e.g., at time T2). The basestation 2306 may send, to the wireless device 2306, a random accessresponse on the first cell (e.g., at time T₃). The random accessresponse may be completed, for example, if the wireless device 2308receives the random access response. The wireless device 2308 mayrestart the BWP timer for the second cell and/or restart the at leasttwo BWP timers for the first cell (e.g., BWP-1 timer and BWP-2 timer),for example, based on or in response to receiving the random accessresponse.

The wireless device 2308 may send (e.g., transmit) a random accesspreamble, for example, based on initiating random access for a firstsecondary cell (e.g., at time T₂ in FIG. 23B). The random accesspreamble may be dedicated to the wireless device 2308. The random accesspreamble may be wireless device-specific and may be configured for thewireless device 2308, for example, by the base station 2306.

The wireless device 2308 may select at least one BWP of the at least twoBWPs (e.g., BWP-1, BWP-2), for example, based on initiating a randomaccess procedure and one or more criteria. The wireless device 2308 maystop the BWP-specific inactivity timer of some or all of the at leasttwo BWPs (e.g., the first DL BWP and/or the second DL BWP, or BWP-1and/or BWP-2) and/or the BWP-specific inactivity timer of some or all ofthe at least one BWP (e.g., third DL BWP, BWP-1, and/or BWP-2), forexample, based on initiating random access. The wireless device 2308 maystop the first inactivity timer of the first DL BWP (e.g., BWP-1) andthe second inactivity timer of the second DL BWP (e.g., BWP-2) of theprimary cell and the third inactivity timer of the third DL BWP of thefirst secondary cell (e.g., at time T₁ in FIG. 23B).

The wireless device 2308 may monitor at least one PDCCH occasion for DCIon some or all of the at least two BWPs (e.g., BWP-1 and/or BWP-2), forexample, based on the stopping of the BWP-specific inactivity timer ofsome or all of the at least two BWPs (e.g., BWP-1 and/or BWP-2). Thewireless device 2308 may start a first response window (e.g.,RA-ResponseWindow) at a first PDCCH occasion on the first DL BWP of theprimary cell, for example, from the end of sending (e.g., transmitting)the random access preamble. The wireless device 2308 may start a secondresponse window (e.g., RA-ResponseWindow) at a second PDCCH occasion onthe second DL BWP of the primary cell, for example, from the end ofsending (e.g., transmitting) the random access preamble. The firstresponse window and/or the second response window may be configured by ahigher layer (e.g., MAC, RRC).

The wireless device 2308 may monitor the first PDCCH occasion for DCI,for example, if the first response window is running. The wirelessdevice 2308 may monitor the second PDCCH occasion for the DCI, forexample, if the second response window is running. The DCI may beindicated (e.g., identified, scrambled, etc.) by an RA-RNTI of thewireless device 2308. The DCI may be indicated (e.g., identified,scrambled, etc.) by a C-RNTI of the wireless device 2308.

The base station 2306 may select a DL BWP (e.g., BWP-1 or BWP-2) to send(e.g., transmit) the DCI. The DCI may be for a random access response(e.g., msg2). Selecting the DL BWP may be based on a base stationimplementation. The base station 2306 may select the first DL BWP tosend (e.g., transmit) the DCI. The base station 2306 may select thesecond DL BWP to send (e.g., transmit) the DCI. The base station 2306may send (e.g., transmit) the DCI on some or all of the at least twoBWPs (e.g., the first DL BWP, the second DL BWP, BWP-1, or BWP-2).

The random access procedure may be completed successfully (e.g., at timeT₃), for example, if the wireless device 2308 receives the DCI (e.g., onthe first DL BWP, the second DL BWP, BWP-1, or BWP-2). The wirelessdevice 2308 may restart the BWP-specific inactivity timer of some or allof the at least two BWPs (e.g., the first DL BWP, the second DL BWP,BWP-1, or BWP-2) and/or the BWP-specific inactivity timer of some or allof the at least one BWP (e.g., third DL BWP), for example, if the randomaccess is successfully completed. The wireless device 2308 may restartthe first inactivity timer of the first DL BWP (e.g., BWP-1), the secondinactivity timer of the second DL BWP (e.g., BWP-2), and/or the thirdinactivity timer of the third BWP (e.g., at time T₃).

FIG. 23A shows that the wireless device 2308 may stop some or all of theBWP-specific inactivity timers of each active DL BWP of the first cell(e.g., Active BWP-1 and Active BWP-2), for example, after or in responseto initiating random access for a second cell. The wireless device 2308may stop a BWP-specific inactivity timer of at least one active BWP ofthe second cell (e.g., Active BWP-3), for example, after or in responseto initiating random access.

The base station 2302 may send (e.g., transmit) a random access responseon at least one of the active DL BWPs of the primary cell (e.g., BWP-1and/or BWP-2). The base station 2302 may send (e.g., transmit) therandom access response on Active BWP-1. The base station 2302 may send(e.g., transmit) the random access response on Active BWP-2. The basestation 2302 may send (e.g., transmit) the random access response onboth Active BWP-1 and Active BWP-2.

The wireless device 2308 may monitor some or all of the active DL BWPsof the first cell (e.g., Active BWP-1 and/or Active BWP-2) for therandom access response. The wireless device 2308 may complete the randomaccess procedure successfully, for example, based on receiving therandom access response on at least one of the active DL BWPs of theprimary cell. The wireless device 2308 may restart each BWP-specificinactivity timer of some or all of the active DL BWPs of the primarycell (e.g., Active BWP-1 and/or Active BWP-2) and/or the BWP-specificinactivity timer of the at least one active BWP of the secondary cell(e.g., Active BWP-3), for example, based on completing the random accessprocedure successfully.

A base station 2306 may refrain from configuring a DL BWP (e.g., BWP-1,BWP-2) with a common search space. A wireless device 2308 may refrainfrom receiving a DCI identified by an RA-RNTI, for example, if notconfigured with the common search space.

FIG. 23A shows that the wireless device 2308 may stop some or all of theBWP-specific inactivity timers of each active DL BWP of the primary cell(e.g., BWP-1, BWP-2) configured with a common search space, for example,after or in response to initiating random access. The wireless device2308 may stop a BWP-specific inactivity timer of at least one active BWPof the secondary cell (e.g., Active BWP-3), for example, after or inresponse to initiating random access.

The base station 2302 may send (e.g., transmit) a random access responseon at least one of the active DL BWPs of the primary cell (e.g., BWP-1,BWP-2) configured with a common search space. The base station 2302 maysend (e.g., transmit) the random access response on Active BWP-1, forexample, if the Active BWP-1 is configured with a common search space.The base station 2302 may send (e.g., transmit) the random accessresponse on Active BWP-2, for example, if the Active BWP-2 is configuredwith a common search space. The base station 2302 may send (e.g.,transmit) the random access response on both Active BWP-1 and ActiveBWP-2, for example, if both the Active BWP-1 and Active BWP-2 areconfigured with a common search space.

The wireless device 2308 may monitor some or all of the active DL BWPs,of the primary cell, configured with a common search space (e.g., ActiveBWP-1, Active BWP-2, or both) for the random access response. Thewireless device 2308 may complete random access successfully, forexample, based on receiving the random access response on at least oneof the active DL BWPs of the primary cell.

The wireless device 2308 may restart some or all of the BWP-specificinactivity timers of some or all of the active DL BWPs, of the primarycell, configured with a common search space (e.g., Active BWP-1, ActiveBWP-2, or both), for example, based on completing the random accessprocedure successfully. The wireless device 2308 may restart theBWP-specific inactivity timer of the at least one active BWP of thesecondary cell (e.g., Active BWP-3), for example, based on completingrandom access successfully.

The at least one selected BWP of the at least two BWPs (e.g., BWP-1,BWP-2) may comprise BWPs of the primary cell configured with a commonsearch space. The wireless device 2308 may stop the BWP-specificinactivity timer of some or all of the BWPs of a first subset of the atleast two BWPs (e.g., first DL BWP and/or the second DL BWP, or BWP-1and/or BWP-2), for example, based on initiating random access. Some orall of the BWPs of the first subset may be configured with a commonsearch space.

The first DL BWP (e.g, BWP-1) of the wireless device 2308 may beconfigured with a common search space. The second DL BWP (e.g., BWP-2)of the wireless device 2308 may refrain from being configured with acommon search space. The wireless device 2308 may stop the firstinactivity timer of the first DL BWP (e.g., BWP-1) of the primary celland/or the third inactivity timer of the third DL BWP (e.g., BWP-3) ofthe first secondary cell (e.g., at time T₁), for example, based oninitiating a random access procedure.

The wireless device 2308 may start a first response window (e.g.,RA-ResponseWindow) at a first PDCCH occasion on the first DL BWP (e.g.,BWP-1) of the primary cell from the end of sending (e.g., transmitting)the random access preamble. The first response window may be configuredby a higher layer (e.g., MAC, RRC).

The wireless device 2308 may monitor the first PDCCH occasion for DCI,for example, if the first response window is running. The DCI may beidentified by an RA-RNTI. The DCI may be identified by a C-RNTI of thewireless device 2308.

Random access may be completed successfully (e.g., at time T₃), forexample, if the wireless device 2308 receives the DCI on the first DLBWP (e.g., BWP-1). The wireless device 2308 may restart (e.g., at timeT₃) the first inactivity timer of the first DL BWP (e.g., BWP-1) and/orthe third inactivity timer of the third BWP (e.g., BWP-3), for example,based on random access being successfully completed.

The first DL BWP (e.g., BWP-1) and/or the second DL BWP (BWP-2) of thewireless device 2308 may be configured with a common search space. Thewireless device 2308 may stop the first inactivity timer of the first DLBWP (e.g., BWP-1) and/or the second inactivity timer of the second DLBWP (e.g., BWP-2) of the primary cell and/or the third inactivity timerof the third DL BWP (e.g., BWP-3) of the first secondary cell (e.g., attime T₁), for example, based on initiating random access.

FIG. 24A and FIG. 24B show examples of BWP operations for random access(e.g., for a secondary cell). The random access may use a second cell2404 for a preamble transmission on a third active BWP (e.g., activeBWP-3) and a first cell 2402 for a random access response (RAR) on afirst active BWP (e.g., active BWP-1). The first cell 2402 may comprisethe first active BWP (e.g., active BWP-1) and the second active BWP(e.g., active BWP-2). The second cell 2404 may comprise the third activeBWP (e.g., active BWP-3) and at least one inactive BWP (e.g., inactiveBWP-4). A base station 2406 may send, to a wireless device 2408, a PDCCHorder (e.g., at time T₀). The wireless device 2408 may initiate randomaccess for a second cell (e.g., at time T₁). The wireless device 2408may initiate the random access on the second cell based on the PDCCHorder. The wireless device 2408 may initiate the random access on thesecond cell based on detecting, by the wireless device 2408, a beamfailure (e.g., at time T₀). The wireless device 2408 may stop a BWPtimer for the second cell and/or stop a PBWP timer for a first cell(e.g., at time T₁). The wireless device 2408 may send (e.g., transmit),to the base station 2406, a preamble on a second cell (e.g., at timeT₂). The base station 2406 may send, to the wireless device 2406, arandom access response on the first cell (e.g., at time T₃). The randomaccess response may be completed, for example, if the wireless device2408 receives the random access response. The wireless device 2408 mayrestart the BWP for the second cell and/or restart the PBWP timer forthe first cell, for example, based on or in response to receiving therandom access response.

The wireless device 2408 may send (e.g., transmit) a random accesspreamble, for example, based on initiating random access for the firstsecondary cell (e.g., at time T₂). The random access preamble may bededicated to the wireless device 2408. The random access preamble may bewireless device-specific and may be configured for the wireless device2408 by the base station 2406.

The at least one selected BWP of the at least two BWPs (e.g., BWP-1,BWP-2) may comprise a BWP designated as a primary BWP (e.g., PBWP) ofthe primary cell. The first DL BWP may be designated, by a base station2406, as a primary BWP (e.g., PBWP). The second DL BWP may bedesignated, by the base station 2406, as a secondary BWP (e.g., SBWP).The wireless device 2408 may stop the first inactivity timer of the PBWP(e.g., first DL BWP) of the primary cell and the third inactivity timerof the third DL BWP of the first secondary cell (e.g., at time T₁), forexample, based on initiating random access.

The wireless device 2408 may start a first response window (e.g.,RA-ResponseWindow) at a first PDCCH occasion on the PBWP of the primarycell from the end of sending (e.g., transmitting) the random accesspreamble. The first response window may be configured by a higher layer(e.g., MAC, RRC).

The wireless device 2408 may monitor the first PDCCH occasion for DCI,for example, if the first response window is running. The DCI may beidentified by an RA-RNTI. The DCI may be identified by a C-RNTI of thewireless device 2408. The base station 2402 may send (e.g., transmit)the DCI on the PBWP of the primary cell.

Random access may be completed successfully (e.g., at time T₃), forexample, if the wireless device 2408 receives the DCI on the PBWP. Thewireless device 2408 may restart the first inactivity timer of the PBWP(e.g., the first DL BWP) and/or the third inactivity timer of the thirdBWP (e.g., at time T₃), for example, if random access is successfullycompleted.

FIG. 24A shows a base station 2402 may designate a first DL BWP of theprimary cell (e.g., Active BWP-1) as a primary BWP (PBWP) and/or asecond DL BWP of the primary cell (e.g., Active BWP-2) as a secondaryBWP (SBWP). The wireless device 2408 may stop a BWP-specific inactivitytimer of the PBWP of the primary cell, for example, based on initiatingrandom access for a secondary cell. The wireless device 2408 may stop aBWP-specific inactivity timer of at least one active BWP of the secondcell (e.g., Active BWP-3 in FIG. 24A), for example based on initiatingrandom access.

The base station 2402 may send (e.g., transmit) a random access responseon the PBWP of the primary cell. The wireless device 2408 may monitorthe PBWP of the primary cell for the random access response. Thewireless device 2408 may complete random access successfully, forexample, based on receiving the random access response on the PBWP ofthe primary cell. The wireless device 2408 may restart the BWP-specificinactivity timer of the PBWP of the primary cell (e.g., Active BWP-1)and/or the BWP-specific inactivity timer of the at least one active BWPof the secondary cell (e.g., Active BWP-3), for example, based oncompleting random access successfully.

Further, referring back to FIG. 24A and FIG. 24B that show examples ofBWP operations for random access (e.g., for a secondary cell), thewireless device 2408 may initiate random access for the first secondarycell (e.g., at time T₁). The initiating of random access may be based onreceiving, by the wireless device 2408, a PDCCH order (e.g., at timeT₀). The initiating of random access may be based on detecting, by thewireless device 2408, a beam failure (e.g., at time T₀).

The wireless device 2408 may send (e.g., transmit) a random accesspreamble, for example, based on initiating random access for the firstsecondary cell (e.g., at time T₂). The random access preamble may bededicated to the wireless device 2408. The random access preamble may bewireless device-specific and may be configured for the wireless deviceby the base station 2404.

The at least one selected BWP of the at least two BWPs (e.g., BWP-1,BWP-2) may comprise a BWP, among the at least two BWPs, with a lowestBWP-specific index. The at least one selected BWP of the at least twoBWPs may comprise a BWP, among the at least two BWPs, with a highestBWP-specific index.

The first DL BWP may be identified by a first DL BWP index. The secondDL BWP may be identified by a second DL BWP index. The first DL BWPindex and the second DL BWP index may be configured for the wirelessdevice 2408 by the base station 2406.

The first DL BWP index may be lower than the second DL BWP index. Thewireless device 2408 may determine that the first DL BWP index is lowerthan the second DL BWP index. The wireless device 2408 may stop thefirst inactivity timer of the first DL BWP of the primary cell, forexample, based on determining that the first DL BWP index is lower thanthe second DL BWP index and/or on initiating random access. The wirelessdevice 2408 may stop the third inactivity timer of the third DL BWP ofthe first secondary cell (e.g., at time T₁), for example, based oninitiating random access.

The first DL BWP index may be greater than the second DL BWP index. Thewireless device 2408 may determine that the first DL BWP index isgreater than the second DL BWP index. The wireless device 2408 may stopthe first inactivity timer of the first DL BWP of the primary cell, forexample, based on determining that the first DL BWP index is greaterthan the second DL BWP index and/or on initiating random access. Thewireless device 2408 may stop the third inactivity timer of the third DLBWP of the first secondary cell (e.g., at time T₁), for example, basedon initiating random access.

The wireless device 2408 may start a first response window (e.g.,RA-ResponseWindow) at a first PDCCH occasion on the first DL BWP of theprimary cell, for example, from the end of sending (e.g., transmitting)the random access preamble, for example, based on determining that thefirst DL BWP index is greater than the second DL BWP index. The firstresponse window may be configured by a higher layer (e.g., MAC, RRC).

The wireless device 2408 may monitor the first PDCCH occasion for DCI,for example, if the first response window is running. The DCI may beidentified by an RA-RNTI. The DCI may be identified by a C-RNTI of thewireless device 2408. The base station 2402 may send (e.g., transmit)the DCI on the first DL BWP of the primary cell. The base station 2402may select the first DL BWP, for example, based on the first DL BWPindex being lower (or greater) than the second DL BWP index.

The random access may be completed successfully (e.g., at time T₃), forexample, if the wireless device 2408 receives the DCI on the first DLBWP. The wireless device 2408 may restart the first inactivity timer ofthe first DL BWP and the third inactivity timer of the third BWP (e.g.,at time T₃), for example, based on the random access procedure beingsuccessfully completed.

A base station 2402 may configure a wireless device 2408 with aplurality of DL BWPs of a primary cell. At least two BWPs of theplurality of DL BWPs may be active (e.g., Active BWP-1 and ActiveBWP-2). Each of the plurality of DL BWPs may be identified with aBWP-specific index. Each of the plurality of DL BWPs may be associatedwith a BWP-specific inactivity timer.

An active DL BWP of the at least two BWPs (e.g., BWP-1, BWP-2) may havea lowest BWP-specific index among the at least two BWPs. The wirelessdevice 2408 may stop a BWP-specific inactivity timer of the active DLBWP configured with the lowest BWP-specific index (e.g., Active BWP-1),for example, based on initiating random access for a secondary cell. Thewireless device 2408 may stop a BWP-specific inactivity timer of atleast one active BWP of the secondary cell (e.g., Active BWP-3), forexample, based on initiating random access.

An active DL BWP of the at least two BWPs may have a lowest BWP-specificindex among the at least two BWPs and may be configured with a commonsearch space. The wireless device 2408 may stop a BWP-specificinactivity timer of the active DL BWP configured with the lowestBWP-specific index and the common search space (e.g., Active BWP-1), forexample, based on initiating random access for a secondary cell. Thewireless device 2408 may stop a BWP-specific inactivity timer of atleast one active BWP of the secondary cell (e.g., Active BWP-3), forexample, based on initiating random access.

An active DL BWP of the at least two BWPs (e.g., BWP-1, BWP-2) may havea highest BWP-specific index among the at least two BWPs. The wirelessdevice 2408 may stop a BWP-specific inactivity timer of the active DLBWP configured with the highest BWP-specific index (e.g., Active BWP-1),for example, based on initiating random access for a secondary cell. Thewireless device 2408 may stop a BWP-specific inactivity timer of atleast one active BWP of the secondary cell (e.g., Active BWP-3), forexample, based on initiating random access.

An active DL BWP of the at least two BWPs (e.g., BWP-1, BWP-2) may havea highest BWP-specific index among the at least two BWPs and/or may beconfigured with a common search space. The wireless device 2408 may stopa BWP-specific inactivity timer of the active DL BWP configured with thehighest BWP-specific index and the common search space (e.g., ActiveBWP-1), for example, based on initiating random access for a secondcell. The wireless device 2408 may stop a BWP-specific inactivity timerof at least one active BWP of the secondary cell (e.g., Active BWP-3),for example, based on initiating random access.

The base station 2402 may send (e.g., transmit) a random access responseon the active DL BWP, of the primary cell, configured with the lowest(or the highest) BWP-specific index. FIG. 24A shows that the basestation 2402 may send (e.g., transmit) the random access response onActive BWP-1, for example, if a BWP-specific index of the Active BWP-1is less (or greater) than a BWP-specific index of the Active BWP-2.

The wireless device 2408 may monitor the active DL BWP of the primarycell (e.g., Active BWP-1) for the random access response. The wirelessdevice 2408 may complete random access successfully, for example, basedon receiving the random access response on the active DL BWP of theprimary cell. The wireless device 2408 may restart the BWP-specificinactivity timer of the active DL BWP (e.g., Active BWP-1), of theprimary cell, configured with the lowest (or highest) BWP-specific index(e.g., Active BWP-1) and/or the BWP-specific inactivity timer of the atleast one active BWP of the second cell (e.g., Active BWP-3), forexample, based on completing the random access procedure successfully.

FIG. 25A and FIG. 25B show examples of BWP operations for random access(e.g., for a secondary cell). The random access may use a second cell2504 for a preamble transmission on a third active BWP (e.g., activeBWP-3) and a first cell 2502 for a random access response (RAR) on adefault active BWP (e.g., active BWP-1). The first cell 2502 maycomprise the default active BWP (e.g., active BWP-1) and the secondactive BWP (e.g., active BWP-2). The second cell 2504 may comprise thethird active BWP (e.g., active BWP-3) and at least one inactive BWP(e.g., inactive BWP-4). A base station 2506 may send, to a wirelessdevice 2508, a PDCCH order (e.g., at time T₀). The wireless device 2508may initiate random access on the second cell (e.g., at time T₁). Thewireless device 2508 may initiate the random access on the second cellbased on receiving, by the wireless device 2508, a PDCCH order (e.g., attime T₀). The wireless device 2508 may initiate the random access on thesecond cell based on detecting, by the wireless device 2508, a beamfailure (e.g., at time T₀). The wireless device 2508 may stop a BWPtimer for the second cell (e.g., at time T₁). The wireless device 2508may send (e.g., transmit), to the base station 2506, a preamble on asecond cell (e.g., at time T₂). The base station 2506 may send, to thewireless device 2506, a random access response on the first cell (e.g.,at time T₃). The random access response may be completed, for example,if the wireless device 2508 receives the random access response. Thewireless device 2508 may restart the BWP timer for the second cell, forexample, based on or in response to receiving the random accessresponse.

The wireless device 2508 may send (e.g., transmit) a random accesspreamble, for example, based on initiating random access for the firstsecondary cell (e.g., at a time T₂ in FIG. 25B). The random accesspreamble may be dedicated to the wireless device 2508. The random accesspreamble may be wireless device-specific and may be configured for thewireless device 2508 by the base station 2506.

The first DL BWP may be a default BWP. The first DL BWP may always beactive when at least two DL BWPs (including the first DL BWP) of theprimary cell are active, for example, based on the first DL BWP beingthe default BWP. The first DL BWP may not be associated (e.g.,configured) with a first inactivity timer.

The wireless device 2508 may stop the third inactivity timer of thethird DL BWP of the first secondary cell (e.g., at a time T₁ in FIG.25B), for example, based on initiating the random access procedure. Thewireless device 2508 may not stop BWP-specific timers (if configured) ofactive BWPs (e.g., first DL BWP and/or second DL BWP) of the primarycell. The wireless device 2508 may not stop the first inactivity timer(not configured) of the first DL BWP and the second inactivity timer ofthe second DL BWP of the primary cell.

The wireless device 2508 may start a first response window (e.g.,RA-ResponseWindow) at a first PDCCH occasion on the default BWP (e.g.,the first DL BWP) of the primary cell from the end of sending (e.g.,transmitting) the random access preamble. The first response window maybe configured by a higher layer (e.g., MAC, RRC).

The wireless device 2508 may monitor the first PDCCH occasion for DCI ifthe first response window is running. The DCI may be identified by anRA-RNTI. The DCI may be identified by a C-RNTI of the wireless device2508. The base station 2502 may send (e.g., transmit) the DCI on thedefault BWP (e.g., the first DL BWP) of the primary cell.

Random access may be completed successfully (e.g., at a time T₃ in FIG.25B) if the wireless device 2508 receives the DCI on the default BWP(e.g., the first DL BWP The wireless device 2508 may restart the thirdinactivity timer of the third BWP (e.g., at a time T₃ in FIG. 25B), forexample, based on random access being successfully completed.

FIG. 25A shows that a first active DL BWP (e.g., Active BWP-1) may be adefault BWP. A second active DL BWP (e.g., Active BWP-2) may be anon-default BWP. The Active BWP-1 may not be deactivated (e.g., alwaysin active state) if there is another active DL BWP (e.g., Active BWP-2).The Active BWP-1 may not be configured with a BWP-specific inactivitytimer.

FIG. 25A shows that the wireless device may not stop each BWP-specificinactivity timer (if configured) of each active DL BWP of the primarycell, for example, based on initiating random access for the secondcell. The wireless device may only stop a BWP-specific inactivity timerof at least one active BWP of the second cell (e.g., Active BWP-3 inFIG. 25A), for example, based on initiating random access.

The base station 2502 may send (e.g., transmit) a random access responseon the Active BWP-1 (e.g., default BWP) of the primary cell. Thewireless device 2508 may monitor for the random access response in theActive BWP-1 of the primary cell. The wireless device 2508 may completerandom access successfully, for example, based on receiving the randomaccess response on the Active BWP-1 of the first cell. The wirelessdevice 2508 may restart the BWP-specific inactivity timer of the atleast one active BWP of the secondary cell (e.g., Active BWP-3 in FIG.25A), for example, based on completing random access successfully.

FIG. 26 shows an example of BWP operations for random access on a cell.A base station 2602 may send, to a wireless device 2604, a PDCCH order(e.g., at time T₀). The PDCCH order may include an RA preamble index, anUL-BWP index, an SUL indicator, an SSB index, a RACH occasion index, anda DL-BWP index. The wireless device 2604 may initiate the random accessprocess on the cell based on receiving, by the wireless device 2604, thePDCCH order (e.g., at time T₀). The wireless device 2604 may initiatethe random access process on the cell based on detecting, by thewireless device 2604, a beam failure (e.g., at time T₀). The wirelessdevice 2604 may stop a BWP timer (e.g., BWP inactivity timer) for theDL-BWP with DL-BWP index (e.g., at time T₁). The wireless device 2604may send (e.g., transmit), to the base station 2602, a preamble on anUL-BWP of a cell with UL-BWP index (e.g., at time T₂). The base station2602 may send, to the wireless device 2604, a random access response ona DL-BWP of a cell with DL-BWP index (e.g., at time T₃). The randomaccess response may be completed, for example, if the wireless device2604 receives the random access response. The wireless device 2604 mayrestart the BWP timer for the DL-BWP of the cell with DL-BWP indexrestarts, for example, based on or in response to receiving the randomaccess response. The wireless device 2604 may also receive, from thebase station 2602, one or more messages comprising configurationparameters (e.g., at time T₁). The one or more messages may comprise oneor more RRC messages (e.g., RRC connection reconfiguration message, RRCconnection reestablishment message, or RRC connection setup message).The configuration parameters may comprise configuration parameters for aprimary cell. The configuration parameters may comprise BWPconfiguration parameters for a plurality of BWPs. The plurality of BWPsmay comprise a first plurality of BWPs of the primary cell comprising afirst DL BWP (e.g., Active BWP-1), a second DL BWP (e.g., Active BWP-2),and a plurality of UL BWPs comprising a first UL BWP (e.g., ActiveBWP-3).

A wireless device 2604 may receive, in a first slot, first DCIindicating switching a first active BWP of the primary cell from a firstactive DL BWP to the first DL BWP. The first DCI may comprise a firstBWP indicator. The wireless device 2604 may determine that the first DCIindicates BWP switching, for example, based on the first BWP indicatorindicating a BWP different from the first active DL BWP. The wirelessdevice 2604 may start a first inactivity timer associated with the firstDL BWP, for example, based on switching the first active BWP from thefirst active DL BWP to the first DL BWP.

A wireless device 2604 may receive, in a first slot, first DCI or afirst MAC CE indicating activating the first DL BWP of the primary cell.The first DCI or the first MAC CE may comprise a first BWP indicator.The wireless device 2604 may determine that the first DCI or the firstMAC CE indicates BWP activating, for example, based on the first BWPindicator indicating the first DL BWP. The wireless device 2604 maystart a first inactivity timer associated with the first DL BWP, forexample, based on activating the first DL BWP.

A wireless device 2604 may receive, in a second slot, second DCIindicating switching a second active BWP of the primary cell from asecond active DL BWP to the second DL BWP. The second DCI may comprise asecond BWP indicator. The wireless device 2604 may determine that thesecond DCI indicates BWP switching, for example, based on the second BWPindicator indicating a BWP different from the second active DL BWP. Thewireless device 2604 may start a second inactivity timer associated withthe second DL BWP, for example, based on switching the second active BWPfrom the second active DL BWP to the second DL BWP.

A wireless device 2604 may receive, in a second slot, second DCI or asecond MAC CE indicating activating the second DL BWP of the primarycell. The second DCI or the second MAC CE may comprise a second BWPindicator. The wireless device 2604 may determine that the second DCI orthe second MAC CE indicates BWP activating, for example, based on thesecond BWP indicator indicating the second DL BWP. The wireless device2604 may start a second inactivity timer associated with the second DLBWP, for example, based on activating the second DL BWP.

The first DL BWP, the second DL BWP and the first UL BWP of theplurality of BWPs of the primary cell may be active at the same time.The first inactivity timer and the second inactivity timer may berunning at the same time.

The wireless device 2604 may initiate random access at a time T₁.Initiating random access (e.g., contention-based, or contention-free)may be based on receiving, by the wireless device, a PDCCH order (e.g.,at a time T0). Initiating random access may be based on detecting, bythe wireless device 2604, a beam failure at a time T0.

The wireless device 2604 may send (e.g., transmit) a random accesspreamble via the first UL BWP, for example, based on initiating randomaccess (e.g., at a time T₂). The random access preamble may be dedicatedto the wireless device 2604. The random access preamble may be wirelessdevice-specific and may be configured for the wireless device 2604 bythe base station 2602. The random access preamble may not be wirelessdevice-specific (e.g., for contention-based random access).

The PDCCH order may comprise at least one of random access preambleindex, supplementary uplink (SUL) indicator, SSB index, RACH occasionindex, UL-BWP index, and DL-BWP index. The random access preamble indexmay indicate a random access preamble to use in performing random access(e.g., contention-free or contention-based). The SUL indicator mayindicate whether to send (e.g., transmit) the random access preamble onan SUL carrier or a normal uplink carrier. The SSB index may indicate anindicated SSB index to identify a group of RACH occasions. The RACHoccasion index may indicate a relative RACH occasion index thatcorresponds to the indicated SSB index. The UL-BWP index may indicate aUL-BWP of the plurality of UL BWPs on which to send (e.g., transmit) therandom access preamble. The DL-BWP index may indicate a DL-BWP on whichthe wireless device 2604 may receive a random access response (e.g., msg2).

The DL-BWP index of the PDDCH order may indicate the first DL BWP. Thewireless device 2604 may receive the PDDCH order on the first DL BWP orthe second DL BWP. The wireless device 2604 may stop the firstinactivity timer of the first DL BWP (indicated by the DL-BWP index ofthe PDCCH order) at a time T1, for example, based on initiating randomaccess. The wireless device 2604 may keep the second inactivity timer ofthe second DL BWP running, for example, based on the DL-BWP indexindicating the first DL BWP.

The PDCCH order may not indicate a DL-BWP index to receive a randomaccess response. The wireless device 2604 may receive the PDCCH order onthe first DL BWP. The wireless device 2604 may stop the first inactivitytimer of the first DL BWP if the wireless device 2604 initiates randomaccess, for example, based on receiving the PDCCH order on the first DLBWP. The wireless device 2604 may keep the second inactivity timerrunning, for example, based on receiving the PDCCH order on the first DLBWP.

Each of the plurality of BWPs may be identified by a BWP-specific index.The first DL BWP, the second DL BWP and the first UL BWP may beidentified by a first DL BWP index, a second DL BWP index and a first ULBWP index, respectively.

The wireless device 2604 may select a DL BWP of the at least two BWPs,for example, based on initiating random access via the first UL BWP. Theselected DL BWP may be associated with a DL BWP index same as the firstUL BWP index of the first UL BWP. The wireless device 2604 may stop aBWP-specific inactivity timer associated with the selected DL BWP. Thewireless device 2604 may keep a BWP-specific inactivity timer associatedwith an DL BWP other than the selected DL BWP running, for example,based on the selecting.

The wireless device 2604 may stop an inactivity timer of a DL BWP (ifactive) identified by a DL BWP index, for example, based on initiatingrandom access. The DL BWP may be selected among the at least two BWPs(e.g., first DL BWP, second DL BWP) with a lowest BWP-specific index.The wireless device 2604 may stop the first inactivity timer of thefirst DL BWP if the first DL BWP index of the first DL BWP is lower thanthe second DL BWP index of the second DL BWP, for example, based oninitiating random access.

The wireless device 2604 may stop an inactivity timer of a DL BWP (ifactive) identified by a DL BWP index, for example, based on initiatingrandom access. The DL BWP may be selected among the at least two BWPs(e.g., first DL BWP, second DL BWP) with a highest BWP-specific index.The wireless device 2604 may stop the first inactivity timer of thefirst DL BWP if the first DL BWP index of the first DL BWP is higherthan the second DL BWP index of the second DL BWP, for example, based oninitiating random access.

The wireless device 2604 may stop a subset of the at least two BWPs(e.g., first DL BWP, second DL BWP) of the primary cell. The subset ofthe at least two BWPs may be configured with a common control channel.The first DL BWP may be configured with a first common control channeland a first wireless device-specific control channel. The second DL BWPmay be configured with a second wireless device-specific controlchannel. The wireless device 2604 may stop the first inactivity timer ofthe first DL BWP when the wireless device 2604 initiates the randomaccess procedure, for example, based on the first DL BWP beingconfigured with the first common control channel.

The first DL BWP may be configured with a first common control channeland a first wireless device-specific control channel. The second DL BWPmay be configured with a second common control channel and a secondwireless device-specific control channel. The wireless device 2604 maystop the first inactivity timer of the first DL BWP and the secondinactivity timer of the second DL BWP, if the wireless device 2604initiates random access, for example, based on the first DL BWP beingconfigured with the first common control channel and the second DL BWPbeing configured with the second common control channel

A base station 2602 may designate one of the at least two BWPs (e.g.,first DL BWP, second DL BWP) of the primary cell as a primary BWP (e.g.,PBWP). The wireless device 2604 may stop a BWP-specific timer (ifconfigured) of the designated primary BWP (e.g., PBWP), for example,based on initiating random access.

The first DL BWP may be the primary BWP. The wireless device 2604 maystop the first inactivity timer of the first DL BWP when the wirelessdevice 2604 initiates the random access procedure, for example, based onthe first DL BWP being configured/designated as the primary BWP.

One of the at least two BWPs (e.g., first DL BWP, second DL BWP) of theprimary cell may be a default BWP. The one of the at least two BWPs(e.g., default BWP) may always be in active state if at least two DLBWPs (e.g., first DL BWP, second DL BWP) of the primary cell are inactive state. The one of the at least two BWPs (e.g., default BWP) maynot be associated (or configured) with a BWP-specific inactivity timer.

The base station 2602 may send (e.g., transmit) a random access responseon the one of the at least two BWPs (e.g., default BWP) if at least twoDL BWPs (e.g., first DL BWP, second DL BWP) of the primary cell are inactive state. The wireless device may keep BWP-specific timers (ifconfigured) of the at least two BWPs (e.g., first DL BWP and second DLBWP) running.

The first DL BWP may be a default BWP. The wireless device 2604 may keepthe BWP-specific timer of the at least two BWPs (if configured) running,for example, based on the first DL BWP being the default BWP and atleast two DL BWPs being in active state.

The wireless device 2604 may start a first response window (e.g.,RA-ResponseWindow) at a first PDCCH occasion on the first DL BWP of theprimary cell from the end of sending (e.g., transmitting) the randomaccess preamble, if the wireless device 2604 stops the first BWP timer(e.g., BWP inactivity timer) of the first DL BWP, for example, based onsending (e.g., transmitting) the random access preamble. The firstresponse window may be configured by a higher layer (e.g., MAC, RRC).

The wireless device 2604 may monitor the first PDCCH occasion for DCI ifthe first response window is running. The DCI may be identified by anRA-RNTI. The DCI may be identified by a C-RNTI of the wireless device2604.

Random access may be completed successfully (e.g., at a time T3), if thewireless device 2604 receives the DCI on the first DL BWP. The wirelessdevice 2604 may restart the first inactivity timer of the first DL BWP(e.g., at a time T₃), for example, based on random access beingsuccessfully completed.

A PDCCH order may comprise a DL BWP index. A wireless device 2604 maymonitor a DL BWP indicated by the DL BWP index of the PDCCH order for arandom access response of random access.

The wireless device 2604 may stop a BWP-specific inactivity timer of theDL BWP indicated by the DL BWP index, for example, based on initiatingrandom access. A base station 2602 may configure the BWP-specificinactivity timer of the DL BWP.

The base station 2602 may send (e.g., transmit) the random accessresponse on the DL BWP indicated by the DL BWP index. The wirelessdevice 2604 may monitor the DL BWP indicated by the DL-BWP index for therandom access response. The wireless device 2604 may complete randomaccess successfully, for example, based on receiving the random accessresponse on the DL BWP indicated by the DL-BWP index.

The wireless device 2604 may restart the BWP-specific inactivity timerof the DL BWP indicated by the DL-BWP index, for example, based onsuccessfully completing a random access procedure. The wireless device2604 may stop a BWP-specific inactivity timer of each of the at leasttwo BWPs (e.g., the first DL BWP and the second DL BWP), for example,based on initiating random access. The wireless device 2604 may stop thefirst inactivity timer of the first DL BWP and the second inactivitytimer of the second DL BWP of the primary cell (e.g., at a time T1), forexample, based on initiating random access.

The wireless device 2604 may start a first response window (e.g.,RA-ResponseWindow) at a first PDCCH occasion on the first DL BWP of theprimary cell from the end of sending (e.g., transmitting) the randomaccess preamble. The wireless device 2604 may start a second responsewindow (e.g., RA-ResponseWindow) at a second PDCCH occasion on thesecond DL BWP of the primary cell from the end of sending (e.g.,transmitting) the random access preamble. The first response window andthe second response window may be configured by a higher layer (e.g.,MAC, RRC).

The wireless device 2604 may monitor a first PDCCH on the first DL BWPfor DCI if the first response window is running. The wireless device2604 may monitor a second PDCCH on the second DL BWP for the DCI if thesecond response window is running. The DCI may be identified by anRA-RNTI. The DCI may be addressed to the wireless device identified by aC-RNTI.

The base station 2602 may select a DL BWP to send (e.g., transmit) theDCI. The DCI may be for a random access response (e.g., msg2). Selectingthe DL BWP may be based on base station implementation. The base station2602 may select the first DL BWP to send (e.g., transmit) the DCI. Thebase station 2602 may select the second DL BWP to send (e.g., transmit)the DCI. The base station 2602 may send (e.g., transmit) the DCI on boththe first DL BWP and the second DL BWP.

Random access may be completed successfully (e.g., at a time T3), if thewireless device 2604 receives the DCI (e.g., on the first DL BWP or thesecond DL BWP). The wireless device 2604 may restart the firstinactivity timer of the first DL BWP and the second inactivity timer ofthe second DL BWP (e.g., at a time T3), for example, based on randomaccess being successfully completed.

The wireless device 2604 may stop each BWP-specific inactivity timer ofeach active DL BWP of a cell, for example, based on initiating randomaccess. Random access (e.g., contention-free or contention-based) may bebased on a PDCCH order. The PDDCH order may be received on one of theactive DL BWPs of the cell. Random access may be based on a beam failuredetection.

The base station 2602 may send (e.g., transmit) a random access responseon at least one of the active DL BWPs of the cell. The wireless device2604 may monitor each active DL BWP of the cell for the random accessresponse. The wireless device 2604 may complete random accesssuccessfully, for example, based on receiving the random access responseon the at least one of the active DL BWPs of the primary cell. Thewireless device 2604 may restart each BWP-specific inactivity timer ofeach active DL BWP of the cell, for example, based on completing randomaccess successfully.

FIG. 27 shows an example of BWP operations for random access on a cell.A wireless device 2704 may initiate a random access procedure (e.g., attime T₀), for example, including performing UL-BWP selection. The UL-BWPselection may be through communications between a base station 2702 andthe wireless device 2704. The UL-BWP selection may be based on, forexample, an UL-BWP index, pathloss, a RACH occasion index, and a linkagebetween active UL-BWPs and DL-BWPs. The wireless device 2704 mayreceive, from a base station 2702, one or more messages comprisingconfiguration parameters. The one or more messages may comprise one ormore RRC messages (e.g., RRC connection reconfiguration message, RRCconnection reestablishment message, or RRC connection setup message).The configuration parameters may comprise configuration parameters for acell. The configuration parameters may comprise BWP configurationparameters for a plurality of BWPs. The plurality of BWPs may comprise afirst plurality of BWPs of the cell comprising a first UL BWP (e.g.,Active BWP-1), a second UL BWP (e.g., Active BWP-2), and a first DL BWP(e.g., Active BWP-3). The wireless device 2704 may send (e.g., transmit)a preamble transmission to the base station 2702 on an active UL-BWP(e.g., at time T₁). The base station 2702 may send (e.g., transmit) anRAR to the wireless device 2704 (e.g., at time T₂), for example, onDL-BWP. The wireless device 2704 may receive the RAR on DL-BWP (e.g., attime T₃).

A wireless device 2704 may receive, in a first slot, first DCIindicating switching a first active BWP of the cell from a first activeUL BWP to the first UL BWP. The wireless device 2704 may set the firstUL BWP as a second active uplink BWP of the cell, for example, based onthe switching. The first DCI may comprise a first BWP indicator. Thewireless device 2704 may determine that the first DCI indicates BWPswitching, for example, based on the first BWP indicator indicating aBWP different from the first active UL BWP.

A wireless device 2704 may receive, in a first slot, first DCI or afirst MAC CE indicating activating the first UL BWP of the cell. Thefirst DCI or the first MAC CE may comprise a first BWP indicator. Thewireless device 2704 may determine that the first DCI or the first MACCE indicates BWP activating, for example, based on the first BWPindicator indicating the first UL BWP.

A wireless device 2704 may receive, in a second slot, second DCIindicating switching a second active BWP of the cell from a secondactive UL BWP to the second UL BWP. The second DCI may comprise a secondBWP indicator. The wireless device 2704 may determine that the secondDCI indicates BWP switching, for example, based on the second BWPindicator indicating a BWP different from the second active UL BWP.

A wireless device 2704 may receive, in a second slot, second DCI or asecond MAC CE indicating activating the second UL BWP of the cell. Thesecond DCI or the second MAC CE may comprise a second BWP indicator. Thewireless device 2704 may determine that the second DCI or the second MACCE indicates BWP activating, for example, based on the second BWPindicator indicating the second UL BWP.

A wireless device 2704 may receive, in a third slot, third DCIindicating switching a third active BWP of the cell from a first activeDL BWP to the first DL BWP. The third DCI may comprise a third BWPindicator. The wireless device 2704 may determine that the third DCIindicates BWP switching, for example, based on the third BWP indicatorindicating a BWP different from the first active DL BWP. The wirelessdevice 2704 may start a first inactivity timer associated with the firstDL BWP, for example, based on switching the third active BWP from thefirst active DL BWP to the first DL BWP. The first UL BWP, the second ULBWP and the first DL BWP of the plurality of BWPs of the cell may beactive at the same time.

Further regarding FIG. 27 that shows an example of multiple active BWPsoperation, a wireless device 2704 may initiate random access (e.g.,contention-free random access or contention-based random access) at atime T0. The wireless device 2704 may select a UL BWP of the at leasttwo active UL BWPs (e.g., the first UL BWP, the second UL BWP) based onone or more criteria and, for example, based on initiating randomaccess. The selecting may comprise selecting the UL BWP of the at leasttwo active UL BWPs that is a primary BWP. A base station 2702 maydesignate the selected UL BWP of the at least two active UL BWPs (e.g.,first UL BWP, second UL BWP) as a primary UL BWP (e.g., PBWP). Thewireless device 2704 may send (e.g., transmit) a random access preamblevia the primary UL BWP (e.g., selected UL BWP), for example, based oninitiating random access.

The first UL BWP may be the primary UL BWP. The wireless device 2704 maysend (e.g., transmit) a random access preamble via the first UL BWP ifthe wireless device 2704 initiates random access, for example, based onthe first UL BWP being configured/designated as the primary UL BWP.

Each of the plurality of BWPs may be identified by a BWP-specific index.The first UL BWP, the second UL BWP, and the first DL BWP may beidentified by a first UL BWP index, a second UL BWP index, and a firstDL BWP index.

The one or more criteria upon which the selecting of the UL BWP is basedmay be based on a value of a BWP-specific index. The selecting of the ULBWP may comprise selecting a UL BWP with a lowest BWP-specific indexamong at least two BWP-specific indexes of the at least two active ULBWPs. The wireless device 2704 may send (e.g., transmit) a random accesspreamble via the selected UL BWP if the wireless device initiates randomaccess, for example, based on the selected UL BWP being associated withthe lowest BWP-specific index.

The first UL BWP index of the first UL BWP may be lower than the secondUL BWP index of the second UL BWP. The wireless device 2704 may send(e.g., transmit) a random access preamble via the first UL BWP if thewireless device 2704 initiates random access, for example, based on thefirst UL BWP being associated with a lowest UL BWP-specific index.

The one or more criteria upon which the selecting of the UL BWP is basedmay be based on a value of a BWP-specific index. The selecting of the ULBWP may comprise selecting a UL BWP with a highest BWP-specific indexamong at least two BWP-specific indexes of the at least two active ULBWPs. The wireless device 2704 may send (e.g., transmit) a random accesspreamble via the selected UL BWP if the wireless device 2704 initiatesrandom access, for example, based on the selected UL BWP beingassociated with the highest BWP-specific index.

The first UL BWP index of the first UL BWP may be higher than the secondUL BWP index of the second UL BWP. The wireless device 2704 may send(e.g., transmit) a random access preamble via the first UL BWP if thewireless device 2704 initiates random access, for example, based on thefirst UL BWP being associated with a highest UL BWP-specific index.

The selecting of the UL BWP may comprise selecting a UL BWP with alowest pathloss among the at least two active UL BWPs. The probabilityof completing random access via the selected UL BWP with the lowestpathloss may be high. The wireless device 2704 may send (e.g., transmit)a random access preamble via the selected UL BWP if the wireless device2704 initiates random access, for example, based on the selected UL BWPhaving the lowest pathloss. The wireless device 2704 may select one ULBWP (e.g., first UL BWP or second UL BWP) of the two multiple active ULBWPs to send (e.g., transmit) a random access preamble if there are twomultiple active UL BWPs comprising a first UL BWP and a second UL BWP.

The selecting of the UL BWP may be based on a threshold. The thresholdmay be configured by RRC. The wireless device 2704 may select the firstUL BWP if a pathloss of an active DL BWP is lower than the threshold.The wireless device 2704 may select the second UL BWP to send (e.g.,transmit) the random access preamble if a pathloss of an active DL BWPis higher than the threshold.

A first DL BWP may be associated (e.g., linked) to a first UL BWP. Asecond DL BWP may be associated (e.g., linked) to a second UL BWP. Afirst DL pathloss associated with the first UL BWP may be lower than asecond DL pathloss associated with the second UL BWP. The wirelessdevice 2704 may send (e.g., transmit) a random access preamble via thefirst UL BWP if the wireless device 2704 initiates random access, forexample, based on the first UL BWP having a lowest DL pathloss.

A first DL pathloss associated with the first DL BWP may be lower than asecond DL pathloss associated with the second DL BWP. The base station2702 may send (e.g., transmit) a random access response on the first DLBWP, for example, based on the first DL BWP having a lowest DL pathloss.The wireless device 2704 may monitor the first DL BWP for the randomaccess response.

The selecting of the UL BWP may comprise selecting a UL BWP of the atleast two active UL BWPs with an earliest random access occasion afterinitiating random access. The wireless device 2704 may complete randomaccess earlier, for example, based on selecting the selected UL BWP withthe earliest random access occasion. The wireless device 2704 may send(e.g., transmit) a random access preamble via the selected UL BWP if thewireless device 2704 initiates random access, for example, based on theselected UL BWP having the earliest random access occasion.

A first PRACH time resources of the first UL BWP may be earlier in timethan a second PRACH time resources of the second UL BWP if the wirelessdevice 2704 initiated random access. The wireless device 2704 may send(e.g., transmit) a random access preamble via the first UL BWP if thewireless device 2704 initiates random access, for example, based on thefirst PRACH time resources being earlier in time than the second PRACHtime resources.

The wireless device 2704 may stop the first inactivity timer of thefirst DL BWP, for example, based on initiating random access via theselected UL BWP. The wireless device 2704 may start a first responsewindow (e.g., RA-ResponseWindow) at a first PDCCH occasion on the firstDL BWP of the cell from the end of sending (e.g., transmitting) therandom access preamble. The first response window may be configured by ahigher layer (e.g., MAC, RRC).

The wireless device 2704 may monitor the PDCCH on the first UL BWP forDCI if the first response window is running. The DCI may be addressed toan RA-RNTI of the wireless device. The DCI may be addressed to a C-RNTIof the wireless device.

The random access may be completed successfully if the wireless device2704 receives the DCI on the first DL BWP and the random access iscontention-free. The wireless device 2704 may restart the firstinactivity timer of the first DL BWP, for example, based on the randomaccess being successfully completed. The wireless device may send (e.g.,transmit) a signal (e.g., msg3) if the wireless device receives the DCIon the first DL BWP and random access is contention-based.

The wireless device 2704 may monitor for a response (e.g., msg4)comprising second DCI, for example, based on sending (e.g.,transmitting) the signal. The random access may be completedsuccessfully if the wireless device 2704 receives the second DCI on thefirst DL BWP. The wireless device 2704 may restart the first inactivitytimer of the first DL BWP, for example, based on random access beingsuccessfully completed. The second DCI may be addressed to a C-RNTI ofthe wireless device.

A wireless device 2704 may receive, from a base station 2702, one ormore messages. The one or more messages may comprise one or moreconfiguration parameters of a primary cell. The primary cell maycomprise a plurality of bandwidth parts (BWPs). Each of the plurality ofBWPs may be identified by a BWP-specific index.

Each of the plurality of BWPs may be in one of an active state and aninactive state. The active state of a first UL BWP may comprise sending(e.g., transmitting) a first uplink signal (e.g., PUCCH, PUSCH, etc) viathe first UL BWP. The inactive state of a first UL BWP may comprise notsending (e.g., transmitting) a first uplink signal (e.g., PUCCH, PUSCH,etc) via the first UL BWP.

The wireless device 2704 may activate at least two BWPs of the pluralityof BWPs. Activating the at least two BWPs may comprise activating afirst BWP of the at least two BWPs in a first slot and activating asecond BWP of the at least two BWPs in a second slot. The first slot andthe second slot may be different.

The wireless device 2704 may initiate random-access. The wireless devicemay select at least one UL BWP of the at least two BWPs, for example,based on initiating a random access procedure and based on one or morecriteria.

The one or more criteria may be based on a value of a BWP-specificindex. Determining at least one UL BWP of the at least two BWPs maycomprise selecting a BWP with a lowest BWP-specific index among at leasttwo BWP-specific indexes of the at least two BWPs. Determining at leastone UL BWP of the at least two BWPs may comprise selecting a BWP with ahighest BWP-specific index among at least two BWP-specific indexes ofthe at least two BWPs. Determining at least one UL BWP of the at leasttwo BWPs may comprise selecting a BWP based on a pathloss and athreshold. Determining at least one UL BWP of the at least two BWPs maycomprise selecting a BWP of the at least two BWPs that is a primary BWP.Determining at least one UL BWP of the at least two BWPs may compriseselecting a BWP with a lowest numerology index among the at least twoBWPs. Determining at least one UL BWP of the at least two BWPs maycomprise selecting a BWP with a highest numerology index among the atleast two BWPs. Determining at least one UL BWP of the at least two BWPsmay comprise selecting one or more BWPs of the at least two BWPs. Theone or more BWPs may be configured with a common search space. Thewireless device may monitor the common search space to receive arandom-access response. The wireless device 2704 may send (e.g.,transmit) a preamble via the at least one selected UL BWP, for example,based on selecting the at least one UL BWP.

A wireless device 2704 may receive, from a base station 2702, one ormore messages. The one or more messages may comprise one or moreconfiguration parameters of a primary cell and a secondary cell. Theprimary cell may comprise a plurality of bandwidth parts (BWPs). Each ofthe plurality of BWPs may be identified by a BWP-specific index. Each ofthe plurality of BWPs may be associated with a BWP-specific inactivitytimer.

Each of the plurality of BWPs may be in one of an active state and aninactive state. The active state of a first BWP may comprise monitoringa downlink control channel of the first BWP. The inactive state of afirst BWP may comprise not monitoring a downlink control channel of thefirst BWP.

The wireless device 2704 may activate at least two BWPs of the pluralityof BWPs. Activating the at least two BWPs may comprise activating afirst BWP of the at least two BWPs in a first slot and activating asecond BWP of the at least two BPWs in a second slot. The first slot andthe second slot may be different.

The wireless device 2704 may start BWP-specific inactivity timer of eachof the at least two BWPs, for example, based on activating at least twoBWPs. Starting the BWP-specific inactivity timer of each of the at leasttwo BWPs may comprise starting a first BWP-specific inactivity timer ofa first BWP of the at least two BWPs, for example, based on activatingthe first BWP, and starting a second BWP-specific inactivity timer of asecond BWP of the at least two BWPs, for example, based on activatingthe second BWP.

The wireless device 2704 may initiate random access for the secondarycell. Initiating random access may comprise receiving a PDCCH order forthe secondary cell. Initiating random access procedure may comprisedetecting a beam failure on the secondary cell. The wireless device 2704may select at least one BWP of the at least two BWPs, for example, basedon initiating a random access procedure and/or one or more criteria.

The one or more criteria may be based on a value of a BWP-specificindex. Determining at least one BWP of the at least two BWPs maycomprise selecting a BWP with a lowest BWP-specific index among at leasttwo BWP-specific indexes of the at least two BWPs. Determining at leastone BWP of the at least two BWPs may comprise selecting a BWP with ahighest BWP-specific index among at least two BWP-specific indexes ofthe at least two BWPs. Determining at least one BWP of the at least twoBWPs may comprise selecting a BWP of the at least two BWPs that is aprimary BWP. Determining at least one BWP of the at least two BWPs maycomprise selecting a BWP with a lowest numerology index among the atleast two BWPs. Determining at least one BWP of the at least two BWPsmay comprise selecting a BWP with a highest numerology index among theat least two BWPs. Determining at least one BWP of the at least two BWPsmay comprise selecting one or more BWPs of the at least two BWPs. Theone or more BWPs may be configured with a common search space. Thewireless device 2704 may monitor the common search space to receive arandom access response. The wireless device 2704 may stop theBWP-specific inactivity timer of the at least one selected BWP, forexample, based on selecting at least one BWP of the at least two BWPs.

FIG. 28 shows an example method of BWPs operation. The method of FIG. 28facilitates a base station and a wireless device to communicate overmultiple BWPs efficiently. Initially, at step 2810, a wireless devicereceives configuration parameters (e.g., BWP parameters) for a primarycell and a secondary cell. One or more base stations may send (e.g.,transmit) the configuration parameters to the wireless device. At step2820, the wireless device may initiate random access for the secondarycell, based at least on the configuration parameters. At step 2830, thewireless device may send (e.g., transmit) a random access preamble forrandom access via the second cell, based on initiating random access. Atstep 2840, the wireless device may determine whether at least twodownlink BWPs are active on the primary cell. The determination may bebased at least on the received configuration parameters. At step 2850,the wireless device may monitor the active downlink BWP on the primarycell for a random access response, if the wireless device determinesthat there are less than two downlink BWP active on the primary cell inoperation 2840. In operation 2860, the wireless device may select adownlink BWP among the at least two downlink BWPs that are active on theprimary cell, if the wireless device determines that there are at leasttwo downlink BWP active on the primary cell in operation 2840. Thewireless device may select the downlink BWP based on at least onecharacteristic of the downlink BWPs including the BWP index, the BWPnumerology, the status of the BWP as a primary BWP, the status of theBWP as a default BWP, or the status of the BWP as an initial BWP. Thewireless device may select the downlink BWP based at least on thedownlink BWP having the lowest BWP index among the at least two downlinkBWPs. The wireless device may select the downlink BWP based at least onthe downlink BWP having the lowest BWP numerology among the at least twodownlink BWPs. The wireless device may select the downlink BWP based atleast on the downlink BWP being configured as a primary BWP, defaultBWP, or initial BWP. In operation 2870, the wireless device may monitorthe selected downlink BWP on the primary cell for a random accessresponse, after determining the downlink BWP.

FIG. 29 shows an example method of multiple active BWPs operation. Themethod of FIG. 29 facilitates a base station and a wireless device tocommunicate over multiple BWPs efficiently. Initially, at step 2910, awireless device receives configuration parameters (e.g., BWP parameters)for a cell. One or more base stations may send (e.g., transmit) theconfiguration parameters to the wireless device. At step 2920, thewireless device may initiate random access for the cell, based at leaston the configuration parameters. At step 2930, the wireless device maydetermine whether at least two uplink BWPs are active on the cell. Thedetermination may be based at least on the received configurationparameters. At step 2940, the wireless device may send (e.g., transmit)a random access preamble for random access via the active uplink BWP ofthe cell, if the wireless device determines that there are less than twouplink BWPs active on the cell in operation 2930. At step 2950, thewireless device may select an uplink BWP among the at least two uplinkBWPs that are active on the cell, if the wireless device determines thatthere are at least two uplink BWPs active on the cell in operation 2930.The wireless device may select the uplink BWP based on at least onecharacteristic of the at least two uplink BWPs including the BWP index,the timing of the RACH occasions, or the path loss of the BWP. Thewireless device may select the uplink BWP based at least on the uplinkBWP having the lowest BWP index among the at least two uplink BWPs. Thewireless device may select the uplink BWP based at least on the uplinkBWP having the earliest RACH occasion among the at least two uplinkBWPs. The wireless device may select the uplink BWP based at least onthe uplink BWP having the lowest path loss among the uplink BWPs. Atstep 2960, the wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) a random accesspreamble for random access via the uplink BWP of the cell, afterdetermining the uplink BWP.

A base station may send, to a wireless device that may receive, one ormore configuration parameters for a plurality of downlink bandwidthparts (BWPs). The wireless device may activate at least two downlinkBWPs of the plurality of downlink BWPs. The wireless device may send arandom access preamble for a random access procedure. The wirelessdevice may determine a downlink BWP, of the at least two downlink BWPs,for monitoring for a random access response to the random accesspreamble. The wireless device may monitor the downlink BWP for therandom access response. The wireless device may receive, via thedetermined downlink BWP, the random access response. The wireless devicemay receive one or more configuration parameters for a plurality ofuplink BWPs. The wireless device may activate at least two uplink BWPsof the plurality of uplink BWPs. The wireless device may Select anuplink BWP, of the at least two uplink BWPs, for the random accessprocedure. The wireless device may send the random access preamble viathe uplink BWP. The wireless device may refrain from monitoring (e.g.,may not monitor) a downlink BWP, of the at least two downlink BWPs, forthe random-access response. The downlink BWP may be different from thedetermined downlink BWP for the monitoring. Each of the at least twodownlink BWPs may be associated with a BWP specific inactivity timer.The wireless device may start, based on the activating the at least twodownlink BWPs, a BWP-specific inactivity timer for each of the at leasttwo downlink BWPs. The wireless device may stop, based on thedetermining the downlink BWP for the monitoring, the BWP-specificinactivity timer of the downlink BWP. The wireless device may refrainfrom stopping (e.g., may not stop) the BWP specific inactivity timer ofthe downlink BWP based on the determining the downlink BWP for themonitoring. Each of the plurality of downlink BWPs may be in one of anactive state and an inactive state. The active state of a first downlinkBWP may comprise monitoring a downlink control channel of the firstdownlink BWP. The inactive state of a first downlink BWP may compriserefraining from monitoring (e.g., not monitoring) a downlink controlchannel of the first downlink BWP. The wireless device may activate afirst downlink BWP of the at least two downlink BWPs in a first slot.The wireless device may activate a second downlink BWP of the at leasttwo downlink BWPs in a second slot. The wireless device may start theBWP specific inactivity timer of each of the at least two downlink BWPs.The wireless device may start a first BWP specific inactivity timer ofthe first downlink BWP, for example, based on or in response toactivating the first downlink BWP. The wireless device may start asecond BWP specific inactivity timer of the second downlink BWP, forexample, based on or in response to activating the second downlink BWP.Each of the plurality of downlink BWPs may be associated with a BWPspecific index. Determining the downlink BWP for the monitoring maycomprise determining (e.g., selecting) a downlink BWP associated with atleast one of: a lowest or highest downlink BWP-specific index relativeto each downlink BWP-specific index associated with the at least twodownlink BWPs; and/or a lowest or highest BWP-specific numerologyrelative to each BWP-specific numerology associated with the at leasttwo downlink BWPs. The wireless device may select, for the monitoring, adownlink BWP of the at least two downlink BWPs that is a primary BWP ofa primary cell. The wireless device may determine a downlink BWP (e.g.,a selected downlink BWP), among the at least two downlink BWPs,configured with a common search space set. The wireless device mayreceive a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) order, forinitiating the random access procedure, that indicates information onwhich to base the determining the downlink BWP for the monitoring. Thedetermining may comprise determining a downlink BWP (e.g., a selecteddownlink BWP) indicated by the PDCCH order. The PDCCH order may comprisea downlink BWP-specific index of the selected downlink BWP. Thedetermining may comprise determining a downlink BWP (e.g., a selecteddownlink BWP) based on receiving the PDCCH order on the selecteddownlink BWP. The random access procedure may be for a secondary cell.

A base station may send, to a wireless device that may receive, one ormore messages. The one or more messages may comprise one or moreconfiguration parameters of a primary cell and a secondary cell. Theprimary cell may comprise a plurality of downlink bandwidth parts(BWPs). The wireless device may activate at least two downlink BWPs ofthe plurality of downlink BWPs. The wireless device may initiate arandom access procedure for the secondary cell. The wireless device maydetermine, based on one or more criteria, a selected downlink BWP of theat least two downlink BWPs for the random access procedure. The wirelessdevice may monitor the selected downlink BWP for a random-accessresponse of the random access procedure. The wireless device maycomplete the random-access procedure based on receiving the randomaccess response on the selected downlink BWP.

A base station may send, to a wireless device that may receive, one ormore configuration parameters for a plurality of uplink bandwidth parts(BWPs). The wireless device may activate at least two uplink BWPs of theplurality of uplink BWPs. The wireless device may initiate a randomaccess procedure. The wireless device may determine an uplink BWP, ofthe at least two uplink BWPs, for the random access procedure. Thewireless device may send, via the determined uplink BWP, a random accesspreamble. The wireless device may determine, based on the determineduplink BWP, a downlink BWP for monitoring for a random access response.The wireless device may receive, via the determined downlink BWP, therandom access response. The wireless device may refrain fromtransmitting (e.g., may not transmit), via a second uplink BWP of the atleast two uplink BWPs, a random-access preamble. The second uplink BWPmay be different from the uplink BWP. The wireless device maydetermining an uplink BWP with an earliest random access occasionrelative random access occasions associated with the at least two uplinkBWPs, for example, for the determining. The wireless device maydetermine an uplink BWP with a lowest path loss relative to path lossesassociated with the at least two uplink BWP, for example, for thedetermining. The wireless device may select an uplink BWP associatedwith at least one of: a lowest or highest downlink BWP-specific indexrelative to each downlink BWP-specific index associated with the atleast two uplink BWPs; and/or a lowest or highest BWP-specificnumerology relative to each BWP-specific numerology associated with theat least two uplink BWPs. The wireless device may select an uplink BWPof the at least two uplink BWPs that is a primary BWP of a primary cell.The wireless device may initiate the random access procedure based onreceiving a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) order. The PDCCHorder may indicate information for the determining the uplink BWP forthe random access procedure. The random access procedure may be for asecondary cell.

A base station may send, to a wireless device that may receive, one ormore configuration parameters for a plurality of bandwidth parts (BWPs).The wireless device may activate at least two BWPs of the plurality ofBWPs. The wireless device may select, based on one or more criteria andfrom the at least two BWPs, a first activated BWP for a random accessprocedure and a second activated BWP for the random access procedure.The wireless device may send, via the first activated BWP, a randomaccess preamble for the random access procedure. The wireless device maymonitor the second activated BWP for a random access response. Thewireless device may receive, via the second activated BWP, the randomaccess response. The first activated BWP may comprise an uplink BWP andthe second activated BWP may comprise a downlink BWP. The wirelessdevice may select a downlink BWP associated with at least one of: alowest or highest downlink BWP-specific index relative to each downlinkBWP-specific index associated with the at least two BWPs; and/or alowest or highest BWP-specific numerology relative to each BWP-specificnumerology associated with the at least two BWPs. The wireless devicemay select a downlink BWP of the at least two BWPs that is a primarydownlink BWP of a primary cell. The wireless device may select an uplinkBWP of the at least two BWPs that is a primary uplink BWP of a primarycell. The wireless device may receive a physical downlink controlchannel (PDCCH) order, for initiating the random access procedure, thatindicates information on which to base the determining the firstactivated BWP and the second activated BWP. The random access proceduremay be for a secondary cell.

Some wireless devices (e.g., legacy wireless devices, wireless devicescompliant with 3GPP Release 15, and/or any other wireless device) may beconfigured for multiple resources (e.g., multiple BWPs). For example,some wireless devices (such as wireless devices that may be compliantwith 3GPP Release 15) may be configured for up to four bandwidth parts(BWPs). Other wireless devices may be configured for any other quantityof resources (e.g., 8 BWPs, 16 BWPs, etc.). Some wireless device mayactivate one BWP of a plurality of configured BWPs (e.g., 4 BWPs, 8BWPs, 16 BWPs, etc.) at a time. One BWP (e.g., which may comprise anuplink BWP and/or a downlink BWP) may be active in a cell (e.g., aprimary cell, a secondary cell, etc.). A wireless device may switch to asecond downlink BWP with a second downlink BWP index that may be thesame as or similar to an uplink BWP index, for example, based on awireless device initiating a random access procedure for a primary cell(e.g., PCell) and/or based on an uplink BWP index of the active uplinkBWP being different from a first downlink BWP index of the activedownlink BWP. The wireless may perform the random access procedure viathe active uplink BWP and/or via the second downlink BWP. A wirelessdevice may activate at least two downlink BWPs via a PCell, for example,based on multiple active downlink BWPs being supported for a cell. Thewireless device may switch to a second downlink BWP associated with asecond downlink BWP index that may be the same as or similar to theuplink BWP index, for example, based on the wireless device initiating arandom access procedure, and/or the downlink BWP indexes of the at leasttwo downlink BWPs being different from an uplink BWP index of the activeuplink BWP. A misalignment may result between the base station and thewireless device, for example, based on the base station not knowingwhich active downlink BWP(s) has been or is being switched by thewireless device.

A wireless device may use a predefined rule to select a BWP (e.g., adownlink BWP and/or an uplink BWP), for example, which may resolveissues that arise (e.g., mismatched indexes, etc.) from random accessprocedures using multiple BWPs (e.g., multiple downlink BWPs and/ormultiple uplink BWPs). The wireless device may determine (e.g., select)to switch a BWP, among the at least two BWPs, with the lowest and/orhighest BWP index. The wireless device may select a BWP, for example,among the at least two BWPs, designated as a primary and/or secondaryBWP (e.g., default BWP, initial downlink BWP, etc.) to switch. Thewireless device may select a BWP to switch, for example, among the atleast two BWPs, configured with one or more common control channels. Thewireless device may activate a deactivated BWP with a downlink BWP indexthe same as or similar to the uplink BWP index. A wireless device mayuse a predefined rule to select a BWP from a group of BWPs, based on arandom access procedure. The selection of the BWP may be based on, forexample: a lowest BWP index, a highest BWP index, designation as aprimary BWP, designation as a secondary BWP, one or more common controlchannels, and/or a downlink BWP index the same or similar to the uplinkBWP index. This selection and/or switching of the BWP may improve radioefficiency, reduce uplink signaling overhead, and/or efficient BWPswitching management for multiple active BWP operations in a cell.

Switching BWPs based on a matching index for a random access proceduremay enhance existing random access procedures to improve downlink radioefficiency and reduce uplink signaling overhead, for example, based on awireless device supporting multiple active BWPs in a cell. The switchingmay provide a more efficient BWP operation mechanism for supportingmultiple active BWPs operation in a cell. The switching may provide moreefficient BWP switching management for supporting multiple active BWPsoperation in a cell.

At least two wireless devices may operate via a first uplink BWP of acell. The at least two wireless devices may operate via differentdownlink BWPs of the cell. The base station may not be able tosuccessfully and timely identify an identity of a wireless device of theat least two wireless devices sending the random access preamble, forexample, based on a base station receiving a random access preamble of arandom access procedure (e.g., contention-based random access) via thefirst uplink BWP. The base station may not be able to successfully andtimely determine via which downlink BWP to send a random accessresponse, for example, based on not being able to successfully andtimely identify the identity of the wireless device. The base stationmay send a random access response via the different downlink BWPs, whichmay result in waste of resources and/or signaling overhead.

The wireless device of the at least two wireless devices initiating therandom access procedure may switch to a downlink BWP to receive therandom access response. The base station may send the random accessresponse via the switched downlink BWP. The switching of the downlinkBWP may enable the base station to send the random access response ofthe random access procedure via a single downlink BWP. This switching ofthe downlink BWP may reduce a number of random access responses sent bythe base station. The switching of the downlink BWP may be based on alinkage between a first uplink BWP-specific index of the first uplinkBWP and a downlink BWP-specific index of the downlink BWP. The basestation and the wireless device may be aware of the linkage. The linkagemay be configured by higher layers (e.g., RRC).

FIG. 30A and FIG. 30B show examples of a system for random accessprocedure with BWP switching. The wireless device 3026 may switch to adownlink BWP based on a linkage between the downlink BWP and an activeuplink BWP, for example, based on starting a random access procedure.The wireless device 3026 and the base station 3024 may be configured touse a first uplink BWP 3002, a second uplink BWP 3006, a third uplinkBWP 3010, a first downlink BWP 3004, a second downlink BWP 3008, and/ora third downlink BWP 3012. The wireless device 3026 may receive an RRCmessage from the base station 3014, for example, at time T₀ (3014),configuring the BWPs. The base station 3024 may cause the first downlinkBWP 3004 and the second uplink BWP 3006 to become active between thebase station 3024 and the wireless device 3026, for example, at time T₁(3016). The wireless device 3026 may initiate a random access procedure,for example, at time T₂ (3018), and begin switching from the firstdownlink BWP 3004 to the second downlink BWP 3008, for example, based ona linkage between the second uplink BWP 3006 and the second downlink BWP3008 (e.g., numerology, shared control channel, etc.). The wirelessdevice 3026 may send a preamble transmission to the base station 3024via the second uplink BWP 3006, for example, at time T₃ (3020). The basestation 3024 may send a random access response (RAR) via the seconddownlink BWP 3008, for example, at time T₄.

A wireless device may operate via a first uplink BWP of a cell and afirst downlink BWP of the cell. The wireless device may initiate arandom access procedure (e.g., contention based, contention-free, etc.)via the first uplink BWP. The wireless device may switch from the firstdownlink BWP to an initial downlink BWP and/or switch from the firstuplink BWP to an initial uplink BWP, for example, based on one or morePRACH occasions not being configured, by a base station, for the firstuplink BWP. The wireless device may perform the random access procedurevia the initial uplink BWP and the initial downlink BWP.

A wireless device may operate via a first uplink BWP of a cell and afirst downlink BWP of the cell. The first uplink BWP may be indicated(e.g., identified) by a first uplink BWP-specific index. The firstdownlink BWP may be indicated (e.g., identified) by a first downlinkBWP-specific index. The wireless device may initiate a random accessprocedure (e.g., contention based, contention-free, etc.) via the firstuplink BWP. The wireless device may perform the random access procedurevia the first uplink BWP and the first downlink BWP, for example, basedon one or more PRACH occasions being configured, by a base station, forthe first uplink BWP, and/or based on the first uplink BWP-specificindex being the same as the first downlink BWP-specific index.

A wireless device may operate via a first uplink BWP of a cell and afirst downlink BWP of the cell. The first uplink BWP may be indicated(e.g., identified) by a first uplink BWP-specific index. The firstdownlink BWP may be indicated (e.g., identified) by a first downlinkBWP-specific index. The wireless device may initiate a random accessprocedure (e.g., contention based, contention-free, etc.) via the firstuplink BWP. The wireless device may switch from the first downlink BWPto a third downlink BWP of the cell associated with a third downlinkBWP-specific index, for example, based on one or more PRACH occasionsbeing configured, by a base station, for the first uplink BWP, and/orbased on the first downlink BWP-specific index being different from thefirst uplink BWP-specific index. The third downlink BWP-specific indexmay be same as or different from the first uplink BWP-specific index.The wireless device may perform the random access procedure via thefirst uplink BWP and the third downlink BWP, for example, based on theswitching. The random access procedure may be a contention-based randomaccess procedure. The base station and the wireless device may operatein a paired spectrum (e.g., frequency division duplex (FDD)).

FIG. 31 shows an example method for BWP switching for a random accessprocedure. A wireless device may determine to switch or to refrain fromswitching to a downlink BWP, based starting a random access procedureand based on a BWP-ID match between an active downlink BWP and an activeuplink BWP. The method may be accomplished by systems and apparatusesdescribed herein, for example, the base station 3024 and wireless device3026 of FIG. 30A and/or FIG. 30B. At step 3102, the wireless device mayreceive an RRC configuration regarding the BWPs. At step 3104, thewireless device may activate a first uplink BWP and a first downlinkBWP. At step 3106, the wireless device may initiate a random accessprocedure via the first uplink BWP. At step 3108, the wireless devicemay determine that the PRACH occasions are configured for the firstuplink BWP. At step 3110, the wireless device may determine that theBWP-ID of the first downlink BWP is not equal to the BWP-ID of the firstuplink BWP. At step 3112, the wireless device may switch to a thirddownlink BWP with a same BWP-ID as the first uplink BWP. At step 3114,the wireless device may perform the random access procedure.

Alternate processes may also be possible using the method. At step 3110,the wireless device may determine that the BWP-ID of the first downlinkBWP is equal to the BWP-ID of the first uplink BWP. At step 3114, thewireless device may perform the random access procedure. At step 3108,the wireless device may determine that the PRACH occasions are notconfigured for the first uplink BWP. At step 3116, the wireless devicemay switch to an initial downlink BWP and/or switch to an initial uplinkBWP. At step 3114, the wireless device may perform the random accessprocedure.

A base station may receive a random access preamble, from a wirelessdevice, for a random access procedure via an uplink BWP. The uplink BWPmay be indicated (e.g., identified) with an uplink BWP-specific index.The base station may send a random access response, to the wirelessdevice, via a downlink BWP, for example, based on receiving the randomaccess preamble. The downlink BWP may be indicated (e.g., identified)with a downlink BWP-specific index. The downlink BWP-specific index maybe the same as (or different from) the uplink BWP-specific index.

The wireless device may use multiple active downlink BWPs and/or one ormore active uplink BWPs. The wireless device may initiate a randomaccess procedure via at least one of the one or more active uplink BWPs.The wireless device may not successfully receive the random accessresponse, for example, if the multiple active downlink BWPs lack adownlink BWP via which the base station may send the random accessresponse. This not receiving the random access response may result in afailure of the random access procedure. The failure of the random accessprocedure may lead to radio link failure (RLF).

The wireless device may switch at least one downlink BWP of the multipleactive BWPs to the downlink BWP, for example, based on the initiatingthe random access procedure. The switching may enable the wirelessdevice to successfully receive (e.g., avoid missing receiving) therandom access response. The switching the at least one downlink BWP ofthe multiple active BWPs to the downlink BWP may be performed, by thewireless device, autonomously. The base station may not be aware of theswitching. The base station may send at least one downlink signal viathe switched at least one downlink BWP, for example, based on not beingaware of the switching. This transmission of the at least one downlinksignal may result in a misalignment between the base station and thewireless device, for example, based on lacking a predetermined selectionrule. A predetermined selection rule may be used to select at least onedownlink BWP of the multiple active BWPs.

The base station may send at least one downlink signal via the switchedat least one downlink BWP, for example, based on a misalignment betweenthe base station and the wireless device (e.g., via the switched atleast one downlink BWP). The base station may not be aware of thewireless device switching the at least one downlink BWP. The wirelessdevice may not monitor at least one downlink signal via the at least onedownlink BWP, for example, based on the switching. This misalignment maylead to unnecessary delay, data loss, and/or signaling overhead.Recovery from the misalignment caused by the wireless device may resultin a transmission delay and signaling overhead. This misalignment mayincrease the latency of a downlink transmission and/or an uplinktransmission, which may result in a waste of radio resources.

FIG. 32 shows an example of a system for a random access procedure withBWP switching using multiple active BWPs. A wireless device 3226 maydetermine to switch to a downlink BWP and deactivate one or more BWPs,for example, based on starting a random access procedure and a linkagebetween a downlink BWP and an active uplink BWP. The wireless device3226 and the base station 3224 may be configured to use a first uplinkBWP 3202, a second uplink BWP 3206, a third uplink BWP 3210, a firstdownlink BWP 3204, a second downlink BWP 3208, and/or a third downlinkBWP 3212. The wireless device 3226 may receive a message from the basestation 3224 configuring the BWPs. The base station 3224 may cause thefirst downlink BWP 3204, the third downlink BWP 3212, and the seconduplink BWP 3206 to become active between the base station 3224 and thewireless device 3226. The wireless device 3226 may initiate a randomaccess procedure switch from the first downlink BWP 3204 and the thirddownlink BWP 3212 to the second downlink BWP 3208, for example, based ona linkage between the second uplink BWP 3206 and the second downlink BWP3208 (e.g., numerology, shared control channel, etc.). The wirelessdevice 3226 may send a preamble to the base station 3224 via the seconduplink BWP. The base station 3224 may send a random access response(RAR) via the second downlink BWP 3208.

A wireless device may receive, from a base station, one or more messagescomprising configuration parameters for a cell. The one or more messagesmay comprise one or more RRC messages (e.g. an RRC connectionreconfiguration message, or an RRC connection reestablishment message,and/or an RRC connection setup message). The configuration parametersmay comprise resource configuration parameters (e.g., BWP configurationparameters) for a first plurality of downlink resources (e.g., downlinkBWPs) of the cell and a second plurality of uplink resources (e.g.,uplink BWPs) of the cell. The configuration parameters may comprisedownlink BWP-specific indexes for the first plurality of downlink BWPsand uplink BWP-specific indexes for the second plurality of uplink BWPs.

The wireless device may activate at least two downlink BWPs of the firstplurality of downlink BWPs and/or at least one uplink BWP of the secondplurality of uplink BWPs. The at least two downlink BWPs may comprise afirst downlink BWP and/or a second downlink BWP. The at least one uplinkBWP may comprise a first uplink BWP.

A wireless device may receive (e.g., in a first slot) first DCIindicating switching a first active BWP of the cell from a first activedownlink BWP to the first downlink BWP. The first DCI may comprise afirst BWP indicator. The wireless device may determine that the firstDCI indicates BWP switching, for example, based on the first BWPindicator indicating a BWP different from the first active downlink BWP.

A wireless device may receive (e.g., in a first slot) first DCI and/or afirst MAC CE indicating activating the first downlink BWP of the cell.The first DCI and/or the first MAC CE may comprise a first BWPindicator. The wireless device may determine that the first DCI and/orthe first MAC CE indicates BWP activating, for example, based on thefirst BWP indicator indicating the first downlink BWP.

A wireless device may receive (e.g., in a second slot) second DCIindicating switching a second active BWP of the cell from a secondactive downlink BWP to the second downlink BWP. The second DCI maycomprise a second BWP indicator. The wireless device may determine thatthe second DCI indicates BWP switching, for example, based on the secondBWP indicator indicating a BWP different from the second active downlinkBWP.

A wireless device may receive (e.g., in a second slot) second DCI and/ora second MAC CE indicating activating the second downlink BWP of thecell. The second DCI and/or the second MAC CE may comprise a second BWPindicator. The wireless device may determine that the second DCI and/orthe second MAC CE indicates BWP activating, for example, based on thesecond BWP indicator indicating the second downlink BWP.

A wireless device may receive (e.g., in a third slot) third DCIindicating switching a third active BWP of the cell from a first activeuplink BWP to the first uplink BWP. The third DCI may comprise a thirdBWP indicator. The wireless device may determine that the third DCIindicates BWP switching, for example, based on the third BWP indicatorindicating a BWP different from the first active uplink BWP.

A wireless device may receive (e.g., in a third slot) third DCI and/or athird MAC CE indicating activating the first uplink BWP of the cell. Thethird DCI and/or the third MAC CE may comprise a third BWP indicator.The wireless device may determine that the third DCI and/or the thirdMAC CE indicates BWP activating, for example, based on the third BWPindicator indicating the first uplink BWP. The first downlink BWP, thesecond downlink BWP, and/or the first uplink BWP of the cell may beactive at the same time.

The wireless device may initiate a random access procedure (e.g.,contention-free random access, contention-based random access, etc.) viathe first uplink BWP of the at least one uplink BWP. The first uplinkBWP may be indicated (e.g., identified) by, or associated with, a firstuplink BWP-specific index. The wireless device may determine that atleast two downlink BWP-specific indexes of the at least two downlinkBWPs (e.g., the first downlink BWP and the second downlink BWP) may bedifferent from the first uplink BWP-specific index of the first uplinkBWP, for example, based on initiating the random access procedure.

The wireless device may select, based on one or more criteria, at leastone downlink BWP (e.g., the first downlink BWP and/or the seconddownlink BWP) of the at least two downlink BWPs (e.g., the firstdownlink BWP and the second downlink BWP), for example, based on thedetermining that the at least a two downlink BWP-specific indexes of theat least two downlink BWPs are different from the first uplinkBWP-specific index of the first uplink BWP. The wireless device mayswitch from the at least one downlink BWP to a third downlink BWP of thefirst plurality of downlink BWPs. The third downlink BWP may beindicated (e.g., identified) by, or associated with, a third downlinkBWP-specific index. The third downlink BWP-specific index may be same as(or different from) the first uplink BWP-specific index. The wirelessdevice may send a random access preamble via a PRACH resource of thefirst uplink BWP, for example, based on the switching to the thirddownlink BWP.

The wireless device may start a response window (e.g. ra-ResponseWindow)at a first PDCCH occasion via the third downlink BWP of the cell. Theresponse window may begin from the end of the sending the random accesspreamble. The response window may be configured by a higher layer (e.g.,MAC, RRC, etc.). The wireless device may monitor at least one downlinkcontrol channel via the third downlink BWP for DCI (e.g., a randomaccess response), for example, based on the response window running. TheDCI may be indicated (e.g., identified, scrambled, etc.) by a RA-RNTI.The DCI may be addressed to the wireless device indicated (e.g.,identified) by a C-RNTI. The random access procedure may be completedsuccessfully, for example, based on the wireless device receiving theDCI via the third downlink BWP.

The wireless device may switch from the at least two downlink BWPs tothe third downlink BWP, for example, based on the determining that atleast a downlink BWP-specific index is different from an uplinkBWP-specific index. The selected at least one downlink BWP may be thesame as or similar to the at least two downlink BWPs. The switching fromthe at least two downlink BWPs to the third downlink BWP may comprisedeactivating each of the at least two downlink BWPs and activating thethird downlink BWP.

A first downlink BWP-specific index of the first downlink BWP and asecond downlink BWP-specific index of the second downlink BWP may bedifferent from the first uplink BWP-specific index of the first uplinkBWP. The wireless device may switch the first downlink BWP and thesecond downlink BWP to a third downlink BWP, for example, based oninitiating a random access procedure (e.g., contention-based). The thirddownlink BWP may be indicated (e.g., identified) by, or associated with,a third downlink BWP-specific index. The third downlink BWP-specificindex may be the same as or similar to the first uplink BWP-specificindex.

The wireless device may select at least one downlink BWP of the at leasttwo downlink BWPs, for example, based on the based on determining thatat least a downlink BWP-specific index is different from an uplinkBWP-specific index. The determining of the at least one downlink BWP maybe based on whether the at least one downlink BWP is configured with acommon search space. The base station may refrain from configuring theat least one downlink BWP with a common search space.

The first downlink BWP may be configured with a common search space andthe second downlink BWP may not be configured with a common searchspace. The wireless device may switch the second downlink BWP to a thirddownlink BWP and keep the first downlink BWP in active state, forexample, based on initiating a random access procedure (e.g.,contention-based) via a first uplink BWP. The third downlink BWP may beindicated (e.g., identified) by, or associated with, a third downlinkBWP-specific index. The third downlink BWP-specific index may be thesame as or similar to the first uplink BWP-specific index of the firstuplink BWP. The wireless device may keep the first downlink BWP inactive state, for example, based on the wireless initiating the randomaccess procedure and based on the wireless device being configured witha common search space.

The wireless device may switch the first downlink BWP to a thirddownlink BWP, for example, based on initiating a random access procedure(e.g., contention-based) via a first uplink BWP, the first downlink BWPbeing configured with a common search space, and/or the second downlinkBWP not being configured with a common search space. The third downlinkBWP may be indicated (e.g., identified by), or associated with, a thirddownlink BWP-specific index. The third downlink BWP-specific index maybe the same as or similar to the first uplink BWP-specific index of thefirst uplink BWP. The wireless device may keep the second downlink BWPin active state, for example, based on not being configured with acommon search space and the wireless initiating the random accessprocedure.

The wireless device may switch the first downlink BWP and the seconddownlink BWP to a third downlink BWP, for example, based on initiating arandom access procedure (e.g., contention-based) via a first uplink BWP,the first downlink BWP being configured with a first common searchspace, and/or the second downlink BWP being configured with a secondcommon search space. The third downlink BWP may be indicated (e.g.,identified) by, or associated with, a third downlink BWP-specific index.The third downlink BWP-specific index may be same as (or different from)the first uplink BWP-specific index of the first uplink BWP.

The one or more criteria may be based on a value of a BWP-specificindex. The determining may comprise determining at least one downlinkBWP with a lowest BWP-specific index among at least two downlinkBWP-specific indexes of the at least two downlink BWPs. The at least onedownlink BWP with the lowest BWP-specific index may be a BWP via whichthe wireless device receives system information. Monitoring via the atleast one downlink BWP with a lowest or lower BWP-specific index amongone or more downlink BWPs may help maintain a noninterrupted link with abase station for receiving system information.

A wireless device may initiate a random access procedure via a firstuplink BWP associated with a first uplink BWP-specific index. Thewireless device may select the first downlink BWP, for example, based onthe first downlink BWP-specific index being lower than the seconddownlink BWP-specific index, the initiating the random access procedure,and/or the wireless determining that a first downlink BWP-specific indexof the first downlink BWP and a second downlink BWP-specific index ofthe second downlink BWP are different from the first uplink BWP-specificindex. The wireless device may switch the first downlink BWP to a thirddownlink BWP, for example, based on the determining the first downlinkBWP. The third downlink BWP may be indicated (e.g., identified) by, orassociated with, a third downlink BWP-specific index. The third downlinkBWP-specific index may be same as (or different from) the first uplinkBWP-specific index of the first uplink BWP.

The wireless device may select the second downlink BWP, for example,based on the second downlink BWP-specific index being lower than thefirst downlink BWP-specific index, the initiating the random accessprocedure, and/or the wireless determining that a first downlinkBWP-specific index of the first downlink BWP and a second downlinkBWP-specific index of the second downlink BWP are different from thefirst uplink BWP-specific index. The wireless device may switch thesecond downlink BWP to a third downlink BWP. The third downlink BWP maybe indicated (e.g., identified) by, or associated with, a third downlinkBWP-specific index. The third downlink BWP-specific index may be thesame as or similar to the first uplink BWP-specific index of the firstuplink BWP.

One or more criteria may be based on a value of a BWP-specific index.The determining of a downlink BWP may comprise determining at least onedownlink BWP with a highest BWP-specific index among at least twodownlink BWP-specific indexes of the at least two downlink BWPs. Thedetermining of a downlink BWP may comprise determining a BWP of the atleast two downlink BWPs that is a secondary downlink BWP.

The at least one downlink BWP with a highest BWP-specific index may be aBWP via which the wireless device receives urgent data packets (e.g.,URLLC). Monitoring via the at least one downlink BWP with a highestBWP-specific index may help maintain a noninterrupted link with a basestation for urgent data receiving.

The wireless device may select at least one downlink BWP of the at leasttwo downlink BWPs, for example, based on the determining that at least adownlink BWP-specific index is different from an uplink BWP-specificindex. At least one downlink BWP of the at least two downlink BWPs maycomprise a BWP designated as a secondary downlink BWP (SBWP) of thecell.

The base station may designate the first downlink BWP as a primarydownlink BWP. The base station may designate the second downlink BWP asa secondary downlink BWP. The wireless device may switch the seconddownlink BWP to a third downlink BWP, for example, based on the seconddownlink BWP being designated as the secondary downlink BWP and thewireless device initiating a random access procedure (e.g.,contention-based) via a first uplink BWP. The third downlink BWP may beindicated (e.g., identified) by, or associated with, a third downlinkBWP-specific index. The third downlink BWP-specific index may be thesame as or similar to the first uplink BWP-specific index of the firstuplink BWP. The wireless device may keep the first downlink BWP in anactive state, for example, based on the wireless initiating the randomaccess procedure and/or the first downlink BWP being designated as theprimary downlink BWP. The determining of a downlink BWP may comprisedetermining a BWP of the at least two downlink BWPs that is a primarydownlink BWP.

The primary downlink BWP may be a BWP via which the wireless device mayperform an initial connection establishment procedure, may initiate aconnection re-establishment procedure, and/or may monitor PDCCHcandidates in one or more common search spaces for DCI formats with CRCscrambled by a SI-RNTI, RA-RNTI, TC-RNTI, P-RNTI, INT-RNTI, SFI-RNTI,TPC-PUSCH-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, TPC-SRS-RNTI, CS-RNTI, SP-CSI-RNTI,and/or C-RNTI. The primary downlink BWP may be a BWP which may maintainin active state at least until being switched to another BWP (e.g., byan RRC message). The primary downlink BWP may be a first BWP in alicensed band. The secondary downlink BWP may be a second BWP in anunlicensed band. The primary downlink BWP may be a first BWP used with afirst radio interface (e.g., an Uu interface between a base station anda wireless device). The secondary downlink BWP may be a second BWP usedwith a second radio interface (e.g., a sidelink interface between afirst wireless device and a second wireless device).

The determining of a downlink BWP may comprise determining a BWP of theat least two downlink BWPs that is a not a default BWP (e.g.,non-default BWP). A default BWP of the at least two downlink BWPs may bein an active state, for example, based on there being at least twoactive downlink BWPs in the cell. A default BWP of the at least twodownlink BWPs may be in an inactive state, for example, if there are atleast two active downlink BWPs in the cell. A default BWP may be in aninactive state, for example, based on there being at most one activedownlink BWP in the cell.

The wireless device may select at least one downlink BWP of the at leasttwo downlink BWPs, for example, based on determining that at least adownlink BWP-specific index is different from an uplink BWP-specificindex. The at least one downlink BWP of the at least two downlink BWPsmay comprise a BWP designated as a non-default BWP of the cell.

The first downlink BWP may be a default BWP. The second downlink BWP maybe a non-default BWP. The first downlink BWP may stay in an activestate, for example, based on at least two downlink BWPs (e.g., the firstdownlink BWP and the second downlink BWP) of the cell being active.

The wireless device may switch the second downlink BWP to a thirddownlink BWP, for example, based on the second downlink BWP being anon-default BWP and/or the wireless device initiating a random accessprocedure (e.g., contention-based) via a first uplink BWP. The thirddownlink BWP may be indicated (e.g., identified) by, or associated with,a third downlink BWP-specific index. The third downlink BWP-specificindex may be the same as or similar to the first uplink BWP-specificindex of the first uplink BWP. The wireless device may keep the firstdownlink BWP in an active state, for example, based on the wirelessinitiating the random access procedure, and/or based on the firstdownlink BWP being the default BWP.

The one or more criteria may be based on a value of a numerology index.A determining of a downlink BWP may comprise determining at least onedownlink BWP with a numerology index among at least two numerologyindexes of the at least two downlink BWPs. The numerology index of theat least one downlink BWP may be the same as or similar to a numerologyindex of the third downlink BWP of the cell.

A wireless device may initiate a random access procedure via a firstuplink BWP associated with a first uplink BWP-specific index. A firstdownlink BWP-specific index of the first downlink BWP and a seconddownlink BWP-specific index of the second downlink BWP may be differentfrom the first uplink BWP-specific index. A third downlink BWP-specificindex of the third downlink BWP may be the same as or similar to thefirst uplink BWP-specific index. The base station may configure thefirst downlink BWP, the second downlink BWP, and the third downlink BWPwith a first numerology index, a second numerology index, and a thirdnumerology index, respectively.

The wireless device may select the first downlink BWP, for example,based on the first numerology index of the first downlink BWP being thesame as or similar to the third numerology index of the third downlinkBWP, initiating the random access procedure, and the wireless devicedetermining that the first downlink BWP-specific index and the seconddownlink BWP-specific index are different from the first uplinkBWP-specific index. The wireless device may switch the first downlinkBWP to the third downlink BWP, for example, based on selecting thedownlink BWP.

The wireless device may select the second downlink BWP, for example,based on the second numerology index of the second downlink BWP beingthe same as or similar to the third numerology index of the thirddownlink BWP, for example, based on the initiating the random accessprocedure, and the wireless device determining that the first downlinkBWP-specific index and the second downlink BWP-specific index aredifferent from the first uplink BWP-specific index. The wireless devicemay switch the second downlink BWP to the third downlink BWP, forexample, based on the selecting of the downlink BWP.

One or more criteria for determining a downlink BWP may comprise atleast one of: a BWP-specific index, a numerology index, common controlchannel configuration, primary downlink BWP configuration, or seconddownlink BWP configuration. The determining of the downlink BWP may bebased on at least two criteria. The determining of the downlink BWP maycomprise the determining a BWP of the at least two downlink BWPs that isa secondary downlink BWP and configured with a common control channel.The determining of the downlink BWP may comprise determining a BWP witha lowest BWP-specific index among at least two BWP-specific indexes ofthe at least two downlink BWPs and being configured with a commoncontrol channel.

FIG. 33 shows an example method for BWP switching for a random accessprocedure using multiple active BWPs. A wireless device may determine toswitch or to refrain from switching an active downlink BWP to a downlinkBWP from one or more BWPs, based on starting a random access procedureand a match of BWP-IDs between a downlink BWP and an active uplink BWP.The method may be accomplished systems and apparatuses described herein,for example, the base station 3224 and wireless device 3226 of FIG. 32.At step 3302, the wireless device may receive an RRC configurationregarding BWPs. At step 3304, the wireless device may activate a firstuplink BWP and a multiple downlink BWPs. At step 3306, the wirelessdevice may initiate a random access procedure via the first uplink BWP.At step 3308, the wireless device may determine that the PRACH occasionsare configured for the first uplink BWP. At step 3310, the wirelessdevice may determine that the BWP-IDs of the multiple downlink BWPs arenot equal to the BWP-ID of the first uplink BWP. At step 3312, thewireless device may perform a downlink BWP selection and switch to aselected downlink BWP to a third downlink BWP associated with a sameBWP-ID as the first uplink BWP. At step 3314, the wireless device mayperform the random access procedure.

Alternate processes may also be possible through the method. At step3310, the wireless device may determine that at least one of the BWP-IDsof the multiple downlink BWPs are equal to the BWP-ID of the firstuplink BWP. At step 3314, the wireless device may perform the randomaccess procedure. At step 3308, the wireless device may determine thatthe PRACH occasions are not configured for the first uplink BWP. At step3316, the wireless device may switch to an initial downlink BWP and/orswitch to an initial uplink BWP. At step 3314, the wireless device mayperform the random access procedure.

A wireless device may operate via a first uplink BWP of a cell and afirst downlink BWP of the cell, for example, in a NR network. The firstuplink BWP may be indicated (e.g., identified) by a first uplinkBWP-specific index. The first downlink BWP may be indicated (e.g.,identified) by a first downlink BWP-specific index. The wireless devicemay initiate a random access procedure (e.g., contention based,contention-free, etc.) via the first uplink BWP. The wireless device mayswitch from the first downlink BWP to a third downlink BWP of the cellassociated with a third downlink BWP-specific index, for example, basedon one or more PRACH occasions being configured, by a base station, forthe first uplink BWP, and/or the first downlink BWP-specific index beingdifferent from the first uplink BWP-specific index. The third downlinkBWP-specific index may be same as or similar to the first uplinkBWP-specific index. The wireless device may perform the random accessprocedure via the first uplink BWP and the third downlink BWP, forexample, based on the switching of the downlink BWP.

The base station may not be aware of the wireless device switching fromthe first downlink BWP to the third downlink BWP. The base station maybe aware of the wireless device switching from the first downlink BWP tothe third downlink BWP, for example, based on the base station receivingan uplink signal (e.g., msg3) of the random access procedure. The uplinksignal may identify an identity of the wireless device. The base stationmay determine the wireless device operating via the third downlink BWP,for example, based on receiving the uplink signal.

The base station may send at least one downlink signal to the wirelessdevice via the first downlink BWP, for example, based on a time durationbetween the switching and the determining that at least a downlinkBWP-specific index is different from an uplink BWP-specific index. Thewireless device may refrain from monitoring the at least one downlinksignal via the first downlink BWP, for example, based on the switchingof the downlink BWP. The wireless device may miss receiving (e.g., notsuccessfully receive) the at least one downlink signal. The missingreceiving the at least one downlink signal may lead to unnecessarydelay, data loss, and/or signaling overhead.

FIG. 34 shows an example method for BWP activation for a random accessprocedure using multiple active BWPs. A wireless device may determine toactivate a downlink BWP or to refrain from activating a downlink BWP,for example, based on matching BWP-IDs between a downlink BWP and anactive uplink BWP, not exceeding a maximum supported bandwidth, and/orstarting a random access procedure. The method may be accomplished bysystems and apparatuses described herein, for example, the base station3224 and wireless device 3226 of FIG. 32. At step 3402, the wirelessdevice may receive an RRC configuration regarding BWPs. At step 3404,the wireless device may activate a first uplink BWP and a multipledownlink BWPs. At step 3406, the wireless device may initiate a randomaccess procedure via the first uplink BWP. At step 3408, the wirelessdevice may determine that the PRACH occasions are configured for thefirst uplink BWP. At step 3410, the wireless device may determine thatthe BWP-IDs of the multiple downlink BWPs are not equal to the BWP-ID ofthe first uplink BWP. At step 3412, the wireless device may activate athird downlink BWP with a same BWP-ID as the first uplink BWP, forexample, based on a maximum supported bandwidth not being exceeded. Atstep 3414, the wireless device may perform the random access procedure.

Alternate processes may also be possible through the method. At step3410, the wireless device may determine that at least one of the BWP-IDsof the multiple downlink BWPs are equal to the BWP-ID of the firstuplink BWP. At step 3414, the wireless device may perform the randomaccess procedure. At step 3408, the wireless device may determine thatthe PRACH occasions are not configured for the first uplink BWP. At step3416, the wireless device may switch to an initial downlink BWP and/orswitch to an initial uplink BWP. At step 3414, the wireless device mayperform the random access procedure.

A wireless device may operate via a first uplink BWP of a cell and afirst downlink BWP of the cell. The first uplink BWP may be indicated(e.g., identified) by a first uplink BWP-specific index. The firstdownlink BWP may be indicated (e.g., identified) by a first downlinkBWP-specific index. The wireless device may initiate a random accessprocedure (e.g., contention based, contention-free, etc.) via the firstuplink BWP. The wireless device may activate a third downlink BWP, ofthe cell, associated with a third downlink BWP-specific index, forexample, based on one or more PRACH occasions are configured, by a basestation, for the first uplink BWP, and/or based on the first downlinkBWP-specific index being different from the first uplink BWP-specificindex. The third downlink BWP-specific index may be same as (ordifferent from) the first uplink BWP-specific index. The wireless devicemay keep the first downlink BWP in an active state.

The wireless device may activate a third downlink BWP, for example,based on the wireless device supporting multiple active BWPs (e.g., thefirst downlink BWP and the third downlink BWP) in the cell, and/or basedon a total bandwidth of the multiple active BWPs of the cell comprisingthe third downlink BWP not exceeding a maximum bandwidth the wirelessdevice is able to support. The wireless device may perform the randomaccess procedure via the first uplink BWP and the third downlink BWP,for example, based on the activating the third downlink BWP. Thewireless device may continue monitoring the first downlink BWP, forexample, based on the random access procedure.

A wireless device may receive, from a base station, one or moreconfiguration parameters. The one or more configuration parameters maycomprise downlink BWP-specific indexes for downlink BWPs and uplinkBWP-specific indexes for uplink BWPs. Each of the uplink BWPs may be inone of an active state or an inactive state. The active state of a firstuplink BWP may comprise sending a first uplink signal (e.g., PUCCH,PUSCH, etc.) via the first uplink BWP. The inactive state of a firstuplink BWP may comprise refraining from sending a first uplink signal(e.g., PUCCH, PUSCH, etc.) via the first uplink BWP. Each of thedownlink BWPs may be in one of an active state or an inactive state. Theactive state of a first downlink BWP may comprise monitoring a downlinkcontrol channel of the first downlink BWP. The inactive state of a firstdownlink BWP may comprise refraining from monitoring a downlink controlchannel of the first downlink BWP.

The wireless device may activate at least two downlink BWPs of thedownlink BWPs and/or a first uplink BWP of the uplink BWPs. Theactivating the at least two downlink BWPs may comprise activating afirst downlink BWP of the at least two downlink BWPs in a first slot andactivating a second downlink BWP of the at least two downlink BWPs in asecond slot. The wireless device may activate the first uplink BWP in athird slot. The first slot, the second slot, and/or the third slot maybe different.

The wireless device may initiate a random-access procedure via the firstuplink BWP. The first uplink BWP may be indicated (e.g., identified) by,or associated with, a first uplink BWP-specific index. The random-accessprocedure may be contention-based.

The wireless device may determine that at least two downlinkBWP-specific indexes of the at least two downlink BWPs may be differentfrom the first uplink BWP-specific index of the first uplink BWP, forexample, based on initiating the random access procedure. The wirelessdevice may select at least one downlink BWP of the at least two downlinkBWPs, for example, based on one or more criteria and/or based ondetermining that at least a downlink BWP-specific index is differentfrom an uplink BWP-specific index. The wireless device may switch fromthe at least one downlink BWP to a second downlink BWP associated with asecond downlink BWP-specific index. The second downlink BWP-specificindex may be the same as (or different from) the first uplinkBWP-specific index.

One or more criteria of determining a downlink BWP may be based on avalue of a BWP-specific index. The determining of a downlink BWP maycomprise selecting a BWP with a lowest downlink BWP-specific index amongat least two downlink BWP-specific indexes of the at least two downlinkBWPs. The determining of the downlink BWP may comprise selecting a BWPwith a highest downlink BWP-specific index among at least two downlinkBWP-specific indexes of the at least two downlink BWPs. The determiningof the downlink BWP may comprise selecting a BWP of the at least twodownlink BWPs that is a secondary downlink BWP.

A determining of the downlink BWP may comprise selecting a BWP with alowest numerology index among the at least two downlink BWPs. Thedetermining may comprise selecting a BWP with a highest numerology indexamong the at least two downlink BWPs. The determining of the downlinkBWP may comprise selecting a BWP of the at least two downlink BWPs witha numerology index the same as or similar to a second numerology indexof the second downlink BWP.

A determining of a downlink BWP may comprise selecting one or more BWPsof the at least two downlink BWPs. The one or more BWPs may beconfigured with a common search space. The wireless device may monitorthe common search space to receive a random-access response.

The wireless device may send a preamble via a PRACH resource of thefirst uplink BWP, for example, based on the switching of the downlinkBWP. The wireless device may monitor at least one downlink controlchannel of the second downlink BWP for detecting a random accessresponse, for example, based on sending the preamble.

A base station may send, to a wireless device that may receive, one ormore configuration parameters comprising: downlink bandwidth part(BWP)-specific indexes for downlink BWPs; and uplink BWP-specificindexes for uplink BWPs. The wireless device may activate at least twodownlink BWPs of the downlink BWPs. The wireless device may activate afirst uplink BWP of the uplink BWPs. The wireless device may initiate arandom access procedure via the first uplink BWP. The wireless devicemay determine that each downlink BWP-specific index of the at least twodownlink BWPs is different from an uplink BWP-specific index of thefirst uplink BWP. The wireless device may select a first downlink BWP ofthe at least two downlink BWPs based on the determining. The wirelessdevice may switch from the first downlink BWP to a second downlink BWP,of the downlink BWPs, associated with a second downlink BWP-specificindex that is the same as the uplink BWP-specific index. The wirelessdevice may send, via the first uplink BWP for the random accessprocedure, a preamble. The wireless device may monitor at least onedownlink control channel of the second downlink BWP for a random accessresponse. The wireless device may activate the second downlink BWP. Thewireless device may refrain from switching (e.g., may not switch) from adownlink BWP, of the at least two downlink BWPs, to the second downlinkBWP. The downlink BWP may be different from the first downlink BWP. Eachof the downlink BWPs may be in one of an active state and an inactivestate. The active state of a first downlink BWP may comprises monitoringa downlink control channel of the first downlink BWP. The inactive stateof a first downlink BWP may comprise refraining from monitoring (e.g.,not monitoring) a downlink control channel of the first downlink BWP.The wireless device may activate the first downlink BWP in a first slot.The wireless device may activate the second downlink BWP in a secondslot. The wireless device may activate first uplink BWP in a third slot.Each of the first slot, the second slot, and the third slot may bedifferent slots. The wireless device may select a downlink BWPassociated with at least one of: a lowest or highest downlinkBWP-specific index relative to downlink BWP-specific indexes associatedwith the at least two downlink BWPs; or a lowest or highest BWP-specificnumerology relative to BWP-specific numerologies associated with the atleast two downlink BWPs. The wireless device may select a first downlinkBWP based on whether the first downlink BWP is a primary BWP or asecondary BWP. The wireless device may select a downlink BWP, of the atleast two downlink BWPs, that is a secondary BWP. Each of the downlinkBWPs may be associated with a BWP-specific numerology. The wirelessdevice may determine a first downlink BWP based on a selected BWPspecific numerology among at least two BWP specific numerologies of theat least two downlink BWPs, wherein the selected BWP specific numerologymay be same as a second BWP specific numerology of the second downlinkBWP. The wireless device may determine a selected downlink BWP, amongthe at least two downlink BWPs, configured with a common search spaceset. The wireless device may select a downlink BWP, among the at leasttwo downlink BWPs, without a common search space set. The wirelessdevice may select a downlink BWP based on whether the downlink BWP is adefault BWP or a non-default BWP. The wireless device may select adownlink BWP, of the at least two downlink BWPs, that is a non-defaultBWP. The wireless device may switch from the first downlink BWP to thesecond downlink BWP. The wireless device may maintain the first downlinkBWP in an active state. The wireless device may deactivate the firstdownlink BWP. The wireless device switching from the first downlink BWPto the second downlink BWP may comprise the wireless device deactivatingthe first downlink BWP.

A base station may send, to a wireless device that may receive, one ormore configuration parameters. The one or more configuration parametersmay comprise downlink bandwidth part (BWP)-specific indexes for downlinkBWPs and/or uplink BWP-specific indexes for uplink BWPs. The wirelessdevice may activate a first downlink BWP of the downlink BWPs and afirst uplink BWP of the uplink BWPs. The wireless device may initiate arandom access procedure via the first uplink BWP. The wireless devicemay determine that a downlink BWP-specific index of the first downlinkBWP is different from an uplink BWP-specific index of the first uplinkBWP. The wireless device may activate a second downlink BWP, of thedownlink BWPs, associated with a second downlink BWP-specific index thatis the same as the uplink BWP-specific index. The wireless device mayactivate the second downlink BWP based on determining that a downlinkBWP-specific index of the first downlink BWP is different from an uplinkBWP-specific index of the first uplink BWP. The wireless device maysend, via the first uplink BWP for the random access procedure, apreamble. The wireless device may monitor at least one downlink controlchannel of the second downlink BWP for a random access response. Basedon activating the second downlink BWP, the wireless device maydeactivate the first downlink BWP. Activating the first downlink BWP,the first uplink BWP, and the second BWP may comprise: activating thefirst downlink BWP in a first slot; activating the second downlink BWPin a second slot; and/or activating the first uplink BWP in a thirdslot. Each of the first slot, the second slot, and the third slot may bedifferent slots. The wireless device may select the first downlink BWPfrom the downlink BWPs by determining a downlink BWP associated with atleast one of: a lowest or highest downlink BWP-specific index relativeto downlink BWP-specific indexes associated with the downlink BWPs;and/or a lowest or highest BWP-specific numerology relative toBWP-specific numerologies associated with the downlink BWPs. Thewireless device may select the first downlink BWP, for example, based onwhether a downlink BWP is a primary BWP or a secondary BWP. The wirelessdevice may select the first downlink BWP, for example, based on whetherthe downlink BWP is a default BWP or a non-default BWP. The wirelessdevice may switch from the first downlink BWP to the second downlinkBWP. The wireless device may deactivate the first downlink BWP. Theswitching from the first downlink BWP to the second downlink BWP maycomprise deactivating the first downlink BWP.

A base station may send, to a wireless device that may receive, one ormore configuration parameters. The one or more configuration parametersmay comprise downlink bandwidth part (BWP)-specific indexes for downlinkBWPs, and/or uplink BWP-specific indexes for uplink BWPs. The wirelessdevice may activate a first downlink BWP of the downlink BWPs and afirst uplink BWP of the uplink BWPs. The wireless device may initiate arandom access procedure via the first uplink BWP. The wireless devicemay determine that a downlink BWP-specific index of the first downlinkBWP is different from an uplink BWP-specific index of the first uplinkBWP. Based on the determining that a downlink BWP-specific index of thefirst downlink BWP is different from an uplink BWP-specific index of thefirst uplink BWP, the wireless device may perform at least one of:activating a second downlink BWP, of the downlink BWPs, associated witha second downlink BWP-specific index that is the same as the uplinkBWP-specific index; deactivating the first downlink BWP; or switchingfrom the first downlink BWP to the second downlink BWP. The wirelessdevice may monitor at least one downlink control channel of the seconddownlink BWP for a random access response. Performing at least one ofthe above steps may be based on at least one of: a downlink BWP-specificindex of the first downlink BWP; a BWP-specific numerology of the firstdownlink BWP; a downlink BWP-specific index of the second downlink BWP;and/or a BWP-specific numerology of the second downlink BWP. The basestation may send, to the wireless device that may receive, via the atleast one downlink control channel of the second downlink BWP, a randomaccess response. The wireless device may switch from the first downlinkBWP to the second downlink BWP, for example, based on the receiving therandom access response. The wireless device may initiate a random accessprocedure. The wireless device may initiate the random access procedure,for example, by receiving a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH)order. The wireless device may send a random access preamble via thefirst uplink BWP, for example, based on the PDCCH order. Some wirelessdevices may be configured with up to a maximum quantity of resources(e.g., BWPs). For example, some wireless devices may be configured withup to four BWPs. Other wireless devices may be configured with up to anyother quantity of BWPs (e.g., 8, 16, etc.). Some wireless devices (e.g.,legacy wireless devices, wireless devices compatible with 3GPP Release15, or other wireless devices) may activate only one BWP of up to fourBWPs at a time. For such wireless devices, at most one BWP (e.g., anuplink BWP and/or a downlink BWP) can be active in a cell (e.g., aprimary cell, a secondary cell, etc). Such wireless devices may initiatea random-access procedure associated with a cell (e.g., PCell, SCell),for example, if the active uplink BWP is not configured with randomaccess channel (RACH) resources. Such wireless device switches mayswitch both the active uplink BWP to the initial uplink BWP and theactive downlink BWP to the initial downlink BWP. Such wireless devicesmay perform the random-access procedure via the initial downlink/uplinkBWP.

Some other wireless devices may activate at least two uplink BWPs on acell, for example, if multiple active uplink BWPs are supported for acell. A wireless device and/or a base station may have difficultydetermining to which active uplink BWP(s) of the at least two uplinkBWPs the wireless device and/or the base station should switch from tothe initial uplink BWP, for example, if the wireless device initiatesrandom access and the at least two uplink BWPs are not configured withRACH resources. A wireless device and/or a base station may havedifficulty determining to which active downlink BWP(s) of the at leasttwo downlink BWPs the wireless device should switch to from the initialdownlink BWP, for example, if there are multiple active downlink BWPs(e.g., at least two downlink BWPs on the cell). A misalignment betweenthe base station and the wireless device may result, for example, if thebase station does not know which active downlink BWP(s) is switched bythe wireless device.

The wireless device may address the above issues, for example, bydetermining an uplink BWP and/or a downlink BWP based on a predefinedrule. The wireless device may select an uplink BWP, among the at leasttwo uplink BWPs, based on the selected uplink BWP having the lowest orhighest BWP index among the at least two uplink BWPs. The wirelessdevice may select an uplink BWP, among the at least two uplink BWPs,designated as a primary or secondary BWP (e.g., default BWP, initialuplink BWP, etc.), or based on any other indication (e.g., per apredetermined rule).

Some wireless devices (e.g., legacy wireless devices and/or otherwireless devices) may send (e.g., transmit) a random access preamble viaan active uplink BWP, for example, if the wireless device initiatesrandom access. The wireless device may start a random-access responsewindow. The wireless device may monitor an active downlink BWP for arandom-access response, for example, if the random access responsewindow is running. The random access response window may be runningbased on sending (e.g., transmitting) the random access preamble. Thebase station may retransmit the random access preamble, for example,after the random access response window expires. The base station mayconfigure a duration of the random access response window in terms ofslots in the active uplink BWP. The absolute time duration of a randomaccess response window may be different in each downlink BWP, forexample, based on subcarrier spacing (SCS) configuration (ornumerology). Each downlink BWP may have an independent SCS configuration(or numerology). The random access response window may be four (4) slots(or any other quantity of slots or durations) which may be equal to 2ms, 1 ms, or 0.5 ms, for example, if the SCS of the active downlink BWPis 15 kHz, 30 kHz, or 15 kHz, respectively. The wireless device maymonitor some or all of the active downlink BWPs for a random accessresponse, for example, if the wireless device activates multiple activedownlink BWPs. The wireless device may activate multiple active downlinkBWPs, for example, based on sending (e.g., transmitting) the randomaccess preamble. Each downlink BWP may have a different absolute time. Afirst random access response window of a first active downlink BWP mayexpire before a second random access response window of a second activedownlink BWP expires. The wireless device may retransmit two (or more)random access preambles, for example: a first random access preamble ifthe first random access response window expires, and a second randomaccess preamble if the second random access response window expires. Thewireless device may retransmit the random access preamble based on or inresponse to an expiry of the random access response window.Retransmission of random access preambles may increase interference toother cells and/or users and/or may require the wireless device tomonitor two (or more) random access responses which may increase thepower consumption of the wireless device.

A wireless device may be enhanced to avoid the above issues, forexample, by being configured to resend (e.g., retransmit) a randomaccess preamble only if all (or at least more than one of) the randomaccess response windows of multiple active downlink BWPs expire (e.g.,if multiple active downlink BWPs are monitored for a random-accessresponse). For example, the wireless device may resend (e.g.,retransmit) a random-access preamble only if the random access responsewindow with the longest absolute time duration expires.

FIG. 35 shows an example of an RA procedure. A wireless device 3502 maybe configured to use an active downlink BWP (e.g., DL BWP-1 in FIG. 28)and an active uplink BWP. The wireless device 3502 may stop a BWP timer(e.g., BWP inactivity timer, such as BWP-1 inactivity timer in FIG. 35),if running, associated with the active downlink BWP, based on initiatingan RA procedure (e.g., a contention free RA procedure), at time T₁. Thewireless device 3502 may send (e.g., transmit) an RA preamble (e.g., afirst PRACH transmission) for the RA procedure via the active uplink BWPat time T₂. The wireless device 3502 may start an RA response window(e.g., an RA response window of DL BWP-1 3506) to monitor an RA responseon the active downlink BWP, for example, after or in response to sending(e.g., transmitting) the RA preamble.

The wireless device 3502 may not successfully receive an RA response,for example, at least until after a RA response window 3506 expires. Thewireless device 3502 may resend (e.g., retransmit) an RA preamble (e.g.,a second PRACH transmission) via the active uplink BWP (e.g., at timeT₃), for example, if the wireless device 3502 does not successfullyreceive an RA response prior to the RA response window 3506 expiring.The wireless device 3502 may complete the RA procedure successfully, forexample, if the wireless device receives the RA response at a time thatan RA response window is running. The RA response may be addressed to aC-RNTI of the wireless device 3502. The wireless device 3502 may restartthe BWP timer (e.g., at time T₄), based on receiving the RA responseaddressed to the C-RNTI of the wireless device 3502.

Some wireless devices (e.g., legacy wireless devices and/or otherwireless devices) may stop a BWP timer (e.g., BWP inactivity timer)associated with an active DL BWP of a secondary cell, for example, ifthe wireless device initiates an RA procedure for the secondary cell.Such wireless device may avoid an expiry of the BWP timer during the RAprocedure, for example, by the stopping the BWP timer. The expiry of theBWP timer may interrupt an RA procedure on the active DL BWP.

A wireless device may receive an RA response of the RA procedure for asecondary cell on a primary cell. The wireless device may stop a secondBWP timer (e.g., BWP inactivity timer) associated with a second activeDL BWP of a primary cell, for example, based on the initiating the RAprocedure for the secondary cell. The wireless device may successfullyreceive (e.g., may not miss the receiving of) the RA response, forexample, by the stopping the second BWP timer. The wireless device maystop the BWP timer (e.g., BWP inactivity timer) associated with anactive DL BWP of the secondary cell and the second BWP timer (e.g., BWPinactivity timer) associated with the second active DL BWP of theprimary cell, for example, based on initiating the RA procedure.

FIG. 36A and FIG. 36B show an example RA procedure for an SCell. Awireless device 3608 may be configured to use a first active downlinkBWP (e.g., active BWP-1) of a first cell 3602 (e.g., a PCell) and asecond active downlink BWP (e.g., active BWP-3 in FIG. 36A) of a second3604 (e.g., an SCell) and an active uplink BWP of the second 3604.

The wireless device 3608 may receive a PDCCH order to initiate a RAprocedure for the second cell 3604 (e.g., at time T₀). The wirelessdevice 3608 may initiate an RA procedure for a beam failure recovery ofthe second cell 3604 (e.g., at time T₁). The wireless device 3608 maystop a first BWP timer (e.g., BWP inactivity timer) (e.g., if running)associated with the first active downlink BWP and may stop a second BWPtimer (e.g., BWP inactivity timer) (e.g., if running) associated withthe second active downlink BWP, for example, based on initiating an RAprocedure (e.g., a contention-free RA procedure), at time T₁. Thewireless device 3608 may send (e.g., transmit) an RA preamble for the RAprocedure via the active uplink BWP, for example, at time T₂. Thewireless device 3608 may start an RA response window to monitor an RAresponse on the first active downlink BWP, for example, after or inresponse to sending (e.g., transmitting) the RA preamble.

The wireless device 3608 may not successfully receive an RA response,for example, by the time that the RA response window expires. Thewireless device 3608 may retransmit an RA preamble via the active uplinkBWP based on not successfully receiving an RA response at least by thetime that the RA response window expires. The wireless device 3608 maycomplete the RA procedure for a second cell (e.g., an SCell)successfully, for example, if the wireless device 3608 receives the RAresponse at a time that the RA response window is running. The RAresponse may be addressed to C-RNTI of the wireless device 3608. Thewireless device 3608 may restart the first BWP timer (e.g., BWPinactivity timer) and the second BWP timer (e.g., BWP inactivity timer)at time T₃, for example, after or in response to receiving the RAresponse addressed to the C-RNTI of the wireless device 3608.

A misalignment may occur between a BWP on which a RA response is sent(e.g., transmitted) and a BWP on which a wireless device monitors forthe RA response, for example, if the wireless device supports multipleactive BWPs in a cell. The wireless device may stop a BWP timer (e.g.,BWP inactivity timer) of the BWP on which the wireless device monitorsfor the RA response. This misalignment may lead to unnecessary delay,data loss, and/or signaling overhead. Recovery from the misalignmentcaused by the wireless device not successfully receiving (e.g., missing)an RA response may result in a transmission delay and/or signalingoverhead, which may increase the latency of the RA procedure and/orwaste radio resources due to redundant transmission(s) of the RAresponse.

A wireless device may be configured with multiple active UL BWPs in acell. A wireless device may select an UL BWP, from among multiple activeUL BWPs, to send (e.g., transmit) an RA preamble, for example, if thewireless device initiates an RA procedure (e.g., a contention-free RAprocedure, a contention-based RA procedure, etc.). A wireless device mayhave multiple active DL BWPs in a cell. A wireless device may select anDL BWP, from among multiple active DL BWPs, to monitor an RA response,for example, if the wireless device initiates an RA procedure (e.g.,contention-free RA procedure, a contention-based RA procedure, etc.).The wireless device may refrain from monitoring the multiple active DLBWPs to receive the RA response. By refraining from monitoring all (orat least some) of multiple active DL BWPs, a wireless device mayincrease efficiency and reduce power consumption.

A wireless device may be configured with multiple active DL BWPs in acell, such as BWP-1 and BWP-2. The wireless device may monitor themultiple active DL BWPs (e.g., BWP-1 and BWP-2) to receive an RAresponse of an RA procedure, for example, if the wireless deviceinitiates an RA procedure (e.g., contention-free RA procedure, acontention-based RA procedure, etc.). The BWP-1 and the BWP-2 may beconfigured, for example, with different numerologies (e.g., subcarrierspacings). A first absolute time duration of an RA response window ofthe BWP-1 may be different from (e.g., shorter or longer than) a secondabsolute time duration of an RA response window of the BWP-2. A firstabsolute time duration of an RA response window of the BWP-1 may be fourtimes longer than a second absolute time duration of an RA responsewindow of the BWP-2, for example, if the BWP-1 is configured with 15 KHzsubcarrier spacing and the BWP-2 is configured with 60 KHz subcarrierspacing. The wireless device may resend (e.g., retransmit) a first RApreamble for the RA procedure, for example, if the first absolute timeduration ends and the second absolute time duration is running. Thewireless device may resend (e.g., retransmit) a second RA preamble forthe RA procedure, for example, if the second absolute time durationends. Sending (e.g., transmitting) multiple preambles (e.g., the firstpreamble and the second RA preamble), for example, may be inefficientand/or may increase interference due to multiple preamble transmissions,possibly each with an increased transmission power.

A wireless device may start a first RA response window and a second RAresponse window to receive an RA response (e.g., a same response), forexample, after or in response to sending (e.g., transmitting) a firstpreamble. Sending (e.g., transmitting) a second preamble, for example,after or in response to the first RA response window (or the second RAresponse window) expiring, may be inefficient and/or consume excessivepower. RA procedures may be improved, for example, to provide greaterdownlink radio efficiency and reduced uplink signaling overhead if awireless device supports multiple active BWPs in a cell.

A wireless device may receive, from a base station, one or more messagescomprising configuration parameters. The one or more messages maycomprise one or more RRC messages (e.g., RRC connection reconfigurationmessage, RRC connection reestablishment message, and/or RRC connectionsetup message). The configuration parameters may comprise, for example,configuration parameters for a cell. The configuration parameters maycomprise, for example, BWP configuration parameters for a plurality ofBWPs. The plurality of BWPs may comprise a first plurality of BWPs ofthe cell comprising a first DL BWP and a second DL BWP. Each of theplurality of BWPs may be identified by a BWP-specific index. Each of theplurality of BWPs may be associated with a BWP-specific inactivitytimer.

A wireless device may receive (e.g., in a first slot) first DCIindicating switching a first active BWP of the cell from a first activeDL BWP to the first DL BWP. The first DCI may comprise a first BWPindicator. The wireless device may determine that the first DCIindicates BWP switching, for example, based on the first BWP indicatorindicating a BWP different from the first active DL BWP. The wirelessdevice may start a first inactivity timer associated with the first DLBWP, for example, after or in response to switching the first active BWPfrom the first active DL BWP to the first DL BWP.

A wireless device may receive (e.g., in a first slot) first DCI and/or afirst MAC CE indicating activating the first DL BWP of the cell. Thefirst DCI and/or the first MAC CE may comprise a first BWP indicator.The wireless device may determine that the first DCI and/or the firstMAC CE indicates BWP activation, for example, based on the first BWPindicator indicating the first DL BWP. The wireless device may start afirst inactivity timer associated with the first DL BWP, for example,after or in response to activating the first DL BWP.

A wireless device may receive (e.g., in a second slot) second DCIindicating switching a second active BWP of the cell from a secondactive DL BWP to the second DL BWP. The second DCI may comprise a secondBWP indicator. The wireless device may determine that the second DCIindicates BWP switching, for example, based on the second BWP indicatorindicating a BWP different from the second active DL BWP. The wirelessdevice may start a second inactivity timer associated with the second DLBWP, for example, after or in response to switching the second activeBWP from the second active DL BWP to the second DL BWP.

A wireless device may receive (e.g., in a second slot) second DCI and/ora second MAC CE indicating activating the second DL BWP of the cell. Thesecond DCI and/or the second MAC CE may comprise a second BWP indicator.The wireless device may determine that the second DCI and/or the secondMAC CE indicates BWP activating, for example, based on the second BWPindicator indicating the second DL BWP. The wireless device may start asecond inactivity timer associated with the second DL BWP, for example,after or in response to the activating the second DL BWP.

The wireless device may activate, for example, at least two BWPs (e.g.,the first DL BWP and the second DL BWP) of the first plurality of BWPs.The activating each BWP of the at least two BWPs of the cell may beperformed, for example, in different time slots. The wireless device maystart a BWP-specific inactivity timer of the each of the at least twoBWPs, for example, after or in response to activation the each of the atleast two BWPs. The first DL BWP and the second DL BWP of the firstplurality of BWPs of the cell may be active at the same time. The firstinactivity timer and the second inactivity timer may be, for example,running at the same time.

FIG. 37 shows an example of multiple active BWP operations. A wirelessdevice may initiate an RA procedure (e.g., a contention free RAprocedure), for example, at time T₁. The RA procedure may be for asecond cell (e.g., SCell). The RA procedure may be for a first cell(e.g., PCell). The RA procedure may be for a beam failure recoveryprocedure (e.g., a beam failure recovery procedure of the first cell orof a second cell). The initiating the RA procedure may be triggered, forexample, after or in response to the wireless device receives a PDCCHorder. The initiating the RA procedure may be triggered, for example, bydetecting, by the wireless device, a beam failure.

A wireless device 3702 may stop BWP-specific inactivity timerscorresponding to at least two BWPs (e.g., a first DL BWP and a second DLBWP) of the cell. The wireless device 3702 may stop a first inactivitytimer of the first DL BWP (e.g., BWP-1) and a second inactivity timer ofthe second DL BWP (e.g., BWP-2) of the cell (e.g., at time T₁). Thewireless device 3702 may stop a third BWP-specific inactivity timerassociated with a third active DL BWP of the second cell, for example,based on the initiating the RA procedure if the RA procedure is for thesecond cell.

The wireless device may send (e.g., transmit) an RA preamble, forexample, based on initiating a RA procedure (e.g., at time T₂). The RApreamble may be associated with (e.g., dedicated to) the wireless device3702. The random access preamble may be wireless device-specific and/ormay be configured for the wireless device 3702 by a base station 3704.

The wireless device 3702 may send (e.g., transmit), to the base station3704, the RA preamble. The wireless device 3702 may send (e.g.,transmit) the RA preamble via uplink resources of the second cell, forexample, if the RA procedure is for the second cell. The wireless device3702 may send (e.g., transmit) the RA preamble via uplink resources ofthe first cell, for example, if the RA procedure is for the first cell.Each of the at least two BWPs may be configured, for example, with atleast one control channel (e.g., common control channel, wirelessdevice-specific control channel, etc). At least one BWP of the at leasttwo BWPs may not be configured with at least one control channel.

The wireless device 3702 may monitor at least one PDCCH occasion for DCIon each of the at least two BWPs. The wireless device 3702 may monitorthe at least one PDCCH occasion, for example, based on sending (e.g.,transmitting) the RA preamble and/or base on stopping the BWP-specificinactivity timers corresponding to the at least two BWPs. The wirelessdevice 3702 may start a first response window 3706 (e.g., anra-ResponseWindow) at a first PDCCH occasion on the first DL BWP of thecell, for example, based on sending (e.g., transmitting) the RApreamble. The wireless device 3702 may start a second response window3708 (e.g. ra-ResponseWindow) at a second PDCCH occasion on the secondDL BWP of the cell, for example, based on sending (e.g., transmitting)the RA preamble. The first response window 3706 and the second responsewindow 3708 may be configured, for example, by a higher layer (e.g., aMAC layer, an RRC layer, etc.).

The wireless device 3702 may monitor the first PDCCH occasion for DCI,for example, if the first response window 3706 is running. The wirelessdevice 3702 may monitor the second PDCCH occasion for the DCI, forexample, if the second response window 3708 is running. The DCI may beindicated (e.g., identified, scrambled, etc.) by an RA-RNTI of thewireless device 3702. The DCI may be indicated (e.g., identified,scrambled, etc.) by a C-RNTI of the wireless device 3702.

The base station 3704 may select a DL BWP to send (e.g., transmit) theDCI. The DCI may be for an RA response. The determining the DL BWP maybe based on an implementation of the base station 3704. The base station3704 may select, for example, the first DL BWP to send (e.g., transmit)the DCI. The base station 3704 may select, for example, the second DLBWP to send (e.g., transmit) the DCI. The base station 3704 may send(e.g., transmit) the DCI, for example, on each of the at least two BWPs(e.g., on the first DL BWP and the second DL BWP).

The RA procedure may be completed successfully, for example, if thewireless device 3702 receives the DCI (e.g., on the first DL BWP or onthe second DL BWP). The wireless device 3702 may reset the firstresponse window 3706 and/or the second response window 3708 (e.g., ifrunning), for example, if the wireless device 3702 receives the DCI onthe first PDCCH occasion. The wireless device 3702 may reset the secondresponse window 3708 and/or the first response window 3706 (e.g., ifrunning), for example, if the wireless device 3702 receives the DCI onthe second PDCCH occasion. The first response window 3706 may be longerthan the second response window 3708. The wireless device 3702 may notreceive the DCI on the second PDCCH occasion, for example, if the secondresponse window 3708 is running (e.g., at least until the secondresponse window 3708 expires). The wireless device 3702 may refrain fromsending (e.g., transmitting) a second RA preamble, for example, based onnot receiving the DCI on the second PDCCH occasion in the secondresponse window (e.g., if the first response window is running) Thewireless device 3702 may send (e.g., transmit) a second RA preamble, forexample, based on not receiving the DCI on the second PDCCH occasion inthe second response window 3708 (e.g., if the first response window 3706is not running and/or the first response window 3706 has expired). Thewireless device 3702 may send (e.g., transmit) the second RA preamble,for example, if a corresponding response window of each of the at leasttwo BWPs expires. At least one BWP of the at least two BWPs may have alongest response window. The wireless device 3702 may send (e.g.,transmit) the second RA preamble, for example, if the longest responsewindow expires (e.g., at time T₃). The wireless device 3702 may refrainfrom sending (e.g., transmitting) the second RA preamble at least untila corresponding response window of each of the at least two BWPsexpires.

The RA procedure may be completed successfully, for example, if thewireless device 3702 receives the DCI (e.g., on the first DL BWP or thesecond DL BWP). The wireless device 3702 may restart BWP-specificinactivity timers corresponding to the at least two BWPs (e.g., first DLBWP and the second DL BWP), for example, based on the RA procedure beingsuccessfully completed. The wireless device 3702 may restart the firstinactivity timer of the first DL BWP and the second inactivity timer ofthe second DL BWP (e.g, at time T₄).

A base station (e.g., the base station 3702) may refrain fromconfiguring a DL BWP with a common search space. A wireless device(e.g., the wireless device 3704) may not successfully receive DCIidentified by an RA-RNTI, for example, if the wireless device 3704 isnot configured with the common search space. The wireless device 3704may stop each BWP-specific inactivity timer of each active DL BWPconfigured with a common search space, for example, based on theinitiating the RA procedure.

A base station may send (e.g., transmit) an RA response (e.g., DCI) onor using at least one of the active DL BWPs of the cell configured witha common search space. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) the RAresponse on or using BWP-1, for example, if the BWP-1 is configured witha common search space. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) the RAresponse on or using BWP-2, for example, if the BWP-2 is configured witha common search space. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) the RAresponse on both BWP-1 and BWP-2, for example, if both the BWP-1 andBWP-2 are configured with a common search space.

A wireless device may monitor for the RA response in each active DL BWPconfigured with a common search space (e.g., BWP-1 and/or BWP-2). Thewireless device may complete the RA procedure successfully, for example,based on receiving the RA response on at least one of the active DL BWPsof the cell. The wireless device may restart each BWP-specificinactivity timer of each active DL BWP of the cell configured with acommon search space (e.g., BWP-1 and/or BWP-2) based on completing theRA procedure successfully.

At least one selected BWP of the at least two BWPs may comprise BWPs ofa cell that are configured with a common search space. A wireless devicemay stop a BWP-specific inactivity timer of each BWP of a first subsetof the at least two BWPs (e.g., the first DL BWP and the second DL BWP),for example, based on initiating the RA procedure. Each BWP of the firstsubset may be configured with a common search space.

The first DL BWP of the wireless device may be configured with a commonsearch space. A second DL BWP of the wireless device may not beconfigured with a common search space. The wireless device may stop thefirst inactivity timer of the first DL BWP of the cell, for example,based on initiating the RA procedure.

The wireless device may start a first response window (e.g.,ra-ResponseWindow) at a first PDCCH occasion on the first DL BWP of thecell, for example, after or in response to sending (e.g., transmitting)the RA preamble. The first response window may be configured by a higherlayer (e.g., a MAC layer, an RRC layer, etc.). The wireless device maymonitor the first PDCCH occasion for DCI, for example, if the firstresponse window is running. The DCI may be indicated (e.g., identified,scrambled, etc.) by an RA-RNTI. The DCI may be indicated (e.g.,identified, scrambled, etc.) by a C-RNTI of the wireless device.

The RA procedure may be completed successfully, for example, if thewireless device receives the DCI on the first DL BWP. The wirelessdevice may restart the first inactivity timer of the first DL BWP, forexample, after or in response to the RA procedure being completedsuccessfully.

The first DL BWP and the second DL BWP of the wireless device may beconfigured with a common search space. The wireless device may stop thefirst inactivity timer of the first DL BWP and the second inactivitytimer of the second DL BWP of the cell, for example, based on initiatingthe RA procedure.

The wireless device may determine, based on one or more criteria, atleast one BWP (e.g., selected BWP(s)) of the at least two (downlink)BWPs. The wireless device may select the at least one BWP based oninitiating the RA procedure. The selected BWP(s) of the at least twoBWPs may comprise a BWP, among the at least two BWPs, comprising alowest numerology (e.g., subcarrier spacing). The selected BWP with thelowest numerology may have a longest RA response window. The wirelessdevice may receive an RA response of the RA procedure, for example,after an expiry of a corresponding RA response window of each of the atleast two BWPs except the selected BWP(s).

The selected BWP(s) may comprise a BWP, among the at least two BWPs, ahighest numerology (e.g., subcarrier spacing). The selected BWPcomprising the highest numerology may have a shortest RA responsewindow. The wireless device may resend (e.g., retransmit) a preamblefaster in time, for example, if the one selected BWP is a BWP with thehighest numerology.

The first DL BWP may be indicated (e.g., identified) by a firstsubcarrier spacing. The second DL BWP may be indicated (e.g.,identified) by a second subcarrier spacing. The first subcarrier spacingand the second subcarrier spacing may be configured for the wirelessdevice by the base station.

A first subcarrier spacing (e.g., 15 KHz) may be less than a secondsubcarrier spacing (e.g., 60 KHz). The wireless device may determinethat the first subcarrier spacing is less than the second subcarrierspacing. The wireless device may stop the first inactivity timer of thefirst DL BWP of the cell, for example, based on determining that thefirst subcarrier spacing is less than the second subcarrier spacing.

A first subcarrier spacing (e.g., 60 KHz) may be greater than a secondsubcarrier spacing (e.g., 15 KHz). The wireless device may determinethat the first subcarrier spacing is greater than the second subcarrierspacing. The wireless device may stop the first inactivity timer of thefirst DL BWP of the cell, for example, based on determining that thefirst subcarrier spacing is greater than the second subcarrier spacing.

The wireless device may start a first response window (e.g.,ra-ResponseWindow) at a first PDCCH occasion on the first DL BWP of thecell, for example, starting from the end of the sending (e.g.,transmitting) the RA preamble. The first response window may beconfigured by a higher layer (e.g., a MAC layer, an RRC layer, etc.).

The wireless device may monitor the first PDCCH occasion for DCI, forexample, if the first response window is running. The DCI may beindicated (e.g., identified, scrambled, etc.) by an RA-RNTI. The DCI maybe indicated (e.g., identified, scrambled, etc.) by a C-RNTI of thewireless device. The base station may send (e.g., transmit) the DCI onthe first DL BWP of the cell. The base station may select the first DLBWP, for example, based on the first subcarrier spacing being less (orgreater) than the second subcarrier spacing.

The RA procedure may be completed successfully, for example, if thewireless device receives the DCI on the first DL BWP. The wirelessdevice may restart the first inactivity timer of the first DL BWP, forexample, after or in response to the RA procedure being successfullycompleted.

A wireless device may receive from a base station, one or more messages.The one or more messages may comprise one or more configurationparameters of a first cell and a second cell. The first cell maycomprise a BWPs. A wireless device may activate at least two BWPs of theplurality of BWPs. Each of the at least two BWPs may comprise at leastone control channel. Each of the at least two BWPs may be associatedwith an RA response (RAR) monitoring timer. Activating the at least twoBWPs may comprise activating a first BWP of the at least two BWPs in afirst slot and activating a second BWP of the at least two BPWs in asecond slot. The first slot and the second slot may be different.

A wireless device may initiate an RA procedure. The RA procedure may befor the second cell. The RA procedure may be a contention-free RAprocedure of the first cell. A wireless device may send (e.g., transmit)at least one preamble via at least one RA channel resource. The at leastone RA channel resource may be on the second cell, for example, if theRA procedure is for the second cell. The at least one RA channelresource may be on the first cell, for example, if the RA procedure isfor the first cell.

The wireless device may start a RAR monitoring timer of each of the atleast two BWPs, for example, after or in response to sending (e.g.,transmitting) the at least one preamble. The wireless device maymonitor, for DCI, the at least one control channel of each of the atleast two BWPs based on starting the RAR monitoring timer. The DCI maybe addressed to C-RNTI. The DCI may be addressed to RA-RNTI. Thewireless device may determine an expiry of the RAR monitoring timer ofeach of the at least two BWPs. The wireless device may send (e.g.,transmit) at least one second preamble for the RA procedure, forexample, after or in response to determining the expiry of the RARmonitoring timer of the each of the at least two BWPs. The wirelessdevice may determine an expiry of an RAR monitoring timer of all theactive BWPs (e.g., at least two BWPs). The wireless device may send(e.g., transmit) at least one second preamble for the RA procedure, forexample, after or in response to determining the expiry of the RARmonitoring timer of all active BWPs.

FIG. 38 shows an example of multiple active BWP operations. A wirelessdevice may receive, from a base station, one or more messages. The oneor more messages may comprise one or more configuration parameters of afirst cell. The first cell may comprise a plurality of DL BWPs and aplurality of UL BWPs. Each of the plurality of DL BWPs and each of theplurality of UL BWPs may be indicated (e.g., identified) by aBWP-specific index. Each of the plurality of DL BWPs may be associatedwith a BWP-specific inactivity timer.

Each of the plurality of DL BWPs and UL BWPs may be in one of an activestate and an inactive state. The active state of a first DL BWP maycomprise monitoring a DL control channel of the first BWP. The inactivestate of a first DL BWP may comprise refraining from monitoring a DLcontrol channel of the first BWP.

The wireless device may activate at least two DL BWPs (e.g., DL BWP 13802 and DL BWP 2 3804) of the plurality of DL BWPs. Activating the atleast two DL BWPs may comprise activating a first DL BWP of the at leasttwo DL BWPs in a first slot and activating a second DL BWP of the atleast two DL BWPs in a second slot. The first slot and the second slotmay be different.

The wireless device may activate at least two UL BWPs (e.g., UL BWP 13806 and UL BWP 2 3808) of the plurality of UL BWPs. Activating the atleast two UL BWPs may comprise activating a first UL BWP of the at leasttwo UL BWPs in a third slot and activating a second UL BWP of the atleast two UL BWPs in a fourth slot. The second slot and the fourth slotmay be different.

The wireless device may start BWP-specific inactivity timerscorresponding to the at least two DL BWPs, for example, after or inresponse to the activating the at least two DL BWPs. The wireless devicemay start BWP inactivity timers of the at least two downlink BWPs (e.g.,first BWP inactivity timer of the DL BWP-1 and second BWP inactivitytimer of the DL BWP-2), for example, if the wireless device activates atleast two downlink BWPs (e.g., DL BWP-1 and DL-BWP-2). The starting theBWP-specific inactivity timers corresponding to the at least two DL BWPsmay comprise (i) starting a first BWP-specific inactivity timer of afirst DL BWP of the at least two DL BWPs, for example, after or inresponse to activating the first DL BWP, and/or (ii) starting a secondBWP-specific inactivity timer of a second DL BWP of the at least two DLBWPs, for example, after or in response to activating the second DL BWP.

At least one of the at least two UL BWPs (e.g., the UL BWP 3806 and/orthe UL BWP 2 3808), for example, may be configured with PRACH resources.The wireless device may initiate an RA procedure, for example, if atleast one of the at least two UL BWPs (e.g., the UL BWP 3806 and/or theUL BWP 2 3808) are configured with PRACH resources. The at least two ULBWPs (e.g., the UL BWP 1 3806 and/or the UL BWP 2 3808) may not beconfigured with PRACH resources. The wireless device may select, basedon one or more criteria, at least one DL BWP (e.g., selected DL BWP(s))of the at least two DL BWPs and at least one UL BWP (e.g., selected ULBWP(s)) of the at least two UL BWPs, if the at least two UL BWPs are notconfigured with PRACH resources, for example, after or in response toinitiating the RA procedure.

The wireless device may switch from the selected DL BWP(s) to an initialDL BWP 3812 and/or from the selected UL BWP(s) to an initial UL BWP3810, for example, after or in response to determining of the selectedDL BWP(s) and the selected UL BWP(s). The wireless device may performthe RA procedure on the initial UL BWP 3810 and/or the initial DL BWP3812, for example, based on the switching.

The one or more criteria for determining BWPs (e.g., DL BWP(s) and/or ULBWP(s)) may be based on a value of a BWP-specific index. The determiningmay comprise, for example, selecting an UL BWP with a lowest ULBWP-specific index among at least two UL BWP-specific indexes of the atleast two UL BWPs. The determining may comprise, for example, selectinga DL BWP with a lowest DL BWP-specific index among at least two DLBWP-specific indexes of the at least two DL BWPs. The determining maycomprise, for example, selecting a DL BWP with a highest DL BWP-specificindex among at least two DL BWP-specific indexes of the at least two DLBWPs. The determining may comprise, for example, selecting a UL BWP witha highest UL BWP-specific index among at least two UL BWP-specificindexes of the at least two UL BWPs.

The determining may comprise, for example, selecting a DL BWP, of the atleast two DL BWPs, that is a primary DL BWP. The determining maycomprise, for example, selecting an UL BWP, of the at least two UL BWPs,that is a primary UL BWP. The determining may comprise, for example,selecting a DL BWP, of the at least two DL BWPs, that is a secondary DLBWP. The determining may comprise, for example, selecting an UL BWP, ofthe at least two UL BWPs, that is a secondary UL BWP.

The determining may comprise, for example, selecting an UL BWPassociated with a lowest numerology index among the at least two ULBWPs. The determining may comprise, for example, selecting an UL BWPassociated with a highest numerology index among the at least two ULBWPs. The determining may comprise, for example, selecting a DL BWP witha lowest numerology index among the at least two DL BWPs. Thedetermining may comprise, for example, selecting a DL BWP with a highestnumerology index among the at least two DL BWPs. The determining maycomprise, for example, selecting the at least two DL BWPs and the atleast two UL BWPs. The determining may comprise, for example, selectingall of active DL BWPs and all of active UL BWPs.

FIG. 39 shows an example method for multiple active BWPs operations. Atstep 3902, a wireless device may receive configuration parameters (e.g.,BWP configuration parameters) for a first cell (e.g., PCell) and asecond cell (e.g., SCell). At step 3904, the wireless device mayactivate at least two DL BWPs (e.g., a first DL BWP and a second DL BWP)that are active of the first cell. At step 3906, the wireless device mayinitiate an RA procedure for the second cell. At step 3908, the wirelessdevice may send (e.g., transmit), via the second cell, an RA preamblefor the RA procedure. At step 3910, the wireless device may start a RAresponse windows at the at least two DL BWPs (e.g., a first RA responsewindow of the first DL BWP and a second RA response window of the secondDL BWP). At step 3912, the wireless device may determine whether all ofthe RA response windows (e.g., the first RA response window and thesecond RA response window) have expired. At step 3916, the wirelessdevice may refrain from resending (e.g., retransmitting) the RApreamble, for example, if the wireless device determines that all of theRA response windows (e.g., the first RA response window and the secondRA response window) have not expired. At step 3916, the wireless devicemay resend (e.g., retransmit) the RA preamble, for example, if thewireless device determines that all of the RA response windows (e.g.,the first RA response window and the second RA response window) haveexpired.

FIG. 40 shows an example method for multiple active BWPs operation. Atstep 4002, a wireless device may receive configuration parameters (e.g.,BWP configuration parameters) for a cell. At step 4004, the wirelessdevice may activate at least two UL BWPs. At step 4006, the wirelessdevice may initiate an RA procedure for the cell. At step 4008, thewireless device may determine whether at least one UL BWP of the two ULBWPs is configured with RA channel resources. At step 4010, the wirelessdevice may transmit an RA preamble, for example, if the wireless devicedetermines that at least one UL BWP of the two UL BWPs is configuredwith RA channel resources. At step 4012, the wireless device may selectan UL BWP from among the at least two UL BWPs, for example, based on atleast one of: (i) selecting an UL BWP with a lowest BWP index, (ii)selecting an UL BWP with a lowest numerology, and/or (iii) selecting anUL BWP configured as a primary/secondary BWP. At step 4014, the wirelessdevice may switch the selected UL BWP to an initial UL BWP. At step4016, the wireless device may determine whether at least two DL BWPs areactive. At step 4018, the wireless device may switch an active DL BWP toan initial DL, for example, if the wireless device determines that atleast two DL BWPs are not active. At step 4020, the wireless device mayselect a DL BWP from among the at least two DL BWPs, for example, basedon at least one of: (i) selecting a DL BWP with a lowest BWP index, (ii)selecting a DL BWP with a lowest numerology, and/or (iii) selecting a DLBWP configured as a primary/secondary BWP. At step 4022, the wirelessdevice may switch the selected DL BWP to an initial DL BWP.

A base station may send, to a wireless device that may receive, one ormore configuration parameters for uplink bandwidth parts (BWPs) of acell. The wireless device may activate at least two uplink BWPs of theuplink BWPs. The wireless device may initiate a random access procedurefor the cell. The wireless device may select, based on determining thatthe at least two uplink BWPs are not configured with random accesschannel resources, a first uplink BWP of the at least two uplink BWPs.The wireless device may switch from the first uplink BWP to an initialuplink BWP of the uplink BWPs. The wireless device may send, via theinitial uplink BWP, a preamble for the random access procedure. Thewireless device may activate a first downlink BWP and a second downlinkBWP of at least two downlink BWPs. The first downlink BWP may beassociated with a first random access response (RAR) monitoring window.The second downlink BWP may be associated with a second RAR monitoringwindow. The wireless device may start, based on sending the preamble,the first RAR monitoring window and the second RAR monitoring window formonitoring a random access response to the preamble. The wireless devicemay determine that the first RAR monitoring window and/or the second RARmonitoring window have expired. The wireless device may send, based ondetermining that the first RAR monitoring window and/or that the secondRAR monitoring window has expired, at least one second preamble. Thewireless device may refrain from switching (e.g., may not switch) from asecond uplink BWP, of the at least two uplink BWPs, to the initialuplink BWP. The second uplink BWP may be different from the uplink BWP.The wireless device may activate the at least two uplink BWPs byactivating a first uplink BWP of the at least two uplink BWPs in a firstslot and/or activating a second uplink BWP of the at least two uplinkBWPs in a second slot. The one or more configuration parameters mayindicate a BWP-specific index for each of the uplink BWPs. The wirelessdevice may select the first uplink BWP based on a first BWP-specificindex associated with the first uplink BWP. The wireless device mayselect the first uplink BWP based on a highest or a lowest BWP-specificindex relative to BWP-specific indexes of the at least two uplink BWPs.The wireless device may select the first uplink BWP based on the firstuplink BWP being a primary uplink BWP. The wireless device may selectthe first uplink based on the first uplink BWP being a secondary uplinkBWP. The one or more configuration parameters may indicate aBWP-specific numerology for each of the uplink BWPs. The wireless devicemay select an uplink BWP based on a highest or lowest BWP-specificnumerology relative to BWP-specific numerologies of the at least twouplink BWPs. The base station may send, to the wireless device that mayreceive, one or more configuration parameters for downlink BWPs of thecell. The wireless device may activate at least two downlink BWPs of thedownlink BWPs. The wireless device may select a first downlink BWP ofthe at least two downlink BWPs, for example, based on determining thatthe at least two uplink BWPs are not configured with random accesschannel resources. The wireless device may switch from the firstdownlink BWP to an initial downlink BWP of the downlink BWPs. The one ormore configuration parameters may indicate a BWP specific index for eachof the downlink BWPs. The wireless device may select a first downlinkBWP based on the first downlink BWP being a primary downlink BWP. Thewireless device may select a first downlink BWP based on the firstdownlink BWP being a secondary downlink BWP. The one or moreconfiguration parameters may indicate a BWP specific numerology for eachof the downlink BWPs. The wireless device may refrain from switching(e.g., may not switch) from a second downlink BWP, of the at least twodownlink BWPs, to the initial downlink BWP. The second downlink BWP maybe different from the downlink BWP. The wireless device may activate afirst downlink BWP of the at least two downlink BWPs in a first slot.The wireless device may activate a second downlink BWP of the at leasttwo downlink BWPs in a second slot.

A base station may send, to a wireless device that may receive, one ormore configuration parameters for bandwidth parts (BWPs) of a cell. Thewireless device may activate at least two BWPs of the BWPs. The wirelessdevice may initiate a random access procedure for the cell. The wirelessdevice may select, based on determining that the at least two BWPs arenot configured with random access channel resources, a first BWP of theat least two BWPs. The wireless device may switch from the first BWP toa different BWP of the BWPs. The wireless device may send, via thedifferent BWP, a preamble for the random access procedure. The first BWPmay comprise a first uplink BWP that may be associated with a firstrandom access response (RAR) monitoring window. A second BWP of the atleast two BWPs may comprise a second uplink BWP that may be associatedwith a second RAR monitoring window. The wireless device may start,based on sending the preamble, the first RAR monitoring window and thesecond RAR monitoring window for monitoring a random access response tothe preamble. The wireless device may determine that the first RARmonitoring window and/or the second RAR monitoring window have expired.The wireless device may send, based on determining that the first RARmonitoring window and/or the second RAR monitoring window have expires,at least one second preamble. The wireless device may activate the firstBWP in a first slot. The wireless device may activate a second BWP ofthe at least two BWPs in a second slot. The one or more configurationparameters may indicate a BWP-specific index for each of the at leasttwo BWPs. The wireless device may select the first BWP based on a firstBWP-specific index associated with the first BWP. The wireless devicemay select the first BWP based on a highest or a lowest BWP-specificindex relative to BWP-specific indexes of the at least two BWPs. Thewireless device may select the first BWP based on the first BWP being aprimary BWP. The wireless device may select the first BWP based on thefirst BWP being a secondary uplink BWP. The one or more configurationparameters may indicate a BWP-specific numerology for each of the BWPs.The wireless device may select the first BWP based on a highest orlowest BWP-specific numerology relative to BWP-specific numerologies ofthe at least two BWPs. The at least two BWPs may comprise at least twodownlink BWPs and at least one uplink BWP.

A base station may send, to a wireless device that may receive, one ormore configuration parameters for a first BWP of a first cell and asecond BWP of the first cell. The wireless device may activate he firstBWP. The wireless device may activate the second BWP. The first BWP maybe associated with a first random access response (RAR) monitoringwindow. The second BWP may be associated with a second RAR monitoringwindow. The wireless device may send, via a second cell, at least onepreamble for a random access procedure. The wireless device may start,based on sending the at least one preamble, the first RAR monitoringwindow and the second RAR monitoring window for monitoring a randomaccess response to the at least one preamble. The wireless device maydetermine that the first RAR monitoring window and the second RARmonitoring window have expired. The wireless device may send, based onthe determining, at least one second preamble. The wireless device mayswitch, based on determining that the first RAR monitoring window and/orthe second RAR monitoring window have expired, from the first BWP to athird BWP of the first cell.

FIG. 41 shows example elements of a computing device that may be used toimplement any of the various devices described herein, including, e.g.,the base station 120A and/or 120B, the wireless device 110 (e.g., 110Aand/or 110B), or any other base station, wireless device, or computingdevice described herein. The computing device 4100 may include one ormore processors 4101, which may execute instructions stored in therandom access memory (RAM) 4103, the removable media 4104 (such as aUniversal Serial Bus (USB) drive, compact disk (CD) or digital versatiledisk (DVD), or floppy disk drive), or any other desired storage medium.Instructions may also be stored in an attached (or internal) hard drive4105. The computing device 4100 may also include a security processor(not shown), which may execute instructions of one or more computerprograms to monitor the processes executing on the processor 4101 andany process that requests access to any hardware and/or softwarecomponents of the computing device 4100 (e.g., ROM 4102, RAM 4103, theremovable media 4104, the hard drive 4105, the device controller 4107, anetwork interface 4109, a GPS 4111, a Bluetooth interface 4112, a WiFiinterface 4113, etc.). The computing device 4100 may include one or moreoutput devices, such as the display 4106 (e.g., a screen, a displaydevice, a monitor, a television, etc.), and may include one or moreoutput device controllers 4107, such as a video processor. There mayalso be one or more user input devices 4108, such as a remote control,keyboard, mouse, touch screen, microphone, etc. The computing device4100 may also include one or more network interfaces, such as a networkinterface 4109, which may be a wired interface, a wireless interface, ora combination of the two. The network interface 4109 may provide aninterface for the computing device 4100 to communicate with a network4110 (e.g., a RAN, or any other network). The network interface 4109 mayinclude a modem (e.g., a cable modem), and the external network 4110 mayinclude communication links, an external network, an in-home network, aprovider's wireless, coaxial, fiber, or hybrid fiber/coaxialdistribution system (e.g., a DOCSIS network), or any other desirednetwork. Additionally, the computing device 4100 may include alocation-detecting device, such as a global positioning system (GPS)microprocessor 4111, which may be configured to receive and processglobal positioning signals and determine, with possible assistance froman external server and antenna, a geographic position of the computingdevice 4100.

The example in FIG. 41 may be a hardware configuration, although thecomponents shown may be implemented as software as well. Modificationsmay be made to add, remove, combine, divide, etc. components of thecomputing device 4100 as desired. Additionally, the components may beimplemented using basic computing devices and components, and the samecomponents (e.g., processor 4101, ROM storage 4102, display 4106, etc.)may be used to implement any of the other computing devices andcomponents described herein. For example, the various componentsdescribed herein may be implemented using computing devices havingcomponents such as a processor executing computer-executableinstructions stored on a computer-readable medium, as shown in FIG. 41.Some or all of the entities described herein may be software based, andmay co-exist in a common physical platform (e.g., a requesting entitymay be a separate software process and program from a dependent entity,both of which may be executed as software on a common computing device).

The disclosed mechanisms herein may be performed if certain criteria aremet, for example, in a wireless device, a base station, a radioenvironment, a network, a combination of the above, and/or the like.Example criteria may be based on, for example, wireless device and/ornetwork node configurations, traffic load, initial system set up, packetsizes, traffic characteristics, a combination of the above, and/or thelike. If the one or more criteria are met, various examples may be used.It may be possible to implement examples that selectively implementdisclosed protocols.

A base station may communicate with a mix of wireless devices. Wirelessdevices and/or base stations may support multiple technologies, and/ormultiple releases of the same technology. Wireless devices may have somespecific capability(ies) depending on wireless device category and/orcapability(ies). A base station may comprise multiple sectors. A basestation communicating with a plurality of wireless devices may refer tobase station communicating with a subset of the total wireless devicesin a coverage area. Wireless devices referred to herein may correspondto a plurality of wireless devices of a particular LTE or 5G releasewith a given capability and in a given sector of a base station. Aplurality of wireless devices may refer to a selected plurality ofwireless devices, and/or a subset of total wireless devices in acoverage area. Such devices may operate, function, and/or perform basedon or according to drawings and/or descriptions herein, and/or the like.There may be a plurality of base stations or a plurality of wirelessdevices in a coverage area that may not comply with the disclosedmethods, for example, because those wireless devices and/or basestations perform based on older releases of LTE or 5G technology.

One or more features described herein may be implemented in acomputer-usable data and/or computer-executable instructions, such as inone or more program modules, executed by one or more computers or otherdevices. Generally, program modules include routines, programs, objects,components, data structures, etc. that perform particular tasks orimplement particular abstract data types when executed by a processor ina computer or other data processing device. The computer executableinstructions may be stored on one or more computer readable media suchas a hard disk, optical disk, removable storage media, solid statememory, RAM, etc. The functionality of the program modules may becombined or distributed as desired. The functionality may be implementedin whole or in part in firmware or hardware equivalents such asintegrated circuits, field programmable gate arrays (FPGA), and thelike. Particular data structures may be used to more effectivelyimplement one or more features described herein, and such datastructures are contemplated within the scope of computer executableinstructions and computer-usable data described herein.

Many of the elements in examples may be implemented as modules. A modulemay be an isolatable element that performs a defined function and has adefined interface to other elements. The modules may be implemented inhardware, software in combination with hardware, firmware, wetware(i.e., hardware with a biological element) or a combination thereof, allof which may be behaviorally equivalent. For example, modules may beimplemented as a software routine written in a computer languageconfigured to be executed by a hardware machine (such as C, C++,Fortran, Java, Basic, Matlab or the like) or a modeling/simulationprogram such as Simulink, Stateflow, GNU Octave, or Lab VIEWMathScript.Additionally or alternatively, it may be possible to implement modulesusing physical hardware that incorporates discrete or programmableanalog, digital and/or quantum hardware. Examples of programmablehardware may comprise: computers, microcontrollers, microprocessors,application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs); field programmablegate arrays (FPGAs); and complex programmable logic devices (CPLDs).Computers, microcontrollers, and microprocessors may be programmed usinglanguages such as assembly, C, C++ or the like. FPGAs, ASICs, and CPLDsmay be programmed using hardware description languages (HDL), such asVHSIC hardware description language (VHDL) or Verilog, which mayconfigure connections between internal hardware modules with lesserfunctionality on a programmable device. The above-mentioned technologiesmay be used in combination to achieve the result of a functional module.

A non-transitory tangible computer readable media may compriseinstructions executable by one or more processors configured to causeoperations of multi-carrier communications described herein. An articleof manufacture may comprise a non-transitory tangible computer readablemachine-accessible medium having instructions encoded thereon forenabling programmable hardware to cause a device (e.g., a wirelessdevice, wireless communicator, a wireless device, a base station, andthe like) to allow operation of multi-carrier communications describedherein. The device, or one or more devices such as in a system, mayinclude one or more processors, memory, interfaces, and/or the like.Other examples may comprise communication networks comprising devicessuch as base stations, wireless devices or user equipment (wirelessdevice), servers, switches, antennas, and/or the like. A network maycomprise any wireless technology, including but not limited to,cellular, wireless, WiFi, 4G, 5G, any generation of 3GPP or othercellular standard or recommendation, wireless local area networks,wireless personal area networks, wireless ad hoc networks, wirelessmetropolitan area networks, wireless wide area networks, global areanetworks, space networks, and any other network using wirelesscommunications. Any device (e.g., a wireless device, a base station, orany other device) or combination of devices may be used to perform anycombination of one or more of steps described herein, including, forexample, any complementary step or steps of one or more of the abovesteps.

Although examples are described above, features and/or steps of thoseexamples may be combined, divided, omitted, rearranged, revised, and/oraugmented in any desired manner Various alterations, modifications, andimprovements will readily occur to those skilled in the art. Suchalterations, modifications, and improvements are intended to be part ofthis description, though not expressly stated herein, and are intendedto be within the spirit and scope of the descriptions herein.Accordingly, the foregoing description is by way of example only, and isnot limiting.

What is claimed is:
 1. A method comprising: receiving, by a wirelessdevice, one or more configuration parameters for uplink bandwidth parts(BWPs) of a cell; activating a first uplink BWP and a second uplink BWPof the uplink BWPs; initiating a random access procedure for the cell;based on a determination that the first uplink BWP and the second uplinkBWP are not configured with random access channel resources, switchingfrom the first uplink BWP to a third uplink BWP of the uplink BWPsduring a time that the second uplink BWP is active; and sending, via thethird uplink BWP, a preamble for the random access procedure.
 2. Themethod of claim 1, further comprising: activating a first downlink BWPand a second downlink BWP of at least two downlink BWPs, wherein thefirst downlink BWP is associated with a first random access response(RAR) monitoring window and the second downlink BWP is associated with asecond RAR monitoring window; and starting, based on sending thepreamble, the first RAR monitoring window and the second RAR monitoringwindow for monitoring a random access response to the preamble.
 3. Themethod of claim 2, further comprising: sending, based on expiration ofthe first RAR monitoring window and the second RAR monitoring window, atleast one second preamble.
 4. The method of claim 1, wherein the one ormore configuration parameters indicate a BWP-specific index for each ofthe uplink BWPs, and wherein the method further comprises selecting thefirst uplink BWP, from which to switch to the third uplink BWP, based ona first BWP-specific index associated with the first uplink BWP.
 5. Themethod of claim 1, further comprising: selecting the first uplink BWP,from which to switch to the third uplink BWP, based on a highest or alowest BWP-specific index relative to BWP-specific indexes of the firstuplink BWP and the second uplink BWP.
 6. The method of claim 1, furthercomprising: selecting the first uplink BWP, from which to switch to thethird uplink BWP, based on the first uplink BWP being a primary uplinkBWP.
 7. The method of claim 1, further comprising: selecting the firstuplink BWP, from which to switch to the third uplink BWP, based on thefirst uplink BWP being a secondary uplink BWP.
 8. The method of claim 1,wherein the one or more configuration parameters indicate a BWP-specificnumerology for each of the uplink BWPs, and wherein the method furthercomprises selecting the first uplink BWP, from which to switch to thethird uplink BWP, based on a highest or lowest BWP-specific numerologyrelative to BWP-specific numerologies of the first uplink BWP and thesecond uplink BWP.
 9. The method of claim 1, further comprising:receiving one or more configuration parameters for downlink BWPs of thecell; activating a first downlink BWP and a second downlink BWP of thedownlink BWPs; and based on the determination that the first uplink BWPand the second uplink BWP are not configured with random access channelresources, switching from the first downlink BWP to a third downlink BWPof the downlink BWPs.
 10. A method comprising: receiving, by a wirelessdevice, one or more configuration parameters for bandwidth parts (BWPs)of a cell; activating a first BWP and a second BWP of the BWPs;initiating a random access procedure for the cell; based on adetermination that the first BWP and the second BWP are not configuredwith random access channel resources, switching from the first BWP to athird BWP of the BWPs during a time that the second BWP is active; andsending, via the third BWP, a preamble for the random access procedure.11. The method of claim 10, wherein the first BWP comprises a firstuplink BWP that is associated with a first random access response (RAR)monitoring window, and wherein the second BWP comprises a second uplinkBWP that is associated with a second RAR monitoring window, and whereinthe method further comprises: starting, based on sending the preamble,the first RAR monitoring window and the second RAR monitoring window formonitoring a random access response to the preamble; determining thatthe first RAR monitoring window and the second RAR monitoring windowhave expired; and sending, based on expiration of the first RARmonitoring window and the second RAR monitoring window, at least onesecond preamble.
 12. The method of claim 10, wherein the activating thefirst BWP and the second BWP comprises: activating the first BWP in afirst slot; and activating the second BWP in a second slot.
 13. Themethod of claim 10, wherein the one or more configuration parametersindicate a BWP-specific index for each of the first BWP and the secondBWP, and wherein the method further comprises selecting the first BWP,from which to switch to the third BWP, based on a first BWP-specificindex associated with the first BWP.
 14. The method of claim 10, furthercomprising: selecting the first BWP, from which to switch to the thirdBWP, based on a highest or a lowest BWP-specific index relative toBWP-specific indexes of the first BWP and the second BWP.
 15. The methodof claim 10, further comprising: selecting the first BWP, from which toswitch to the third BWP, based on the first BWP being a primary BWP. 16.The method of claim 10, further comprising: selecting the first BWP,from which to switch to the third BWP, based on the first BWP being asecondary uplink BWP.
 17. The method of claim 10, wherein the one ormore configuration parameters indicate a BWP-specific numerology foreach of the BWPs, and wherein method further comprises selecting thefirst BWP, from which to switch to the third BWP, based on a highest orlowest BWP-specific numerology relative to BWP-specific numerologies ofthe first BWP and the second BWP.
 18. The method of claim 10, whereinthe first BWP and the second BWP comprise: a first downlink BWP and asecond downlink BWP; or a first uplink BWP and a second uplink BWP. 19.A method comprising: receiving, by a wireless device, one or moreconfiguration parameters for a first bandwidth part (BWP) of a firstcell and a second BWP of the first cell; activating the first BWP andthe second BWP, wherein the first BWP is associated with a firstrandom-access response (RAR) monitoring window and wherein the secondBWP is associated with a second RAR monitoring window; sending, via asecond cell, at least one preamble for a random access procedure;starting, based on the sending the at least one preamble, the first RARmonitoring window and the second RAR monitoring window for monitoring arandom access response to the at least one preamble; determining thatthe first RAR monitoring window and the second RAR monitoring windowhave expired; and sending, based on the determining, at least one secondpreamble.
 20. The method of claim 19, further comprising switching,based on the determining, from the first BWP to a third BWP of the firstcell.
 21. The method of claim 19, further comprising: based on adetermination that the first BWP and the second BWP are not configuredwith random access channel resources, determining one of the first BWPand the second BWP; and switching, from the one of the first BWP and thesecond BWP, to a different BWP of the first cell.
 22. The method ofclaim 21, wherein the one or more configuration parameters indicate aBWP-specific index for the first BWP and the second BWP, and wherein thedetermining the one of the first BWP and the second BWP is based on afirst BWP-specific index associated with the one of the first BWP andthe second BWP.
 23. The method of claim 21, wherein the determining theone of the first BWP and the second BWP comprises determining the one ofthe first BWP and the second BWP based on a highest or a lowestBWP-specific index relative to BWP-specific indexes of the first BWP andthe second BWP.